chore(release): v3.0.0-beta.46 [skip ci]

.eslintignore

@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+.tmp
+**/.git
+**/.hg
+**/.pnp.*
+**/.svn
+**/.yarn/**
+**/build
+**/dist/**
+**/node_modules
+**/temp
+playwright.config.ts
+jest.config.js
+test/live-preview/next-app
+tsconfig.tsbuildinfo

.eslintrc.cjs

@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+/** @type {import('eslint').Linter.Config} */
+module.exports = {
+  extends: ['@payloadcms'],
+  ignorePatterns: ['README.md', 'packages/**/*.spec.ts'],
+  overrides: [
+    {
+      files: ['packages/**'],
+      plugins: ['payload'],
+      rules: {
+        'payload/no-jsx-import-statements': 'warn',
+        'payload/no-relative-monorepo-imports': 'error',
+        'payload/no-imports-from-exports-dir': 'error',
+      },
+    },
+    {
+      files: ['scripts/**'],
+      rules: {
+        '@typescript-eslint/no-unused-vars': 'off',
+        'no-console': 'off',
+        'perfectionist/sort-object-types': 'off',
+        'perfectionist/sort-objects': 'off',
+      },
+    },
+    {
+      extends: ['plugin:@typescript-eslint/disable-type-checked'],
+      files: ['*.js', '*.cjs', '*.json', '*.md', '*.yml', '*.yaml'],
+    },
+    {
+      files: ['packages/eslint-config-payload/**'],
+      rules: {
+        'perfectionist/sort-objects': 'off',
+      },
+    },
+    {
+      files: ['templates/vercel-postgres/**'],
+      rules: {
+        'no-restricted-exports': 'off',
+      },
+    },
+    {
+      files: ['package.json', 'tsconfig.json'],
+      rules: {
+        'perfectionist/sort-array-includes': 'off',
+        'perfectionist/sort-astro-attributes': 'off',
+        'perfectionist/sort-classes': 'off',
+        'perfectionist/sort-enums': 'off',
+        'perfectionist/sort-exports': 'off',
+        'perfectionist/sort-imports': 'off',
+        'perfectionist/sort-interfaces': 'off',
+        'perfectionist/sort-jsx-props': 'off',
+        'perfectionist/sort-keys': 'off',
+        'perfectionist/sort-maps': 'off',
+        'perfectionist/sort-named-exports': 'off',
+        'perfectionist/sort-named-imports': 'off',
+        'perfectionist/sort-object-types': 'off',
+        'perfectionist/sort-objects': 'off',
+        'perfectionist/sort-svelte-attributes': 'off',
+        'perfectionist/sort-union-types': 'off',
+        'perfectionist/sort-vue-attributes': 'off',
+      },
+    },
+  ],
+  parserOptions: {
+    project: ['./tsconfig.json'],
+    tsconfigRootDir: __dirname,
+    EXPERIMENTAL_useSourceOfProjectReferenceRedirect: true,
+    EXPERIMENTAL_useProjectService: true,
+    sourceType: 'module',
+    ecmaVersion: 'latest',
+  },
+  root: true,
+}

.git-blame-ignore-revs

@@ -19,6 +19,3 @@ fb7d1be2f3325d076b7c967b1730afcef37922c2
 
 # 3.0 prettier & lint everywhere
 6789e61488a1d3de56f472ac3214faf344030005
-
-# 3.0 prettier & lint everywhere again
-83fd4c66222d7846eeb5cc332dfa99bf1e830831

.github/workflows/main.yml

@@ -503,7 +503,6 @@ jobs:
 
   generated-templates:
     needs: build
-    if: false # Needs to pull in tgz files from build
     runs-on: ubuntu-latest
 
     steps:

.gitignore

@@ -12,11 +12,6 @@ test-results
 .localstack
 .turbo
 
-meta_client.json
-meta_server.json
-meta_index.json
-meta_shared.json
-
 .turbo
 
 # Ignore test directory media folder/files

.husky/pre-commit

@@ -1 +1,4 @@
+#!/usr/bin/env sh
+. "$(dirname -- "$0")/_/husky.sh"
+
 pnpm run lint-staged --quiet

.idea/payload.iml

@@ -74,7 +74,6 @@
       <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/translations/dist" />
       <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/ui/.swc" />
       <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/ui/.turbo" />
-      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/ui/dist" />
     </content>
     <orderEntry type="inheritedJdk" />
     <orderEntry type="sourceFolder" forTests="false" />

app/(payload)/layout.tsx

@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
 /* THIS FILE WAS GENERATED AUTOMATICALLY BY PAYLOAD. */
 import configPromise from '@payload-config'
 import { RootLayout } from '@payloadcms/next/layouts'
-// import '@payloadcms/ui/styles.css' // Uncomment this line if `@payloadcms/ui` in `tsconfig.json` points to `/ui/dist` instead of `/ui/src`
 /* DO NOT MODIFY IT BECAUSE IT COULD BE REWRITTEN AT ANY TIME. */
 import React from 'react'
 

docs/access-control/collections.mdx

@@ -3,143 +3,99 @@ title: Collection Access Control
 label: Collections
 order: 20
 desc: With Collection-level Access Control you can define which users can create, read, update or delete Collections.
-keywords: collections, access control, permissions, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: collections, access control, permissions, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
-Collection Access Control is [Access Control](../access-control) used to restrict access to Documents within a [Collection](../collections/overview), as well as what they can and cannot see within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) as it relates to that Collection.
+You can define Collection-level Access Control within each Collection's `access` property. All Access Control functions accept one `args` argument.
 
-To add Access Control to a Collection, use the `access` property in your [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
-
-```ts
-import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload';
-
-export const CollectionWithAccessControl: CollectionConfig = {
-  // ...
-  access: { // highlight-line
-    // ...
-  },
-}
-```
-
-## Config Options
-
-Access Control is specific to the operation of the request.
-
-To add Access Control to a Collection, use the `access` property in your [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
-
-```ts
-import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload';
-
-export const CollectionWithAccessControl: CollectionConfig = {
-  // ...
-  // highlight-start
-  access: {
-    create: () => {...},
-    read: () => {...},
-    update: () => {...},
-    delete: () => {...},
-
-    // Auth-enabled Collections only
-    admin: () => {...},
-    unlock: () => {...},
-
-    // Version-enabled Collections only
-    readVersion: () => {...},
-  },
-  // highlight-end
-}
-```
-
-The following options are available:
+## Available Controls
 
 | Function                | Allows/Denies Access                         |
 | ----------------------- | -------------------------------------------- |
-| **`create`** | Used in the `create` operation. [More details](#create). |
-| **`read`**     | Used in the `find` and `findByID` operations. [More details](#read). |
-| **`update`** | Used in the `update` operation. [More details](#update). |
-| **`delete`** | Used in the `delete` operation. [More details](#delete). |
+| **[`create`](#create)** | Used in the `create` operation               |
+| **[`read`](#read)**     | Used in the `find` and `findByID` operations |
+| **[`update`](#update)** | Used in the `update` operation               |
+| **[`delete`](#delete)** | Used in the `delete` operation               |
 
-If a Collection supports [`Authentication`](../authentication/overview), the following additional options are available:
+#### Auth-enabled Controls
+
+If a Collection supports [`Authentication`](/docs/authentication/overview), the following Access Controls become available:
 
 | Function                | Allows/Denies Access                                           |
 | ----------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`admin`**   | Used to restrict access to the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview). [More details](#admin). |
-| **`unlock`** | Used to restrict which users can access the `unlock` operation. [More details](#unlock). |
+| **[`admin`](#admin)**   | Used to restrict access to the Payload Admin panel             |
+| **[`unlock`](#unlock)** | Used to restrict which users can access the `unlock` operation |
 
-If a Collection supports [Versions](../versions/overview), the following additional options are available:
+**Example Collection config:**
 
-| Function           | Allows/Denies Access                                                                                                   |
-| ------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`readVersions`** | Used to control who can read versions, and who can't. Will automatically restrict the Admin UI version viewing access. [More details](#read-versions). |
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types';
+
+export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
+  slug: "posts",
+  // highlight-start
+  access: {
+    create: ({ req: { user } }) => { ... },
+    read: ({ req: { user } }) => { ... },
+    update: ({ req: { user } }) => { ... },
+    delete: ({ req: { user } }) => { ... },
+    admin: ({ req: { user } }) => { ... },
+  },
+  // highlight-end
+};
+```
 
 ### Create
 
 Returns a boolean which allows/denies access to the `create` request.
 
-To add create Access Control to a Collection, use the `create` property in the [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
+**Available argument properties:**
+
+| Option     | Description                                                                |
+| ---------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`req`**  | The Express `request` object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
+| **`data`** | The data passed to create the document with.                               |
+
+**Example:**
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const CollectionWithCreateAccess: CollectionConfig = {
-  // ...
+const PublicUsers = {
+  slug: 'public-users',
   access: {
     // highlight-start
-    create: ({ req: { user }, data }) => {
-      return Boolean(user)
-    },
+    // allow guest users to self-registration
+    create: () => true,
     // highlight-end
+    ...
   },
+  fields: [ ... ],
 }
 ```
 
-The following arguments are provided to the `create` function:
-
-| Option     | Description                                                                                                                  |
-| ---------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`**  | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user`. |
-| **`data`** | The data passed to create the document with.                                                                                 |
-
 ### Read
 
-Returns a boolean which allows/denies access to the `read` request.
+Read access functions can return a boolean result or optionally return a [query constraint](/docs/queries/overview) which limits the documents that are returned to only those that match the constraint you provide. This can be helpful to restrict users' access to only certain documents however you specify.
 
-To add read Access Control to a Collection, use the `read` property in the [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
+**Available argument properties:**
+
+| Option    | Description                                                                |
+| --------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`req`** | The Express `request` object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
+| **`id`**  | `id` of document requested, if within `findByID`                           |
+
+**Example:**
 
 ```ts
-import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { Access } from 'payload/config'
 
-export const CollectionWithReadAccess: CollectionConfig = {
-  // ...
-  access: {
-    // highlight-start
-    read: ({ req: { user } }) => {
-      return Boolean(user)
-    },
-    // highlight-end
-  },
-}
-```
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  Return a [Query](../queries/overview) to limit the Documents to only those that match the constraint. This can be helpful to restrict users' access to specific Documents. [More details](../queries/overview).
-</Banner>
-
-As your application becomes more complex, you may want to define your function in a separate file and import them into your Collection Config:
-
-```ts
-import type { Access } from 'payload'
-
-export const canReadPage: Access = ({ req: { user } }) => {
-  // Allow authenticated users
+const canReadPage: Access = ({ req: { user } }) => {
+  // allow authenticated users
   if (user) {
     return true
   }
-
-  // By returning a Query, guest users can read public Documents
-  // Note: this assumes you have a `isPublic` checkbox field on your Collection
+  // using a query constraint, guest users can access when a field named 'isPublic' is set to true
   return {
+    // assumes we have a checkbox field named 'isPublic'
     isPublic: {
       equals: true,
     },
@@ -147,96 +103,55 @@ export const canReadPage: Access = ({ req: { user } }) => {
 }
 ```
 
-The following arguments are provided to the `read` function:
-
-| Option    | Description                                                                |
-| --------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user`. |
-| **`id`**  | `id` of document requested, if within `findByID`.                           |
-
 ### Update
 
-Returns a boolean which allows/denies access to the `update` request.
+Update access functions can return a boolean result or optionally return a [query constraint](/docs/queries/overview) to limit the document(s) that can be updated by the currently authenticated user. For example, returning a `query` from the `update` Access Control is helpful in cases where you would like to restrict a user to only being able to update the documents containing a `createdBy` relationship field equal to the user's ID.
 
-To add update Access Control to a Collection, use the `update` property in the [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
+**Available argument properties:**
+
+| Option     | Description                                                                |
+| ---------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`req`**  | The Express `request` object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
+| **`id`**   | `id` of document requested to update                                       |
+| **`data`** | The data passed to update the document with                                |
+
+**Example:**
 
 ```ts
-import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { Access } from 'payload/config'
 
-export const CollectionWithUpdateAccess: CollectionConfig = {
-  // ...
-  access: {
-    // highlight-start
-    update: ({ req: { user }}) => {
-      return Boolean(user)
-    },
-    // highlight-end
-  },
-}
-```
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  Return a [Query](../queries/overview) to limit the Documents to only those that match the constraint. This can be helpful to restrict users' access to specific Documents. [More details](../queries/overview).
-</Banner>
-
-As your application becomes more complex, you may want to define your function in a separate file and import them into your Collection Config:
-
-```ts
-import type { Access } from 'payload'
-
-export const canUpdateUser: Access = ({ req: { user }, id }) => {
-  // Allow users with a role of 'admin'
+const canUpdateUser: Access = ({ req: { user }, id }) => {
+  // allow users with a role of 'admin'
   if (user.roles && user.roles.some((role) => role === 'admin')) {
     return true
   }
-
   // allow any other users to update only oneself
   return user.id === id
 }
 ```
 
-The following arguments are provided to the `update` function:
-
-| Option     | Description                                                                |
-| ---------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`**  | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user`. |
-| **`id`**   | `id` of document requested to update.                                       |
-| **`data`** | The data passed to update the document with.                                |
-
 ### Delete
 
 Similarly to the Update function, returns a boolean or a [query constraint](/docs/queries/overview) to limit which documents can be deleted by which users.
 
-To add delete Access Control to a Collection, use the `delete` property in the [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
+**Available argument properties:**
+
+| Option    | Description                                                                                         |
+| --------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`req`** | The Express `request` object with additional `user` property, which is the currently logged in user |
+| **`id`**  | `id` of document requested to delete                                                                |
+
+**Example:**
 
 ```ts
-import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { Access } from 'payload/config'
 
-export const CollectionWithDeleteAccess: CollectionConfig = {
-  // ...
-  access: {
-    // highlight-start
-    delete: ({ req: { user }}) => {
-      return Boolean(user)
-    },
-    // highlight-end
-  },
-}
-```
-
-As your application becomes more complex, you may want to define your function in a separate file and import them into your Collection Config:
-
-```ts
-import type { Access } from 'payload'
-
-export const canDeleteCustomer: Access = async ({ req, id }) => {
+const canDeleteCustomer: Access = async ({ req, id }) => {
   if (!id) {
-    // allow the admin UI to show controls to delete since it is indeterminate without the `id`
+    // allow the admin UI to show controls to delete since it is indeterminate without the id
     return true
   }
-
-  // Query another Collection using the `id`
+  // query another collection using the id
   const result = await req.payload.find({
     collection: 'contracts',
     limit: 0,
@@ -250,90 +165,22 @@ export const canDeleteCustomer: Access = async ({ req, id }) => {
 }
 ```
 
-The following arguments are provided to the `delete` function:
-
-| Option    | Description                                                                                         |
-| --------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object with additional `user` property, which is the currently logged in user. |
-| **`id`**  | `id` of document requested to delete.
-
 ### Admin
 
-If the Collection is use to access the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview#the-admin-user-collection), the `Admin` Access Control function determines whether or not the currently logged in user can access the admin UI.
+If the Collection is [used to access the Payload Admin panel](/docs/admin/overview#the-admin-user-collection), the `Admin` Access Control function determines whether or not the currently logged in user can access the admin UI.
 
-To add Admin Access Control to a Collection, use the `admin` property in the [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
-
-```ts
-import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const CollectionWithAdminAccess: CollectionConfig = {
-  // ...
-  access: {
-    // highlight-start
-    admin: ({ req: { user }}) => {
-      return Boolean(user)
-    },
-    // highlight-end
-  },
-}
-```
-
-The following arguments are provided to the `admin` function:
+**Available argument properties:**
 
 | Option    | Description                                                                |
 | --------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user`. |
+| **`req`** | The Express `request` object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
 
 ### Unlock
 
 Determines which users can [unlock](/docs/authentication/operations#unlock) other users who may be blocked from authenticating successfully due to [failing too many login attempts](/docs/authentication/config#options).
 
-To add Unlock Access Control to a Collection, use the `unlock` property in the [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
-
-```ts
-import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const CollectionWithUnlockAccess: CollectionConfig = {
-  // ...
-  access: {
-    // highlight-start
-    unlock: ({ req: { user }}) => {
-      return Boolean(user)
-    },
-    // highlight-end
-  },
-}
-```
-
-The following arguments are provided to the `unlock` function:
+**Available argument properties:**
 
 | Option    | Description                                                                |
 | --------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user`. |
-
-### Read Versions
-
-If the Collection has [Versions](../versions/overview) enabled, the `readVersions` Access Control function determines whether or not the currently logged in user can access the version history of a Document.
-
-To add Read Versions Access Control to a Collection, use the `readVersions` property in the [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
-
-```ts
-import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const CollectionWithVersionsAccess: CollectionConfig = {
-  // ...
-  access: {
-    // highlight-start
-    readVersions: ({ req: { user }}) => {
-      return Boolean(user)
-    },
-    // highlight-end
-  },
-}
-```
-
-The following arguments are provided to the `readVersions` function:
-
-| Option    | Description                                                                |
-| --------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user`. |
+| **`req`** | The Express `request` object containing the currently authenticated `user` |

docs/access-control/fields.mdx

@@ -1,39 +1,25 @@
 ---
 title: Field-level Access Control
 label: Fields
-order: 40
+order: 30
 desc: Field-level Access Control is specified within a field's config, and allows you to define which users can create, read or update Fields.
-keywords: fields, access control, permissions, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: fields, access control, permissions, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
-Field Access Control is [Access Control](../access-control) used to restrict access to specific [Fields](../fields/overview) within a Document.
+Field Access Control is specified with functions inside a field's config. All field-level Controls return a boolean value to allow or deny access for the specified operation. No field-level Access Controls support returning query constraints. All Access Control functions accept one `args` argument.
 
-To add Access Control to a Field, use the `access` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
+## Available Controls
+
+| Function                | Purpose                                                                          |
+| ----------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **[`create`](#create)** | Allows or denies the ability to set a field's value when creating a new document |
+| **[`read`](#read)**     | Allows or denies the ability to read a field's value                             |
+| **[`update`](#update)** | Allows or denies the ability to update a field's value                           |
+
+**Example Collection config:**
 
 ```ts
-import type { Field } from 'payload';
-
-export const FieldWithAccessControl: Field = {
-  // ...
-  access: { // highlight-line
-    // ...
-  },
-}
-```
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Note:</strong>
-  Field Access Controls does not support returning [Query](../queries/overview) constraints like [Collection Access Control](./collections) does.
-</Banner>
-
-## Config Options
-
-Access Control is specific to the operation of the request.
-
-To add Access Control to a Field, use the `access` property in the [Field Config](../fields/overview):
-
-```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload';
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types';
 
 export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'posts',
@@ -53,14 +39,6 @@ export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
 };
 ```
 
-The following options are available:
-
-| Function                | Purpose                                                                          |
-| ----------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`create`** | Allows or denies the ability to set a field's value when creating a new document. [More details](#create). |
-| **`read`**     | Allows or denies the ability to read a field's value. [More details](#read).       |
-| **`update`** | Allows or denies the ability to update a field's value [More details](#update).    |
-
 ### Create
 
 Returns a boolean which allows or denies the ability to set a field's value when creating a new document. If `false` is returned, any passed values will be discarded.
@@ -69,7 +47,7 @@ Returns a boolean which allows or denies the ability to set a field's value when
 
 | Option            | Description                                                                |
 | ----------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`**         | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
+| **`req`**         | The Express `request` object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
 | **`data`**        | The full data passed to create the document.                               |
 | **`siblingData`** | Immediately adjacent field data passed to create the document.             |
 
@@ -81,7 +59,7 @@ Returns a boolean which allows or denies the ability to read a field's value. If
 
 | Option            | Description                                                                |
 | ----------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`**         | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
+| **`req`**         | The Express `request` object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
 | **`id`**          | `id` of the document being read                                            |
 | **`doc`**         | The full document data.                                                    |
 | **`siblingData`** | Immediately adjacent field data of the document being read.                |
@@ -96,7 +74,7 @@ If `false` is returned and you attempt to update the field's value, the operatio
 
 | Option            | Description                                                                |
 | ----------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`**         | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
+| **`req`**         | The Express `request` object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
 | **`id`**          | `id` of the document being updated                                         |
 | **`data`**        | The full data passed to update the document.                               |
 | **`siblingData`** | Immediately adjacent field data passed to update the document with.        |

docs/access-control/globals.mdx

@@ -1,44 +1,35 @@
 ---
 title: Globals Access Control
 label: Globals
-order: 30
+order: 40
 desc: Global-level Access Control is specified within each Global's `access` property and allows you to define which users can read or update Globals.
-keywords: globals, access control, permissions, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: globals, access control, permissions, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
-Global Access Control is [Access Control](../access-control) used to restrict access to [Global](../globals/overview) Documents, as well as what they can and cannot see within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) as it relates to that Global.
+You can define Global-level Access Control within each Global's `access` property. All Access Control functions accept one `args` argument.
 
-To add Access Control to a Global, use the `access` property in your [Global Config](../configuration/globals):
+## Available Controls
+
+| Function                | Allows/Denies Access                   |
+| ----------------------- | -------------------------------------- |
+| **[`read`](#read)**     | Used in the `findOne` Global operation |
+| **[`update`](#update)** | Used in the `update` Global operation  |
+
+**Example Global config:**
 
 ```ts
-import type { GlobalConfig } from 'payload';
+import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
-export const GlobalWithAccessControl: GlobalConfig = {
-  // ...
-  access: { // highlight-line
-    // ...
-  },
-}
-```
-
-## Config Options
-
-Access Control is specific to the operation of the request.
-
-To add Access Control to a [Global](../configuration/globals), use the `access` property in the [Global Config](../globals/overview):
-
-```ts
-import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
-
-const GlobalWithAccessControl: GlobalConfig = {
-  // ...
+const Header: GlobalConfig = {
+  slug: 'header',
   // highlight-start
   access: {
-    read: ({ req: { user } }) => {...},
-    update: ({ req: { user } }) => {...},
-
-    // Version-enabled Globals only
-    readVersion: () => {...},
+    read: ({ req: { user } }) => {
+      /* */
+    },
+    update: ({ req: { user } }) => {
+      /* */
+    },
   },
   // highlight-end
 }
@@ -46,97 +37,23 @@ const GlobalWithAccessControl: GlobalConfig = {
 export default Header
 ```
 
-The following options are available:
-
-| Function                | Allows/Denies Access                   |
-| ----------------------- | -------------------------------------- |
-| **`read`**     | Used in the `findOne` Global operation. [More details](#read). |
-| **`update`** | Used in the `update` Global operation. [More details](#update). |
-
-If a Global supports [Versions](../versions/overview), the following additional options are available:
-
-| Function           | Allows/Denies Access                                                                                                   |
-| ------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`readVersions`** | Used to control who can read versions, and who can't. Will automatically restrict the Admin UI version viewing access. [More details](#read-versions). |
-
 ### Read
 
-Returns a boolean result or optionally a [query constraint](../queries/overview) which limits who can read this global based on its current properties.
+Returns a boolean result or optionally a [query constraint](/docs/queries/overview) which limits who can read this global based on its current properties.
 
-To add read Access Control to a [Global](../configuration/globals), use the `read` property in the [Global Config](../globals/overview):
-
-```ts
-import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
-
-const Header: GlobalConfig = {
-  // ...
-  // highlight-start
-  read: {
-    read: ({ req: { user } }) => {
-      return Boolean(user)
-    },
-  }
-  // highlight-end
-}
-```
-
-The following arguments are provided to the `read` function:
+**Available argument properties:**
 
 | Option    | Description                                                                |
 | --------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user`. |
+| **`req`** | The Express `request` object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
 
 ### Update
 
-Returns a boolean result or optionally a [query constraint](../queries/overview) which limits who can update this global based on its current properties.
+Returns a boolean result or optionally a [query constraint](/docs/queries/overview) which limits who can update this global based on its current properties.
 
-To add update Access Control to a [Global](../configuration/globals), use the `access` property in the [Global Config](../globals/overview):
-
-```ts
-import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
-
-const Header: GlobalConfig = {
-  // ...
-  // highlight-start
-  access: {
-    update: ({ req: { user }, data }) => {
-      return Boolean(user)
-    },
-  }
-  // highlight-end
-}
-```
-
-The following arguments are provided to the `update` function:
+**Available argument properties:**
 
 | Option     | Description                                                                |
 | ---------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`**  | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user`. |
+| **`req`**  | The Express `request` object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
 | **`data`** | The data passed to update the global with.                                 |
-
-### Read Versions
-
-If the Global has [Versions](../versions/overview) enabled, the `readVersions` Access Control function determines whether or not the currently logged in user can access the version history of a Document.
-
-To add Read Versions Access Control to a Collection, use the `readVersions` property in the [Global Config](../globals/overview):
-
-```ts
-import type { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const GlobalWithVersionsAccess: GlobalConfig = {
-  // ...
-  access: {
-    // highlight-start
-    readVersions: ({ req: { user }}) => {
-      return Boolean(user)
-    },
-    // highlight-end
-  },
-}
-```
-
-The following arguments are provided to the `readVersions` function:
-
-| Option    | Description                                                                |
-| --------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user`. |

docs/access-control/overview.mdx

@@ -2,59 +2,82 @@
 title: Access Control
 label: Overview
 order: 10
-desc: Payload makes it simple to define and manage Access Control. By declaring roles, you can set permissions and restrict what your users can interact with.
-keywords: overview, access control, permissions, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+desc: Payload makes it simple to define and manage access control. By declaring roles, you can set permissions and restrict what your users can interact with.
+keywords: overview, access control, permissions, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
+Access control within Payload is extremely powerful while remaining easy and intuitive to manage. Declaring who should have access to what documents is no more complex than writing a simple JavaScript function that either returns a `boolean` or a [`query`](/docs/queries/overview) constraint to restrict which documents users can interact with.
+
 <YouTube id="DoPLyXG26Dg" title="Overview of Payload Access Control" />
 
-Access Control determines what a user can and cannot do with any given Document, as well as what they can and cannot see within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview). By implementing Access Control, you can define granular restrictions based on the user, their roles (RBAC), Document data, or any other criteria your application requires.
+**Example use cases:**
 
-Access Control functions are scoped to the _operation_, meaning you can have different rules for `create`, `read`, `update`, `delete`, etc. Access Control functions are executed _before_ any changes are made and _before_ any operations are completed. This allows you to determine if the user has the necessary permissions before fulfilling the request.
+- Allowing anyone `read` access to all `Post`s
+- Only allowing public access to `Post`s where a `status` field is equal to `published`
+- Giving only `User`s with a `role` field equal to `admin` the ability to delete `Page`(s)
+- Allowing anyone to create `ContactSubmission`s, but only logged in users to `read`, `update` or `delete` them
+- Restricting a `User` to only be able to see their own `Order`(s), but no others
+- Allowing `User`s that belong to a certain `Organization` to access only that `Organization`'s `Resource`s
 
-There are many use cases for Access Control, including:
+## Default Settings
 
-- Allowing anyone `read` access to all posts
-- Only allowing public access to posts where a `status` field is equal to `published`
-- Giving only users with a `role` field equal to `admin` the ability to delete posts
-- Allowing anyone to submit contact forms, but only logged in users to `read`, `update` or `delete` them
-- Restricting a user to only be able to see their own orders, but noone else's
-- Allowing users that belong to a certain organization to access only that organization's resources
+**By default, all Collections and Globals require that a user is logged in to be able to interact in any way.** The default Access Control function evaluates the `user` from the Express `req` and returns `true` if a user is logged in, and `false` if not.
 
-There are three main types of Access Control in Payload:
-
-- [Collection Access Control](./collections)
-- [Global Access Control](./globals)
-- [Field Access Control](./fields)
-
-## Default Access Control
-
-Payload provides default Access Control so that your data is secured behind [Authentication](../authentication) without additional configuration. To do this, Payload sets a default function that simply checks if a user is present on the request. You can override this default behavior by defining your own Access Control functions as needed.
-
-Here is the default Access Control that Payload provides:
+**Default Access function:**
 
 ```ts
 const defaultPayloadAccess = ({ req: { user } }) => {
   // Return `true` if a user is found
   // and `false` if it is undefined or null
-  return Boolean(user) // highlight-line
+  return Boolean(user)
 }
 ```
 
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Important:</strong>
-  In the [Local API](../local-api/overview), all Access Control is _skipped_ by default. This allows your server to have full control over your application. To opt back in, you can set the `overrideAccess` option to `false` in your requests.
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  <br />
+  In the Local API, all Access Control functions are skipped by default, allowing your server to do
+  whatever it needs. But, you can opt back in by setting the option <strong>
+    overrideAccess
+  </strong>{' '}
+  to <strong>false</strong>.
 </Banner>
 
-## The Admin Panel
+## Access Control Types
 
-The Admin Panel responds dynamically to your changes to Access Control. For example, if you restrict editing `ExampleCollection` to only users that feature an "admin" role, Payload will **hide** that Collection from the Admin Panel entirely. This is super powerful and allows you to control who can do what within your Admin Panel using the same functions that secure your APIs.
+You can manage access within Payload on three different levels:
 
-To accomplish this, Payload exposes the [Access Operation](../authentication/operations#access). Upon login, Payload executes each Access Control function at the top level, across all Collections, Globals, and Fields, and returns a response that contains a reflection of what the currently authenticated user can do within your application.
+- [Collections](/docs/access-control/collections)
+- [Fields](/docs/access-control/fields)
+- [Globals](/docs/access-control/globals)
+
+## When Access Control is Executed
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  <br />
+  Access control functions are utilized in two places. It's important to understand how and when
+  your access control is executed.
+</Banner>
+
+### As you execute operations
+
+When you perform Payload operations like `create`, `read`, `update`, and `delete`, your access control functions will be executed before any changes or operations are completed.
+
+### Within the Admin UI
+
+The Payload Admin UI responds dynamically to the access control that you define. For example, if you restrict editing a `ExampleCollection` to only users that feature a `role` of `admin`, the Payload Admin UI will **hide** the `ExampleCollection` from the Admin UI entirely. This is super powerful and allows you to control who can do what with your Admin UI.
+
+To accomplish this, Payload ships with an `Access` operation, which is executed when a user logs into the Admin UI. Payload will execute each one of your access control functions, across all collections, globals, and fields, at the top level and return a response that contains a reflection of what the currently authenticated user can do with your application.
+
+## Argument Availability
 
 <Banner type="warning">
   <strong>Important:</strong>
-  When your access control functions are executed via the [Access Operation](../authentication/operations#access),  the `id` and `data` arguments will be `undefined`. This is because Payload is executing your functions without referencing a specific Document.
+  <br />
+  When your access control functions are executed via the <strong>access</strong> operation, the{' '}
+  <strong>id</strong> and <strong>data</strong> arguments will be <strong>undefined</strong>,
+  because Payload is executing your functions without referencing a specific document.
 </Banner>
 
-If you use `id` or `data` within your access control functions, make sure to check that they are defined first. If they are not, then you can assume that your Access Control is being executed via the Access Operation to determine solely what the user can do within the Admin Panel.
+If you use `id` or `data` within your access control functions, make sure to check that they are defined first. If they are not, then you can assume that your access control is being executed via the `access` operation, to determine solely what the user can do within the Admin UI.

docs/admin/bundlers.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+---
+title: Bundlers
+label: Bundlers
+order: 60
+desc: Bundlers are used to bundle the code that serves Payload's Admin Panel.
+---
+
+Payload has two official bundlers, the [Webpack Bundler](/docs/admin/webpack) and the [Vite Bundler](/docs/admin/vite). You must install a bundler to use the admin panel.
+
+## Install a bundler
+
+Webpack (recommended):
+
+```text
+yarn add @payloadcms/bundler-webpack
+```
+
+Vite (beta):
+
+```text
+yarn add @payloadcms/bundler-vite
+```
+
+## Configure the bundler
+
+```ts
+// payload.config.ts
+
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { webpackBundler } from '@payloadcms/bundler-webpack'
+// import { viteBundler } from '@payloadcms/bundler-vite'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  // highlight-start
+  admin: {
+    bundler: webpackBundler(), // or viteBundler()
+  },
+  // highlight-end
+})
+```
+
+## What are bundlers?
+
+At their core, a bundler's main goal is to take a bunch of files and turn them into a few optimized files that you ship to the browser. The admin UI has a root `index.html` entry point, and from there the bundler traverses the dependency tree, bundling all of the files that are required from that point on.
+
+Since the bundled file is sent to the browser, it can't include any server-only code. You will need to remove any server-only code from your admin UI before bundling it. You can learn more about [excluding server code](/docs/admin/excluding-server-code) section.
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Using environment variables in the admin UI</strong>
+  <br />
+  Bundles should not contain sensitive information. By default, Payload excludes env variables from
+  the bundle. If you need to use env variables in your payload config, you need to prefix them with
+  `PAYLOAD_PUBLIC_` to make them available to the client-side code.
+</Banner>

docs/admin/customizing-css.mdx

@@ -1,73 +1,51 @@
 ---
 title: Customizing CSS & SCSS
 label: Customizing CSS
-order: 60
-desc: Customize the Payload Admin Panel further by adding your own CSS or SCSS style sheet to the configuration, powerful theme and design options are waiting for you.
-keywords: admin, css, scss, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+order: 40
+desc: Customize your Payload admin panel further by adding your own CSS or SCSS style sheet to the configuration, powerful theme and design options are waiting for you.
+keywords: admin, css, scss, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
-Customizing the Payload [Admin Panel](./overview) through CSS alone is one of the easiest and most powerful ways to customize the look and feel of the dashboard. To allow for this level of customization, Payload:
+## Adding your own CSS / SCSS
 
-1. Exposes a [root-level stylesheet](#global-css) for you to easily to inject custom selectors
-1. Provides a [CSS library](#css-library) that can be easily overridden or extended
-1. Uses [BEM naming conventions](http://getbem.com) so that class names are globally accessible
+You can add your own CSS by providing your base Payload config with a path to your own CSS or SCSS. Customize the styling of any part of the Payload dashboard as necessary.
 
-To customize the CSS within the Admin UI, determine scope and change you'd like to make, and then add your own CSS or SCSS to the configuration as needed.
+To do so, provide your base Payload config with a path to your own stylesheet. It can be either a CSS or SCSS file.
 
-## Global CSS
+**Example in payload.config.js:**
 
-Global CSS refers to the CSS that is applied to the entire [Admin Panel](./overview). This is where you can have a significant impact to the look and feel of the Admin UI through just a few lines of code.
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import path from 'path'
 
-You can add your own global CSS through the root `custom.scss` file of your app. This file is loaded into the root of the Admin Panel and can be used to inject custom selectors or styles however needed.
-
-Here is an example of how you might target the Dashboard View and change the background color:
-
-```scss
-.dashboard {
-  background-color: red; // highlight-line
-}
+const config = buildConfig({
+  admin: {
+    css: path.resolve(__dirname, 'relative/path/to/stylesheet.scss'),
+  },
+})
 ```
 
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Note:</strong>
-  If you are building [Custom Components](./overview), it is best to import your own stylesheets directly into your components, rather than using the global stylesheet. You can continue to use the [CSS library](#css-library) as needed.
-</Banner>
+## Overriding built-in styles
 
-## Re-using Payload SCSS variables and utilities
+To make it as easy as possible for you to override our styles, Payload uses [BEM naming conventions](http://getbem.com/) for all CSS within the Admin UI. If you provide your own CSS, you can override any built-in styles easily.
 
-You can re-use Payload's SCSS variables and utilities in your own stylesheets by importing it from the UI package.
+In addition to adding your own style definitions, you can also override Payload's built-in CSS variables. We use as much as possible behind the scenes, and you can override any of them that you'd like to.
 
-```scss
-@import '~@payloadcms/ui/scss';
-```
+You can find the built-in Payload CSS variables within [`./src/admin/scss/app.scss`](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/main/packages/payload/src/admin/scss/app.scss) and [`./src/admin/scss/colors.scss`](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/main/packages/payload/src/admin/scss/colors.scss). The following variables are defined and can be overridden:
 
-## CSS Library
+- Breakpoints
+- Base color shades (white to black by default)
+- Success / warning / error color shades
+- Theme-specific colors (background, input background, text color, etc.)
+- Elevation colors (used to determine how "bright" something should be when compared to the background)
+- Fonts
+- Horizontal gutter
 
-To make it as easy as possible for you to override default styles, Payload uses [BEM naming conventions](http://getbem.com/) for all CSS within the Admin UI. If you provide your own CSS, you can override any built-in styles easily, including targeting nested components and their various component states.
-
-You can also override Payload's built-in [CSS Variables](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/CSS/Using_CSS_custom_properties). These variables are widely consumed by the Admin Panel, so modifying them has a significant impact on the look and feel of the Admin UI.
-
-The following variables are defined and can be overridden:
-
-- [Breakpoints](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/beta/packages/ui/src/scss/queries.scss)
-- [Colors](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/beta/packages/ui/src/scss/colors.scss)
-  - Base color shades (white to black by default)
-  - Success / warning / error color shades
-  - Theme-specific colors (background, input background, text color, etc.)
-  - Elevation colors (used to determine how "bright" something should be when compared to the background)
-- [Sizing](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/beta/packages/ui/src/scss/app.scss)
-  - Horizontal gutter
-  - Transition speeds
-  - Font sizes
-  - Etc.
-
-For an up-to-date, comprehensive list of all available variables, please refer to the [Source Code](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/main/packages/ui/src/scss).
+### Dark mode
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Warning:</strong>
-  If you're overriding colors or theme elevations, make sure to consider how [your changes will affect dark mode](#dark-mode).
+  If you're overriding colors or theme elevations, make sure to consider how your changes will
+  affect dark mode.
 </Banner>
 
-#### Dark Mode
-
-Colors are designed to automatically adapt to theme of the [Admin Panel](./overview). By default, Payload automatically overrides all `--theme-elevation` colors and inverts all success / warning / error shades to suit dark mode. We also update some base theme variables like `--theme-bg`, `--theme-text`, etc.
+By default, Payload automatically overrides all `--theme-elevation`s and inverts all success / warning / error shades to suit dark mode. We also update some base theme variables like `--theme-bg`, `--theme-text`, etc.

docs/admin/environment-vars.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+---
+title: Environment Variables in Admin UI
+label: Environment Variables
+order: 100
+desc: NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN
+---
+
+## Admin environment vars
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
+  <br />
+  Be careful about what variables you provide to your client-side code. Analyze every single one to
+  make sure that you're not accidentally leaking anything that an attacker could exploit. Only keys
+  that are safe for anyone to read in plain text should be provided to your Admin panel.
+</Banner>
+
+By default, `env` variables are **not** provided to the Admin panel for security and safety reasons.
+But, Payload provides you with a way to still provide `env` vars to your frontend code.
+
+**Payload will automatically supply any present `env` variables that are prefixed with `PAYLOAD_PUBLIC_` directly to the Admin panel.**
+
+For example, if you've got the following environment variable:
+
+`PAYLOAD_PUBLIC_STRIPE_PUBLISHABLE_KEY=pk_test_XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX`
+
+This key will automatically be made available to the Payload bundle and can be referenced in your Admin component code as `process.env.PAYLOAD_PUBLIC_STRIPE_PUBLISHABLE_KEY`.

docs/admin/excluding-server-code.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,206 @@
+---
+title: Excluding server-only code from admin UI
+label: Excluding server code
+order: 70
+desc: Learn how to exclude server-only code from the Payload Admin UI bundle
+---
+
+Because the Admin Panel browser bundle includes your Payload Config file, files using server-only modules need to be excluded.
+It's common for your config to rely on server only modules to perform logic in access control functions, hooks, and other contexts.
+
+Any file that imports a server-only module such as `fs`, `stripe`, `authorizenet`, `nodemailer`, etc. **cannot** be included in the browser bundle.
+
+## Example Scenario
+
+Say we have a collection called `Subscriptions` that has a `beforeChange` hook that creates a Stripe subscription whenever a Subscription document is created in Payload.
+
+**Collection config**:
+
+```ts
+// collections/Subscriptions/index.ts
+
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import createStripeSubscription from './hooks/createStripeSubscription'
+
+export const Subscription: CollectionConfig = {
+  slug: 'subscriptions',
+  hooks: {
+    beforeChange: [createStripeSubscription],
+  },
+  fields: [
+    {
+      name: 'stripeSubscriptionID',
+      type: 'text',
+      required: true,
+    },
+  ],
+}
+```
+
+**Collection hook**:
+
+```ts
+// collections/Subscriptions/hooks/createStripeSubscription.ts
+
+// highlight-start
+import Stripe from 'stripe' // <-- server-only module
+// highlight-end
+
+const stripe = new Stripe(process.env.STRIPE_SECRET_KEY)
+
+export const createStripeSubscription = async ({ data, operation }) => {
+  if (operation === 'create') {
+    const dataWithStripeID = { ...data }
+
+    // use Stripe to create a Stripe subscription
+    const subscription = await stripe.subscriptions.create({
+      // Configure the subscription accordingly
+    })
+
+    // Automatically add the Stripe subscription ID
+    // to the data that will be saved to this Subscription doc
+    dataWithStripeID.stripeSubscriptionID = subscription.id
+
+    return dataWithStripeID
+  }
+
+  return data
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="error">
+  <strong>Warning:</strong>
+  <br />
+  The above code is NOT production-ready and should not be referenced to create Stripe
+  subscriptions. Although creating a beforeChange hook is a completely valid spot to do things like
+  create subscriptions, the code above is incomplete and insecure, meant for explanation purposes
+  only.
+</Banner>
+
+**As-is, this collection will prevent your Admin panel from bundling or loading correctly, because Stripe relies on some Node-only packages.**
+
+## How to exclude server-only code
+
+You need to make sure that you use `alias`es to tell your bundler to import "safe" files vs. attempting to import any server-side code that you need to get rid of. Depending on your bundler (Webpack, Vite, etc.) the steps involved may be slightly different.
+
+The basic idea is to create a file that exports an empty object, and then alias import paths of any files that import server-only modules to that empty object file.
+
+This way when your bundler goes to import a file that contains server-only modules, it will instead import the empty object file, which will not break the browser bundle.
+
+### Aliasing server-only modules
+
+To remove files that contain server-only modules from your bundle, you can use an `alias`.
+
+In the Subscriptions config file above, we are importing the hook like so:
+
+```ts
+// collections/Subscriptions/index.ts
+
+import createStripeSubscription from './hooks/createStripeSubscription'
+```
+
+By default the browser bundle will now include all the code from that file and any files down the tree. We know that the file imports `stripe`.
+
+To fix this, we need to alias the `createStripeSubscription` file to a different file that can safely be included in the browser bundle.
+
+First, we will create a mock file to replace the server-only file when bundling:
+
+```js
+// mocks/modules.js
+
+export default {}
+
+/**
+ * NOTE: if you are destructuring an import
+ * the mock file will need to export matching
+ * variables as the destructured object.
+ *
+ * export const namedExport = {}
+ */
+```
+
+Aliasing with [Webpack](/docs/admin/webpack) can be done by:
+
+```ts
+// payload.config.ts
+
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { webpackBundler } from '@payloadcms/bundler-webpack'
+
+import { Subscriptions } from './collections/Subscriptions'
+
+const mockModulePath = path.resolve(__dirname, 'mocks/emptyObject.js')
+const fullFilePath = path.resolve(
+  __dirname,
+  'collections/Subscriptions/hooks/createStripeSubscription',
+)
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  collections: [Subscriptions],
+  admin: {
+    bundler: webpackBundler(),
+    webpack: (config) => {
+      return {
+        ...config,
+        resolve: {
+          ...config.resolve,
+          // highlight-start
+          alias: {
+            ...config.resolve.alias,
+            [fullFilePath]: mockModulePath,
+          },
+          // highlight-end
+        },
+      }
+    },
+  },
+})
+```
+
+Aliasing with [Vite](/docs/admin/vite) can be done by:
+
+```ts
+// payload.config.ts
+
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { viteBundler } from '@payloadcms/bundler-vite'
+
+import { Subscriptions } from './collections/Subscriptions'
+
+const mockModulePath = path.resolve(__dirname, 'mocks/emptyObject.js')
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  collections: [Subscriptions],
+  admin: {
+    bundler: viteBundler(),
+    vite: (incomingViteConfig) => {
+      const existingAliases = incomingViteConfig?.resolve?.alias || {}
+      let aliasArray: { find: string | RegExp; replacement: string }[] = []
+
+      // Pass the existing Vite aliases
+      if (Array.isArray(existingAliases)) {
+        aliasArray = existingAliases
+      } else {
+        aliasArray = Object.values(existingAliases)
+      }
+
+      // highlight-start
+      // Add your own aliases using the find and replacement keys
+      // remember, vite aliases are exact-match only
+      aliasArray.push({
+        find: '../server-only-module',
+        replacement: path.resolve(__dirname, './path/to/browser-safe-module.js'),
+      })
+      // highlight-end
+
+      return {
+        ...incomingViteConfig,
+        resolve: {
+          ...(incomingViteConfig?.resolve || {}),
+          alias: aliasArray,
+        },
+      }
+    },
+  },
+})
+```

docs/admin/fields.mdx

@@ -1,488 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Customizing Fields
-label: Customizing Fields
-order: 40
-desc:
-keywords:
----
-
-[Fields](../fields/overview) within the [Admin Panel](./overview) can be endlessly customized in their appearance and behavior without affecting their underlying data structure. Fields are designed to withstand heavy modification or even complete replacement through the use of [Custom Field Components](#field-components), [Conditional Logic](#conditional-logic), [Custom Validations](../fields/overview#validation), and more.
-
-For example, your app might need to render a specific interface that Payload does not inherently support, such as a color picker. To do this, you could replace the default [Text Field](../fields/text) input with your own user-friendly component that formats the data into a valid color value.
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  Don't see a built-in field type that you need? Build it! Using a combination of [Field Validations](../fields/overview#validation)
-  and [Custom Components](./components), you can override the entirety of how a component functions within the [Admin Panel](./overview) to effectively create your own field type.
-</Banner>
-
-## Admin Options
-
-You can customize the appearance and behavior of fields within the [Admin Panel](./overvieW) through the `admin` property of any [Field Config](../fields/overview):
-
-```ts
-import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const CollectionConfig: CollectionConfig = {
-  // ...
-  fields: [
-    // ...
-    {
-      name: 'myField',
-      type: 'text',
-      admin: { // highlight-line
-        // ...
-      },
-    }
-  ]
-}
-```
-
-The following options are available:
-
-| Option              | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
-| ------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`condition`**         | Programmatically show / hide fields based on other fields. [More details](../admin/fields#conditional-logic).                                                                                               |
-| **`components`**        | All Field Components can be swapped out for [Custom Components](../admin/components) that you define. [More details](../admin/fields).                                                                             |
-| **`description`**       | Helper text to display alongside the field to provide more information for the editor. [More details](../admin/fields#description).                                                                                                 |
-| **`position`**          | Specify if the field should be rendered in the sidebar by defining `position: 'sidebar'`.                                                                                                                                        |
-| **`width`**             | Restrict the width of a field. You can pass any string-based value here, be it pixels, percentages, etc. This property is especially useful when fields are nested within a `Row` type where they can be organized horizontally. |
-| **`style`**         | [CSS Properties](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/CSS) to inject into the root element of the field.                                                                                                           |
-| **`className`**         | Attach a [CSS class attribute](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/CSS/Class_selectors) to the root DOM element of a field.                                                                                                                                                                      |
-| **`readOnly`**          | Setting a field to `readOnly` has no effect on the API whatsoever but disables the admin component's editability to prevent editors from modifying the field's value.                                                            |
-| **`disabled`**          | If a field is `disabled`, it is completely omitted from the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview).                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`disableBulkEdit`**   | Set `disableBulkEdit` to `true` to prevent fields from appearing in the select options when making edits for multiple documents.                                                                                                 |
-| **`disableListColumn`** | Set `disableListColumn` to `true` to prevent fields from appearing in the list view column selector.                                                                                                                             |
-| **`disableListFilter`** | Set `disableListFilter` to `true` to prevent fields from appearing in the list view filter options.                                                                                                                              |
-| **`hidden`**            | Will transform the field into a `hidden` input type. Its value will still submit with requests in the Admin Panel, but the field itself will not be visible to editors.        |
-
-## Field Components
-
-Within the [Admin Panel](./overview), fields are rendered in three distinct places:
-
-- [Field](#the-field-component) - The actual form field rendered in the Edit View.
-- [Cell](#the-cell-component) - The table cell component rendered in the List View.
-- [Filter](#the-filter-component) - The filter component rendered in the List View.
-
-To easily swap in Field Components with your own, use the `admin.components` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
-
-```ts
-import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const CollectionConfig: CollectionConfig = {
-  // ...
-  fields: [
-    // ...
-    {
-      // ...
-      admin: {
-        components: { // highlight-line
-          // ...
-        },
-      },
-    }
-  ]
-}
-```
-
-The following options are available:
-
-| Component    | Description                                                                                                                 |
-| ---------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`Field`**  | The form field rendered of the Edit View. [More details](#the-field-component).                                                |
-| **`Cell`**   | The table cell rendered of the List View. [More details](#the-cell-component).              |
-| **`Filter`** | The filter component rendered in the List View. [More details](#the-filter-component). || Component         | Description                                                                                                     |
-| **`Label`**       | Override the default Label of the Field Component. [More details](#the-label-component).                                    |
-| **`Error`**       | Override the default Error of the Field Component. [More details](#the-error-component).                                    |
-| **`Description`** | Override the default Description of the Field Component. [More details](#the-description-component).                      |
-| **`beforeInput`** | An array of elements that will be added before the input of the Field Component. [More details](#afterinput-and-beforeinput).|
-| **`afterInput`**  | An array of elements that will be added after the input of the Field Component. [More details](#afterinput-and-beforeinput). |
-
-_\* **`beforeInput`** and **`afterInput`** are only supported in fields that do not contain other fields, such as [`Text`](../fields/text), and [`Textarea`](../fields/textarea)._
-
-### The Field Component
-
-The Field Component is the actual form field rendered in the Edit View. This is the input that user's will interact with when editing a document.
-
-To easily swap in your own Field Component, use the `admin.components.Field` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
-
-```ts
-import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const CollectionConfig: CollectionConfig = {
-  // ...
-  fields: [
-    // ...
-    {
-      // ...
-      admin: {
-        components: {
-          Field: MyFieldComponent, // highlight-line
-        },
-      },
-    }
-  ]
-}
-```
-
-_For details on how to build Custom Components, see [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components)._
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  Instead of replacing the entire Field Component, you can alternately replace or slot-in only specific parts by using the [`Label`](#the-label-component), [`Error`](#the-error-component), [`beforeInput`](#afterinput-and-beforinput), and [`afterInput`](#afterinput-and-beforinput) properties.
-</Banner>
-
-All Field Components receive the following props:
-
-| Property         | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
-| ---------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`AfterInput`** | The rendered result of the `admin.components.afterInput` property. [More details](#afterinput-and-beforeinput).                                                                                                      |
-| **`BeforeInput`** | The rendered result of the `admin.components.beforeInput` property. [More details](#afterinput-and-beforeinput).                                                                                                      |
-| **`CustomDescription`** | The rendered result of the `admin.components.Description` property. [More details](#the-description-component).                                                                                                      |
-| **`CustomError`** | The rendered result of the `admin.components.Error` property. [More details](#the-error-component).                                                                                                      |
-| **`CustomLabel`** | The rendered result of the `admin.components.Label` property. [More details](#the-label-component).
-| **`path`**       | The static path of the field at render time. [More details](./hooks#usefieldprops). |
-| **`disabled`**   | The `admin.disabled` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). |
-| **`required`**   | The `admin.required` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). |
-| **`className`**  | The `admin.className` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). |
-| **`style`**      | The `admin.style` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview).                                                                                                                                                      |
-| **`custom`**     | The `admin.custom` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview).
-| **`placeholder`** | The `admin.placeholder` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). |
-| **`descriptionProps`** | An object that contains the props for the `FieldDescription` component.                                                                                                                                                                   |
-| **`labelProps`** | An object that contains the props needed for the `FieldLabel` component.                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`errorProps`** | An object that contains the props for the `FieldError` component.                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`docPreferences`** | An object that contains the preferences for the document.                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`label`**      | The label value provided in the field, it can be used with i18n.                                                                                                                                                                   |
-| **`locale`**     | The locale of the field. [More details](../configuration/localization).                                                                                                                                                                   |
-| **`localized`**  | A boolean value that represents if the field is localized or not. [More details](../fields/localized).                                                                                                                                                                   |
-| **`readOnly`**   | A boolean value that represents if the field is read-only or not.                                                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`rtl`**        | A boolean value that represents if the field should be rendered right-to-left or not. [More details](../configuration/i18n).                                                                                           |
-| **`user`**       | The currently authenticated user. [More details](../authentication/overview). |
-| **`validate`**   | A function that can be used to validate the field.                                                                                                                                                                                 |
-| **`hasMany`**    | If a [`relationship`](../fields/relationship) field, the `hasMany` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). |
-| **`maxLength`**  | If a [`text`](../fields/text) field, the `maxLength` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). |
-| **`minLength`**  | If a [`text`](../fields/text) field, the `minLength` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). |
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
-  All [Custom Server Components](./components) receive the `payload` and `i18n` properties by default. See [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components) for more details.
-</Banner>
-
-#### Sending and receiving values from the form
-
-When swapping out the `Field` component, you are responsible for sending and receiving the field's `value` from the form itself.
-
-To do so, import the [`useField`](./hooks#usefield) hook from `@payloadcms/ui` and use it to manage the field's value:
-
-```tsx
-'use client'
-import { useField } from '@payloadcms/ui'
-
-export const CustomTextField: React.FC = () => {
-  const { value, setValue } = useField() // highlight-line
-
-  return (
-    <input
-      onChange={(e) => setValue(e.target.value)}
-      value={value}
-    />
-  )
-}
-```
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  For a complete list of all available React hooks, see the [Payload React Hooks](./hooks) documentation. For additional help, see [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components).
-</Banner>
-
-### The Cell Component
-
-The Cell Component is rendered in the table of the List View. It represents the value of the field when displayed in a table cell.
-
-To easily swap in your own Cell Component, use the `admin.components.Cell` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
-
-```ts
-import type { Field } from 'payload'
-
-export const myField: Field = {
-  name: 'myField',
-  type: 'text',
-  admin: {
-    components: {
-      Cell: MyCustomCell, // highlight-line
-    },
-  },
-}
-```
-
-_For details on how to build Custom Components, see [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components)._
-
-All Cell Components receive the following props:
-
-| Property         | Description                                                       |
-| ---------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** | The name of the field. |
-| **`className`**  | The `admin.className` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). |
-| **`fieldType`** | The `type` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). |
-| **`schemaPath`** | The path to the field in the schema. Similar to `path`, but without dynamic indices. |
-| **`isFieldAffectingData`** | A boolean value that represents if the field is affecting the data or not. |
-| **`label`** | The label value provided in the field, it can be used with i18n. |
-| **`labels`** | An object that contains the labels for the field. |
-| **`link`** | A boolean representing whether this cell should be wrapped in a link. |
-| **`onClick`** | A function that is called when the cell is clicked. |
-| **`dateDisplayFormat`** | If a [`date`](../fields/date) field, the `admin.dateDisplayFormat` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). |
-| **`options`** | If a [`select`](../fields/select) field, this is an array of options defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). [More details](../fields/select). |
-| **`relationTo`** | If a [`relationship`](../fields/relationship). or [`upload`](../fields/upload) field, this is the collection(s) the field is related to. |
-| **`richTextComponentMap`** | If a [`richText`](../fields/rich-text) field, this is an object that maps the rich text components. [More details](../fields/rich-text). |
-| **`blocks`** | If a [`blocks`](../fields/blocks) field, this is an array of labels and slugs representing the blocks defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). [More details](../fields/blocks). |
-
-<Banner type="info">
-  <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  Use the [`useTableCell`](./hooks#usetablecell) hook to subscribe to the field's `cellData` and `rowData`.
-</Banner>
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
-  All [Custom Server Components](./components) receive the `payload` and `i18n` properties by default. See [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components) for more details.
-</Banner>
-
-### The Label Component
-
-The Label Component is rendered anywhere a field needs to be represented by a label. This is typically used in the Edit View, but can also be used in the List View and elsewhere.
-
-To easily swap in your own Label Component, use the `admin.components.Label` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
-
-```ts
-import type { Field } from 'payload'
-
-export const myField: Field = {
-  name: 'myField',
-  type: 'text',
-  admin: {
-    components: {
-      Label: MyCustomLabel, // highlight-line
-    },
-  },
-}
-```
-
-_For details on how to build Custom Components, see [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components)._
-
-All Label Components receive the following props:
-
-| Property       | Description                                                      |
-| -------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`label`**    | Label value provided in field, it can be used with i18n.         |
-| **`required`** | The `admin.required` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). |
-| **`schemaPath`** | The path to the field in the schema. Similar to `path`, but without dynamic indices. |
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
-  All [Custom Server Components](./components) receive the `payload` and `i18n` properties by default. See [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components) for more details.
-</Banner>
-
-### The Error Component
-
-The Error Component is rendered when a field fails validation. It is typically displayed beneath the field input in a visually-compelling style.
-
-To easily swap in your own Error Component, use the `admin.components.Error` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
-
-```ts
-import type { Field } from 'payload'
-
-export const myField: Field = {
-  name: 'myField',
-  type: 'text',
-  admin: {
-    components: {
-      Error: MyCustomError, // highlight-line
-    },
-  },
-}
-```
-
-_For details on how to build Custom Components, see [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components)._
-
-All Error Components receive the following props:
-
-| Property        | Description                                                   |
-| --------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`path`***       | The static path of the field at render time. [More details](./hooks#usefieldprops). |
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
-  All [Custom Server Components](./components) receive the `payload` and `i18n` properties by default. See [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components) for more details.
-</Banner>
-
-### The Description Property
-
-Field Descriptions are used to provide additional information to the editor about a field, such as special instructions. Their placement varies from field to field, but typically are displayed with subtle style differences beneath the field inputs.
-
-A description can be configured in three ways:
-
-  - As a string.
-  - As a function which returns a string. [More details](#description-functions).
-  - As a React component. [More details](#the-description-component).
-
-To easily add a Custom Description to a field, use the `admin.description` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
-
-```ts
-import type { SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const MyCollectionConfig: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
-  // ...
-  fields: [
-    // ...
-    {
-      name: 'myField',
-      type: 'text',
-      admin: {
-        description: 'Hello, world!' // highlight-line
-      },
-    },
-  ]
-}
-```
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
-  To replace the Field Description with a [Custom Component](./components), use the `admin.components.Description` property. [More details](#the-description-component).
-</Banner>
-
-#### Description Functions
-
-Custom Descriptions can also be defined as a function. Description Functions are executed on the server and can be used to format simple descriptions based on the user's current [Locale](../configuration/localization).
-
-To easily add a Description Function to a field, set the `admin.description` property to a _function_ in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
-
-```ts
-import type { SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const MyCollectionConfig: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
-  // ...
-  fields: [
-    // ...
-    {
-      name: 'myField',
-      type: 'text',
-      admin: {
-        description: ({ t }) => `${t('Hello, world!')}` // highlight-line
-      },
-    },
-  ]
-}
-```
-
-All Description Functions receive the following arguments:
-
-| Argument       | Description                                                      |
-| -------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`t`**        | The `t` function used to internationalize the Admin Panel. [More details](../configuration/i18n) |
-
-### The Description Component
-
-Alternatively to the [Description Property](#the-description-property), you can also use a [Custom Component](./components) as the Field Description. This can be useful when you need to provide more complex feedback to the user, such as rendering dynamic field values or other interactive elements.
-
-To easily add a Description Component to a field, use the `admin.components.Description` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
-
-```ts
-import type { SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-import { MyCustomDescription } from './MyCustomDescription'
-
-export const MyCollectionConfig: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
-  // ...
-  fields: [
-    // ...
-    {
-      name: 'myField',
-      type: 'text',
-      admin: {
-        components: {
-          Description: MyCustomDescription, // highlight-line
-        }
-      }
-    }
-  ]
-}
-```
-
-_For details on how to build a Custom Description, see [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components)._
-
-All Description Components receive the following props:
-
-| Property       | Description                                                      |
-| -------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`description`**    | The `description` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview).         |
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
-  All [Custom Server Components](./components) receive the `payload` and `i18n` properties by default. See [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components) for more details.
-</Banner>
-
-### afterInput and beforeInput
-
-With these properties you can add multiple components _before_ and _after_ the input element, as their name suggests. This is useful when you need to render additional elements alongside the field without replacing the entire field component.
-
-To add components before and after the input element, use the `admin.components.beforeInput` and `admin.components.afterInput` properties in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
-
-```ts
-import type { SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const MyCollectionConfig: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
-  // ...
-  fields: [
-    // ...
-    {
-      name: 'myField',
-      type: 'text',
-      admin: {
-        components: {
-          // highlight-start
-          beforeInput: [MyCustomComponent],
-          afterInput: [MyOtherCustomComponent],
-          // highlight-end
-        }
-      }
-    }
-  ]
-}
-```
-
-_For details on how to build Custom Components, see [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components)._
-
-## Conditional Logic
-
-You can show and hide fields based on what other fields are doing by utilizing conditional logic on a field by field basis. The `condition` property on a field's admin config accepts a function which takes three arguments:
-
-- `data` - the entire document's data that is currently being edited
-- `siblingData` - only the fields that are direct siblings to the field with the condition
-- `{ user }` - the final argument is an object containing the currently authenticated user
-
-The `condition` function should return a boolean that will control if the field should be displayed or not.
-
-**Example:**
-
-```ts
-{
-  fields: [
-    {
-      name: 'enableGreeting',
-      type: 'checkbox',
-      defaultValue: false,
-    },
-    {
-      name: 'greeting',
-      type: 'text',
-      admin: {
-        // highlight-start
-        condition: (data, siblingData, { user }) => {
-          if (data.enableGreeting) {
-            return true
-          } else {
-            return false
-          }
-        },
-        // highlight-end
-      },
-    },
-  ]
-}
-```

docs/admin/hooks.mdx

@@ -1,103 +1,57 @@
 ---
 title: React Hooks
 label: React Hooks
-order: 50
+order: 30
 desc: Make use of all of the powerful React hooks that Payload provides.
-keywords: admin, components, custom, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: admin, components, custom, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
-Payload provides a variety of powerful [React Hooks](https://react.dev/reference/react-dom/hooks) that can be used within your own [Custom Components](./components), such as [Custom Fields](./fields). With them, you can interface with Payload itself to build just about any type of complex customization you can think of.
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
-  All Custom Components are [React Server Components](https://react.dev/reference/rsc/server-components) by default. Hooks, on the other hand, are only available in client-side environments. To use hooks, [ensure your component is a client component](./components#client-components).
-</Banner>
+Payload provides a variety of powerful hooks that can be used within your own React components. With them, you can interface with Payload itself and build just about any type of complex customization you can think of—directly in familiar React code.
 
 ## useField
 
-The `useField` hook is used internally within all field components. It manages sending and receiving a field's state from its parent form. When you build a [Custom Field Component](./fields), you will be responsible for sending and receiving the field's `value` to and from the form yourself.
+The `useField` hook is used internally within every applicable Payload field component, and it manages sending and receiving a field's state from its parent form.
 
-To do so, import the `useField` hook as follows:
+Outside of internal use, its most common use-case is in custom `Field` components. When you build a custom React `Field` component, you'll be responsible for sending and receiving the field's `value` from the form itself. To do so, import the `useField` hook as follows:
 
 ```tsx
-'use client'
-import { useField } from '@payloadcms/ui'
+import { useField } from 'payload/components/forms'
 
-const CustomTextField: React.FC = () => {
-  const { value, setValue, path } = useField() // highlight-line
+type Props = { path: string }
 
-  return (
-    <div>
-      <p>
-        {path}
-      </p>
-      <input
-        onChange={(e) => { setValue(e.target.value) }}
-        value={value}
-      />
-    </div>
-  )
+const CustomTextField: React.FC<Props> = ({ path }) => {
+  // highlight-start
+  const { value, setValue } = useField<string>({ path })
+  // highlight-end
+
+  return <input onChange={(e) => setValue(e.target.value)} value={value.path} />
 }
 ```
 
-The `useField` hook accepts the following arguments:
-
-| Property          | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
-| ----------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| `path`            | If you do not provide a `path` or a `name`, this hook will look for one using the [`useFieldProps`](#usefieldprops) hook.                                                                                                                         |
-| `validate`        | A validation function executed client-side _before_ submitting the form to the server. Different than [Field-level Validation](../fields/overview#validation) which runs strictly on the server. |
-| `disableFormData` | If `true`, the field will not be included in the form data when the form is submitted.                                                                                                                                         |
-| `hasRows` | If `true`, the field will be treated as a field with rows. This is useful for fields like `array` and `blocks`.                                                                                                                                         |
-
-The `useField` hook returns the following object:
+The `useField` hook accepts an `args` object and sends back information and helpers for you to make use of:
 
 ```ts
-type FieldResult<T> = {
-  errorMessage?: string
-  errorPaths?: string[]
-  filterOptions?: FilterOptionsResult
-  formInitializing: boolean
-  formProcessing: boolean
-  formSubmitted: boolean
-  initialValue?: T
-  path: string
-  permissions: FieldPermissions
-  readOnly?: boolean
-  rows?: Row[]
-  schemaPath: string
-  setValue: (val: unknown, disableModifyingForm?: boolean) => voi
-  showError: boolean
-  valid?: boolean
-  value: T
-}
+const field = useField<string>({
+  path: 'fieldPathHere', // required
+  validate: myValidateFunc, // optional
+  disableFormData?: false, // if true, the field's data will be ignored
+  condition?: myConditionHere, // optional, used to skip validation if condition fails
+})
+
+// Here is what `useField` sends back
+const {
+  showError, // whether or not the field should show as errored
+  errorMessage, // the error message to show, if showError
+  value, // the current value of the field from the form
+  formSubmitted, // if the form has been submitted
+  formProcessing, // if the form is currently processing
+  setValue, // method to set the field's value in form state
+  initialValue, // the initial value that the field mounted with
+} = field;
+
+// The rest of your component goes here
 ```
 
-## useFieldProps
-
-All [Custom Field Components](./fields#the-field-component) are rendered on the server, and as such, only have access to static props at render time. But, some fields can be dynamic, such as when nested in an [`array`](../fields/array) or [`blocks`](../fields/block) field. For example, items can be added, re-ordered, or deleted on-the-fly.
-
-For this reason, dynamic props like `path` are managed in their own React context, which can be accessed using the `useFieldProps` hook:
-
-```tsx
-'use client'
-import { useFieldProps } from '@payloadcms/ui'
-
-const CustomTextField: React.FC = () => {
-  const { path } = useFieldProps() // highlight-line
-
-  return (
-    <div>
-      {path}
-    </div>
-  )
-}
-```
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  The [`useField`](#usefield) hook calls the `useFieldProps` hook internally, so you don't need to use both in the same component unless explicitly needed.
-</Banner>
-
 ## useFormFields
 
 There are times when a custom field component needs to have access to data from other fields, and you have a few options to do so. The `useFormFields` hook is a powerful and highly performant way to retrieve a form's field state, as well as to retrieve the `dispatchFields` method, which can be helpful for setting other fields' form states from anywhere within a form.
@@ -112,8 +66,7 @@ Thanks to the awesome package [`use-context-selector`](https://github.com/dai-sh
 You can pass a Redux-like selector into the hook, which will ensure that you retrieve only the field that you want. The selector takes an argument with type of `[fields: Fields, dispatch: React.Dispatch<Action>]]`.
 
 ```tsx
-'use client'
-import type { useFormFields } from '@payloadcms/ui'
+import { useFormFields } from 'payload/components/forms'
 
 const MyComponent: React.FC = () => {
   // Get only the `amount` field state, and only cause a rerender when that field changes
@@ -135,9 +88,7 @@ const MyComponent: React.FC = () => {
 You can do lots of powerful stuff by retrieving the full form state, like using built-in helper functions to reduce field state to values only, or to retrieve sibling data by path.
 
 ```tsx
-'use client'
-import { useAllFormFields } from '@payloadcms/ui'
-import { reduceFieldsToValues, getSiblingData } from 'payload/shared'
+import { useAllFormFields, reduceFieldsToValues, getSiblingData } from 'payload/components/forms';
 
 const ExampleComponent: React.FC = () => {
   // the `fields` const will be equal to all fields' state,
@@ -160,7 +111,7 @@ const ExampleComponent: React.FC = () => {
 
 #### Updating other fields' values
 
-If you are building a Custom Component, then you should use `setValue` which is returned from the `useField` hook to programmatically set your field's value. But if you're looking to update _another_ field's value, you can use `dispatchFields` returned from `useFormFields`.
+If you are building a custom component, then you should use `setValue` which is returned from the `useField` hook to programmatically set your field's value. But if you're looking to update _another_ field's value, you can use `dispatchFields` returned from `useFormFields`.
 
 You can send the following actions to the `dispatchFields` function.
 
@@ -190,7 +141,7 @@ The `useForm` hook can be used to interact with the form itself, and sends back
   up-to-date. They will be removed from this hook's response in an upcoming version.
 </Banner>
 
-The `useForm` hook returns an object with the following properties:
+The `useForm` hook returns an object with the following properties: |
 
 <TableWithDrawers
   columns={[
@@ -443,7 +394,7 @@ export const CustomArrayManager = () => {
 }`}
 </pre>
 
-  <p>An example config to go along with the Custom Component</p>
+  <p>An example config to go along with the custom component</p>
   <pre>
 {`const ExampleCollection = {
   slug: "example-collection",
@@ -540,7 +491,7 @@ export const CustomArrayManager = () => {
 }`}
 </pre>
 
-  <p>An example config to go along with the Custom Component</p>
+  <p>An example config to go along with the custom component</p>
   <pre>
 {`const ExampleCollection = {
   slug: "example-collection",
@@ -650,7 +601,7 @@ export const CustomArrayManager = () => {
 }`}
 </pre>
 
-  <p>An example config to go along with the Custom Component</p>
+  <p>An example config to go along with the custom component</p>
   <pre>
 {`const ExampleCollection = {
   slug: "example-collection",
@@ -688,20 +639,19 @@ export const CustomArrayManager = () => {
 
 The `useCollapsible` hook allows you to control parent collapsibles:
 
-| Property                  | Description                                                                                                   |
-| ------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`isCollapsed`**         | State of the collapsible. `true` if open, `false` if collapsed.                                               |
-| **`isVisible`**           | If nested, determine if the nearest collapsible is visible. `true` if no parent is closed, `false` otherwise. |
-| **`toggle`**              | Toggles the state of the nearest collapsible.                                                                 |
-| **`isWithinCollapsible`** | Determine when you are within another collapsible.                                                            |
+| Property                  | Description                                                                                                  |
+| ------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | --- |
+| **`isCollapsed`**         | State of the collapsible. `true` if open, `false` if collapsed                                               |
+| **`isVisible`**           | If nested, determine if the nearest collapsible is visible. `true` if no parent is closed, `false` otherwise |
+| **`toggle`**              | Toggles the state of the nearest collapsible                                                                 |
+| **`isWithinCollapsible`** | Determine when you are within another collaspible                                                            |     |
 
 **Example:**
 
 ```tsx
-'use client'
 import React from 'react'
 
-import { useCollapsible } from '@payloadcms/ui'
+import { useCollapsible } from 'payload/components/utilities'
 
 const CustomComponent: React.FC = () => {
   const { isCollapsed, toggle } = useCollapsible()
@@ -723,8 +673,8 @@ The `useDocumentInfo` hook provides lots of information about the document curre
 
 | Property                  | Description                                                                                                        |
 | ------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
-| **`collection`**          | If the doc is a collection, its Collection Config will be returned                                                 |
-| **`global`**              | If the doc is a global, its Global Config will be returned                                                         |
+| **`collection`**          | If the doc is a collection, its collection config will be returned                                                 |
+| **`global`**              | If the doc is a global, its global config will be returned                                                         |
 | **`id`**                  | If the doc is a collection, its ID will be returned                                                                |
 | **`preferencesKey`**      | The `preferences` key to use when interacting with document-level user preferences                                 |
 | **`versions`**            | Versions of the current doc                                                                                        |
@@ -737,8 +687,7 @@ The `useDocumentInfo` hook provides lots of information about the document curre
 **Example:**
 
 ```tsx
-'use client'
-import { useDocumentInfo } from '@payloadcms/ui'
+import { useDocumentInfo } from 'payload/components/utilities'
 
 const LinkFromCategoryToPosts: React.FC = () => {
   // highlight-start
@@ -760,11 +709,10 @@ const LinkFromCategoryToPosts: React.FC = () => {
 
 ## useLocale
 
-In any Custom Component you can get the selected locale object with the `useLocale` hook. `useLocale`gives you the full locale object, consisting of a `label`, `rtl`(right-to-left) property, and then `code`. Here is a simple example:
+In any custom component you can get the selected locale object with the `useLocale` hook. `useLocale`gives you the full locale object, consisting of a `label`, `rtl`(right-to-left) property, and then `code`. Here is a simple example:
 
 ```tsx
-'use client'
-import { useLocale } from '@payloadcms/ui'
+import { useLocale } from 'payload/components/utilities'
 
 const Greeting: React.FC = () => {
   // highlight-start
@@ -795,9 +743,8 @@ Useful to retrieve info about the currently logged in user as well as methods fo
 | **`permissions`**        | The permissions of the current user                                                     |
 
 ```tsx
-'use client'
-import { useAuth } from '@payloadcms/ui'
-import type { User } from '../payload-types.ts'
+import { useAuth } from 'payload/components/utilities'
+import { User } from '../payload-types.ts'
 
 const Greeting: React.FC = () => {
   // highlight-start
@@ -810,11 +757,10 @@ const Greeting: React.FC = () => {
 
 ## useConfig
 
-Used to easily retrieve the Payload [Client Config](./components#accessing-the-payload-config).
+Used to easily fetch the full Payload config.
 
 ```tsx
-'use client'
-import { useConfig } from '@payloadcms/ui'
+import { useConfig } from 'payload/components/utilities'
 
 const MyComponent: React.FC = () => {
   // highlight-start
@@ -830,8 +776,7 @@ const MyComponent: React.FC = () => {
 Sends back how many editing levels "deep" the current component is. Edit depth is relevant while adding new documents / editing documents in modal windows and other cases.
 
 ```tsx
-'use client'
-import { useEditDepth } from '@payloadcms/ui'
+import { useEditDepth } from 'payload/components/utilities'
 
 const MyComponent: React.FC = () => {
   // highlight-start
@@ -851,8 +796,7 @@ Returns methods to set and get user preferences. More info can be found [here](h
 Returns the currently selected theme (`light`, `dark` or `auto`), a set function to update it and a boolean `autoMode`, used to determine if the theme value should be set automatically based on the user's device preferences.
 
 ```tsx
-'use client'
-import { useTheme } from '@payloadcms/ui'
+import { useTheme } from 'payload/components/utilities'
 
 const MyComponent: React.FC = () => {
   // highlight-start
@@ -880,8 +824,7 @@ const MyComponent: React.FC = () => {
 Returns methods to manipulate table columns
 
 ```tsx
-'use client'
-import { useTableColumns } from '@payloadcms/ui'
+import { useTableColumns } from 'payload/components/hooks'
 
 const MyComponent: React.FC = () => {
   // highlight-start
@@ -900,27 +843,6 @@ const MyComponent: React.FC = () => {
 }
 ```
 
-## useTableCell
-
-Similar to [`useFieldProps`](#usefieldprops), all [Custom Cell Components](./fields#the-cell-component) are rendered on the server, and as such, only have access to static props at render time. But, some props need to be dynamic, such as the field value itself.
-
-For this reason, dynamic props like `cellData` are managed in their own React context, which can be accessed using the `useTableCell` hook.
-
-```tsx
-'use client'
-import { useTableCell } from '@payloadcms/ui'
-
-const MyComponent: React.FC = () => {
-  const { cellData } = useTableCell() // highlight-line
-
-  return (
-    <div>
-      {cellData}
-    </div>
-  )
-}
-```
-
 ## useDocumentEvents
 
 The `useDocumentEvents` hook provides a way of subscribing to cross-document events, such as updates made to nested documents within a drawer. This hook will report document events that are outside the scope of the document currently being edited. This hook provides the following:
@@ -933,8 +855,7 @@ The `useDocumentEvents` hook provides a way of subscribing to cross-document eve
 **Example:**
 
 ```tsx
-'use client'
-import { useDocumentEvents } from '@payloadcms/ui'
+import { useDocumentEvents } from 'payload/components/hooks'
 
 const ListenForUpdates: React.FC = () => {
   const { mostRecentUpdate } = useDocumentEvents()

docs/admin/overview.mdx

@@ -2,224 +2,89 @@
 title: The Admin Panel
 label: Overview
 order: 10
-desc: Manage your data and customize the Payload Admin Panel by swapping in your own React components. Create, modify or remove views, fields, styles and much more.
-keywords: admin, components, custom, customize, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+desc: Manage your data and customize the Admin Panel by swapping in your own React components. Create, modify or remove views, fields, styles and much more.
+keywords: admin, components, custom, customize, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
-Payload dynamically generates a beautiful, [fully type-safe](../typescript/overview) Admin Panel to manage your users and data. It is highly performant, even with 100+ fields, and is translated in over 30 languages. Within the Admin Panel you can manage content, [render your site](../live-preview/overview), preview drafts, [diff versions](../versions/overview), and so much more.
+Payload dynamically generates a beautiful, fully functional React admin panel to manage your data. It's extremely powerful and can be customized / extended upon easily by swapping in your own React components. You can add additional views, modify how built-in views look / work, swap out Payload branding for your client's, build your own field types and much more.
 
-The Admin Panel is designed to [white-label your brand](https://payloadcms.com/blog/white-label-admin-ui). You can endlessly customize and extend the Admin UI by swapping in your own [Custom Components](./components)—everything from simple field labels to entire views can be modified or replaced to perfectly tailor the interface for your editors.
-
-The Admin Panel is written in [TypeScript](https://www.typescriptlang.org) and built with [React](https://react.dev) using the [Next.js App Router](https://nextjs.org/docs/app). It supports [React Server Components](https://react.dev/reference/rsc/server-components), enabling the use of the [Local API](/docs/local-api/overview) on the front-end. You can install Payload into any [existing Next.js app in just one line](../getting-started/installation) and [deploy it anywhere](../production).
+The Payload Admin panel can be bundled with our officially supported [Vite](/docs/admin/vite) and [webpack](/docs/admin/webpack) bundlers or you can integrate another bundler following our adapter pattern approach.
+When bundled, it is code-split, highly performant (even with 100+ fields), and written fully in TypeScript.
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  The Payload Admin Panel is designed to be as minimal and straightforward as possible to allow easy customization and control. [Learn more](./components).
+  The Admin panel is meant to be simple enough to give you a starting point but not bring too much
+  complexity, so that you can easily customize it to suit the needs of your application and your
+  editors.
 </Banner>
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/admin.jpg"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/admin-dark.jpg"
-  alt="Admin Panel with collapsible sidebar"
-  caption="Redesigned Admin Panel with a collapsible sidebar that's open by default, providing greater extensibility and enhanced horizontal real estate."
+  alt="Admin panel with collapsible sidebar"
+  caption="Redesigned admin panel with a collapsible sidebar that's open by default, providing greater extensibility and enhanced horizontal real estate."
 />
 
-## Project Structure
-
-The Admin Panel serves as the entire HTTP layer for Payload, providing a full CRUD interface for your app. This means that both the [REST](../rest-api/overview) and [GraphQL](../graphql/overview) APIs are simply [Next.js Routes](https://nextjs.org/docs/app/building-your-application/routing) that exist directly alongside your front-end application.
-
-Once you [install Payload](../getting-started/installation), the following files and directories will be created in your app:
-
-```plaintext
-app/
-├─ (payload)/
-├── admin/
-├─── [[...segments]]/
-├──── page.tsx
-├──── not-found.tsx
-├── api/
-├─── [...slug]/
-├──── route.ts
-├── graphql/
-├──── route.ts
-├── graphql-playground/
-├──── route.ts
-├── custom.scss
-├── layout.tsx
-```
-
-<Banner type="info">
-  If you are not familiar with Next.js project structure, you can [learn more about it here](https://nextjs.org/docs/getting-started/project-structure).
-</Banner>
-
-As shown above, all Payload routes are nested within the `(payload)` route group. This creates a boundary between the Admin Panel and the rest of your application by scoping all layouts and styles. The `layout.tsx` file within this directory, for example, is where Payload manages the `html` tag of the document to set proper [`lang`](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTML/Global_attributes/lang) and [`dir`](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTML/Global_attributes/dir) attributes, etc.
-
-The `admin` directory contains all the _pages_ related to the interface itself, whereas the `api` and `graphql` directories contains all the _routes_ related to the [REST API](../rest-api/overview) and [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview). All admin routes are [easily configurable](#customizing-routes) to meet your application's exact requirements.
-
-Finally, the `custom.scss` file is where you can add or override globally-oriented styles in the Admin Panel, such as modify the color palette. Customizing the look and feel through CSS alone is a powerful feature of the Admin Panel, [more on that here](./customizing-css).
-
-All auto-generated files will contain the following comments at the top of each file:
-
-```tsx
-/* THIS FILE WAS GENERATED AUTOMATICALLY BY PAYLOAD. */,
-/* DO NOT MODIFY IT BECAUSE IT COULD BE REWRITTEN AT ANY TIME. */
-```
-
 ## Admin Options
 
-All options for the Admin Panel are defined in your [Payload Config](../configuration/overview) under the `admin` property:
-
-```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
-
-const config = buildConfig({
-  // ...
-  admin: { // highlight-line
-    // ...
-  },
-})
-```
-
-The following options are available:
+All options for the Admin panel are defined in your base Payload config file.
 
 | Option            | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
 | ----------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| `user`            | The `slug` of the Collection that you want to allow to login to the Admin Panel. [More details](#the-admin-user-collection).                                                                                                                                                        |
-| `buildPath`       | Specify an absolute path for where to store the built Admin bundle used in production. Defaults to `path.resolve(process.cwd(), 'build')`.                                                                                                                                  |
-| `meta`            | Base metadata to use for the Admin Panel. Included properties are `titleSuffix`, `icons`, and `openGraph`. Can be overridden on a per Collection or per Global basis.                                                                                                       |
-| `disable`         | If set to `true`, the entire Admin Panel will be disabled.                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
-| `dateFormat`      | The date format that will be used for all dates within the Admin Panel. Any valid [date-fns](https://date-fns.org/) format pattern can be used.                                                                                                                             |
+| `bundler`         | The bundler that you would like to use to bundle the admin panel. Officially supported bundlers: [Webpack](/docs/admin/webpack) and [Vite](/docs/admin/vite).                                                                                                               |
+| `user`            | The `slug` of a Collection that you want be used to log in to the Admin dashboard. [More](/docs/admin/overview#the-admin-user-collection)                                                                                                                                   |
+| `buildPath`       | Specify an absolute path for where to store the built Admin panel bundle used in production. Defaults to `path.resolve(process.cwd(), 'build')`.                                                                                                                            |
+| `meta`            | Base meta data to use for the Admin panel. Included properties are `titleSuffix`, `icons`, and `openGraph`. Can be overridden on a per collection or per global basis.                                                                                                      |
+| `disable`         | If set to `true`, the entire Admin panel will be disabled.                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
+| `indexHTML`       | Optionally replace the entirety of the `index.html` file used by the Admin panel. Reference the [base index.html file](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/main/packages/payload/src/admin/index.html) to ensure your replacement has the appropriate HTML elements. |
+| `css`             | Absolute path to a stylesheet that you can use to override / customize the Admin panel styling. [More](/docs/admin/customizing-css).                                                                                                                                        |
+| `scss`            | Absolute path to a Sass variables / mixins stylesheet meant to override Payload styles to make for an easy re-skinning of the Admin panel. [More](/docs/admin/customizing-css#overriding-scss-variables).                                                                   |
+| `dateFormat`      | Global date format that will be used for all dates in the Admin panel. Any valid [date-fns](https://date-fns.org/) format pattern can be used.                                                                                                                              |
 | `avatar`          | Set account profile picture. Options: `gravatar`, `default` or a custom React component.                                                                                                                                                                                    |
-| `autoLogin`       | Used to automate admin log-in for dev and demonstration convenience. [More details](../authentication/config).                                                                                                                                                                      |
-| `livePreview`     | Enable real-time editing for instant visual feedback of your front-end application. [More details](../live-preview/overview).                                                                                                                                                       |
-| `components`      | Component overrides that affect the entirety of the Admin Panel. [More details](./components).                                                                                                                                                                                      |
-| `routes`          | Replace built-in Admin Panel routes with your own custom routes. [More details](#customizing-routes).                                                                                                                                                                               |
-| `custom`          | Any custom properties you wish to pass to the Admin Panel.                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
-  These are the _root-level_ options for the Admin Panel. You can also customize the admin options for _Collections and Globals_ through their respective `admin` keys.
-</Banner>
+| `autoLogin`       | Used to automate admin log-in for dev and demonstration convenience. [More](/docs/authentication/config).                                                                                                                                                                   |
+| `livePreview`     | Enable real-time editing for instant visual feedback of your front-end application. [More](/docs/live-preview/overview).                                                                                                                                                    |
+| `components`      | Component overrides that affect the entirety of the Admin panel. [More](/docs/admin/components)                                                                                                                                                                             |
+| `webpack`         | Customize the Webpack config that's used to generate the Admin panel. [More](/docs/admin/webpack)                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| `vite`            | Customize the Vite config that's used to generate the Admin panel. [More](/docs/admin/vite)                                                                                                                                                                                 |
+| `routes`          | Replace built-in Admin Panel routes with your own custom routes. I.e. `{ logout: '/custom-logout', inactivity: 'custom-inactivity' }`                                                                                                                                       |
 
 ### The Admin User Collection
 
-To specify which Collection to allow to login to the Admin Panel, pass the `admin.user` key equal to the slug of any auth-enabled Collection:
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
+  <br />
+  The Payload Admin panel can only be used by one Collection that supports
+  [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview).
+</Banner>
+
+To specify which Collection to use to log in to the Admin panel, pass the `admin` options a `user` key equal to the slug of the Collection that you'd like to use.
+
+`payload.config.js`:
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
 
 const config = buildConfig({
-  // ...
   admin: {
     user: 'admins', // highlight-line
   },
 })
 ```
 
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Important:</strong>
-  <br />
-  The Admin Panel can only be used by a single auth-enabled Collection. To enable authentication for a Collection, simply set `auth: true` in the Collection's configuration. See [Authentication](../authentication/overview) for more information.
-</Banner>
+By default, if you have not specified a Collection, Payload will automatically provide you with a `User` Collection which will be used to access the Admin panel. You can customize or override the fields and settings of the default `User` Collection by passing your own collection using `users` as its `slug` to Payload. When this is done, Payload will use your provided `User` Collection instead of its default version.
 
-By default, if you have not specified a Collection, Payload will automatically provide a `User` Collection with access to the Admin Panel. You can customize or override the fields and settings of the default `User` Collection by adding your own Collection with `slug: 'users'`. Doing this will force Payload to use your provided `User` Collection instead of its default version.
+**Note: you can use whatever Collection you'd like to access the Admin panel as long as the Collection supports Authentication. It doesn't need to be called `users`!**
 
-You can use whatever Collection you'd like to access the Admin Panel as long as the Collection supports [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview). It doesn't need to be called `users`. For example, you may wish to have two Collections that both support authentication:
+For example, you may wish to have two Collections that both support `Authentication`:
 
-- `admins` - meant to have a higher level of permissions to manage your data and access the Admin Panel
-- `customers` - meant for end users of your app that should not be allowed to log into the Admin Panel
+- `admins` - meant to have a higher level of permissions to manage your data and access the Admin panel
+- `customers` - meant for end users of your app that should not be allowed to log into the Admin panel
 
-To do this, specify `admin: { user: 'admins' }` in your config. This will provide access to the Admin Panel to only `admins`. Any users authenticated as `customers` will be prevented from accessing the Admin Panel.  See [Access Control](/docs/access-control/overview) for full details.
+This is totally possible. For the above scenario, by specifying `admin: { user: 'admins' }`, your Payload Admin panel will use `admins`. Any users logged in as `customers` will not be able to log in via the Admin panel.
 
-### Role-based Access Control
+### Light and dark modes
 
-It is also possible to allow multiple user types into the Admin Panel with limited permissions, known as role-based access control (RBAC). For example, you may wish to have two roles within the `admins` Collection:
+Users in the admin panel have access to choosing between light mode and dark mode for their editing experience. The setting is managed while logged into the admin UI within the user account page and will be stored with the browser. By default, the operating system preference is detected and used.
 
-- `super-admin` - full access to the Admin Panel to perform any action
-- `editor` - limited access to the Admin Panel to only manage content
+### Restricting user access
 
-To do this, add a `roles` or similar field to your auth-enabled Collection, then use the `access.admin` property to grant or deny access based on the value of that field. See [Access Control](/docs/access-control/overview) for full details. For a complete, working example of role-based access control, check out the official [Auth Example](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/auth/payload).
-
-## Customizing Routes
-
-You have full control over the routes that Payload binds itself to. This includes both [Root-level Routes](#root-level-routes) such as the [REST API](../rest-api/overview), and [Admin-level Routes](#admin-level-routes) such as the user's account page. You can customize these routes to meet the needs of your application simply by specifying the desired paths in your config.
-
-### Root-level Routes
-
-Root-level routes are those that are not behind the `/admin` path, such as the [REST API](../rest-api/overview) and [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview), or the root path of the Admin Panel itself.
-
-To customize root-level routes, use the `routes` property in your [Payload Config](../configuration/overview):
-
-```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
-
-const config = buildConfig({
-  // ...
-  routes: {
-    admin: '/custom-admin-route' // highlight-line
-  }
-})
-```
-
-The following options are available:
-
-| Option             | Default route           | Description                           |
-| ------------------ | ----------------------- | ------------------------------------- |
-| `admin`            | `/admin`                | The Admin Panel itself.               |
-| `api`              | `/api`                  | The [REST API](../rest-api/overview) base path.               |
-| `graphQL`          | `/graphql`              | The [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview) base path.            |
-| `graphQLPlayground`| `/graphql-playground`   | The GraphQL Playground.               |
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Warning:</strong>
-  Changing Root-level Routes _after_ your project was generated will also require you to manually update the corresponding directories in your project. For example, changing `routes.admin` will require you to rename the `(payload)/admin` directory in your project to match the new route. [More details](#project-structure).
-</Banner>
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Tip:</strong>
-   You can easily add _new_ routes to the Admin Panel through the `endpoints` property of the Payload Config. See [Custom Endpoints](../rest-api/overview#custom-endpoints) for more information.
-</Banner>
-
-### Admin-level Routes
-
-Admin-level routes are those behind the `/admin` path. These are the routes that are part of the Admin Panel itself, such as the user's account page, the login page, etc.
-
-To customize admin-level routes, use the `admin.routes` property in your [Payload Config](../configuration/overview):
-
-```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
-
-const config = buildConfig({
-  // ...
-  admin: {
-    routes: {
-      account: '/my-account' // highlight-line
-    }
-  },
-})
-```
-
-The following options are available:
-
-| Option            | Default route           | Description                                     |
-| ----------------- | ----------------------- | ----------------------------------------------- |
-| `account`         | `/account`              | The user's account page.                        |
-| `createFirstUser` | `/create-first-user`    | The page to create the first user.              |
-| `forgot`          | `/forgot`               | The password reset page.                        |
-| `inactivity`      | `/logout-inactivity`    | The page to redirect to after inactivity.       |
-| `login`           | `/login`                | The login page.                                 |
-| `logout`          | `/logout`               | The logout page.                                |
-| `reset`           | `/reset`                | The password reset page.                        |
-| `unauthorized`    | `/unauthorized`         | The unauthorized page.                          |
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Note:</strong>
-  You can also swap out entire _views_ out for your own, using the `admin.views` property of the Payload Config. See [Custom Views](./views) for more information.
-</Banner>
-
-## I18n
-
-The Payload Admin Panel is translated in over [30 languages and counting](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/beta/packages/translations). Languages are automatically detected based on the user's browser and used by the Admin Panel to display all text in that language. If no language was detected, or if the user's language is not yet supported, English will be chosen. Users can easily specify their language by selecting one from their account page. See [I18n](../configuration/i18n) for more information.
-
-## Light and Dark Modes
-
-Users in the Admin Panel have the ability to choose between light mode and dark mode for their editing experience. Users can select their preferred theme from their account page. Once selected, it is saved to their user's preferences and persisted across sessions and devices. If no theme was selected, the Admin Panel will automatically detect the operation system's theme and use that as the default.
+If you would like to restrict which users from a single Collection can access the Admin panel, you can use the `admin` access control function. [Click here](/docs/access-control/overview#admin) to learn more.

docs/admin/preferences.mdx

@@ -2,18 +2,17 @@
 title: Managing User Preferences
 label: Preferences
 order: 50
-desc: Store the preferences of your users as they interact with the Admin Panel.
-keywords: admin, preferences, custom, customize, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+desc: Store the preferences of your users as they interact with the Admin panel.
+keywords: admin, preferences, custom, customize, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
-As your users interact with the [Admin Panel](./overview), you might want to store their preferences in a persistent manner, so that when they revisit the Admin Panel in a different session or from a different device, they can pick right back up where they left off.
+As your users interact with your Admin panel, you might want to store their preferences in a persistent manner, so that when they revisit the Admin panel, they can pick right back up where they left off.
 
 Out of the box, Payload handles the persistence of your users' preferences in a handful of ways, including:
 
-1. Columns in the Collection List View: their active state and order
-1. The user's last active [Locale](../configuration/localization)
-1. The "collapsed" state of `blocks`, `array`, and `collapsible` fields
-1. The last-known state of the `Nav` component, etc.
+1. Collection `List` view active columns, and their order, that users define
+1. Their last active locale
+1. The "collapsed" state of blocks, on a document level, as users edit or interact with documents
 
 <Banner type="warning">
   <strong>Important:</strong>
@@ -24,7 +23,7 @@ Out of the box, Payload handles the persistence of your users' preferences in a
 
 ## Use cases
 
-This API is used significantly for internal operations of the Admin Panel, as mentioned above. But, if you're building your own React components for use in the Admin Panel, you can allow users to set their own preferences in correspondence to their usage of your components. For example:
+This API is used significantly for internal operations of the Admin panel, as mentioned above. But, if you're building your own React components for use in the Admin panel, you can allow users to set their own preferences in correspondence to their usage of your components. For example:
 
 - If you have built a "color picker", you could "remember" the last used colors that the user has set for easy access next time
 - If you've built a custom `Nav` component, and you've built in an "accordion-style" UI, you might want to store the `collapsed` state of each Nav collapsible item. This way, if an editor returns to the panel, their `Nav` state is persisted automatically
@@ -33,14 +32,14 @@ This API is used significantly for internal operations of the Admin Panel, as me
 
 ## Database
 
-Payload automatically creates an internally used `payload-preferences` Collection that stores user preferences. Each document in the `payload-preferences` Collection contains the following shape:
+Payload automatically creates an internally used `payload-preferences` collection that stores user preferences. Each document in the `payload-preferences` collection contains the following shape:
 
 | Key               | Value                                                             |
 | ----------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------- |
 | `id`              | A unique ID for each preference stored.                           |
 | `key`             | A unique `key` that corresponds to the preference.                |
 | `user.value`      | The ID of the `user` that is storing its preference.              |
-| `user.relationTo` | The `slug` of the Collection that the `user` is logged in as.     |
+| `user.relationTo` | The `slug` of the collection that the `user` is logged in as.     |
 | `value`           | The value of the preference. Can be any data shape that you need. |
 | `createdAt`       | A timestamp of when the preference was created.                   |
 | `updatedAt`       | A timestamp set to the last time the preference was updated.      |
@@ -51,7 +50,7 @@ Preferences are available to both [GraphQL](/docs/graphql/overview#preferences)
 
 ## Adding or reading Preferences in your own components
 
-The Payload Admin Panel offers a `usePreferences` hook. The hook is only meant for use within the Admin Panel itself. It provides you with two methods:
+The Payload admin panel offers a `usePreferences` hook. The hook is only meant for use within the admin panel itself. It provides you with two methods:
 
 #### `getPreference`
 
@@ -72,12 +71,11 @@ Also async, this method provides you with an easy way to set a user preference.
 
 ## Example
 
-Here is an example for how you can utilize `usePreferences` within your custom Admin Panel components. Note - this example is not fully useful and is more just a reference for how to utilize the Preferences API. In this case, we are demonstrating how to set and retrieve a user's last used colors history within a `ColorPicker` or similar type component.
+Here is an example for how you can utilize `usePreferences` within your custom Admin panel components. Note - this example is not fully useful and is more just a reference for how to utilize the Preferences API. In this case, we are demonstrating how to set and retrieve a user's last used colors history within a `ColorPicker` or similar type component.
 
-```tsx
-'use client'
+```
 import React, { Fragment, useState, useEffect, useCallback } from 'react';
-import { usePreferences } from '@payloadcms/ui'
+import { usePreferences } from 'payload/components/preferences';
 
 const lastUsedColorsPreferenceKey = 'last-used-colors';
 

docs/admin/views.mdx

@@ -1,299 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Customizing Views
-label: Customizing Views
-order: 30
-desc:
-keywords:
----
-
-Views are the individual pages that make up the [Admin Panel](./overview), such as the Dashboard, List, and Edit views. One of the most powerful ways to customize the Admin Panel is to create Custom Views. These are [Custom Components](./components) that can either replace built-in views or can be entirely new.
-
-There are four types of views within the Admin Panel:
-
-- [Root Views](#root-views)
-- [Collection Views](#collection-views)
-- [Global Views](#global-views)
-- [Document Views](#document-views)
-
-To swap in your own Custom Views, consult the list of available components. Determine the scope that corresponds to what you are trying to accomplish, then [author your React component(s)](#building-custom-views) accordingly.
-
-## Root Views
-
-Root Views are the main views of the [Admin Panel](./overview). These are views that are scoped directly under the `/admin` route, such as the Dashboard or Account views.
-
-To easily swap Root Views with your own, or to [create entirely new ones](#adding-new-root-views), use the `admin.components.views` property of your root [Payload Config](../configuration/overview):
-
-```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
-
-const config = buildConfig({
-  // ...
-  admin: {
-    components: {
-      views: {
-        Dashboard: MyCustomDashboardView, // highlight-line
-      },
-    },
-  },
-})
-```
-
-_For details on how to build Custom Views, see [Building Custom Views](#building-custom-views)._
-
-The following options are available:
-
-| Property        | Description                                                                   |
-| --------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`Account`**   | The Account view is used to show the currently logged in user's Account page. |
-| **`Dashboard`** | The main landing page of the [Admin Panel](./overview).                                     |
-
-For more granular control, pass a configuration object instead. Payload exposes the following properties for each view:
-
-| Property           | Description                                                                                                                                                                                |
-| ------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
-| **`Component`** \* | Pass in the component that should be rendered when a user navigates to this route.                                                                                                         |
-| **`path`** \*      | Any valid URL path or array of paths that [`path-to-regexp`](https://www.npmjs.com/package/path-to-regex) understands.                                                                     |
-| **`exact`**        | Boolean. When true, will only match if the path matches the `usePathname()` exactly.                                                                                                     |
-| **`strict`**       | When true, a path that has a trailing slash will only match a `location.pathname` with a trailing slash. This has no effect when there are additional URL segments in the pathname. |
-| **`sensitive`**    | When true, will match if the path is case sensitive.                                                                                                                                       |
-
-_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
-
-### Adding New Views
-
-To add a _new_ views to the [Admin Panel](./overview), simply add your own key to the `views` object with at least a `path` and `Component` property. For example:
-
-```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
-
-const config = buildConfig({
-  // ...
-  admin: {
-    components: {
-      views: {
-        // highlight-start
-        MyCustomView: {
-        // highlight-end
-          Component: MyCustomView,
-          path: '/my-custom-view',
-        },
-      },
-    },
-  },
-})
-```
-
-The above example shows how to add a new [Root View](#root-views), but the pattern is the same for [Collection Views](#collection-views), [Global Views](#global-views), and [Document Views](#document-views). For help on how to build your own Custom Views, see [Building Custom Views](#building-custom-views).
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Note:</strong>
-  <br />
-  Routes are cascading, so unless explicitly given the `exact` property, they will
-  match on URLs that simply _start_ with the route's path. This is helpful when creating catch-all
-  routes in your application. Alternatively, define your nested route _before_ your parent
-  route.
-</Banner>
-
-## Collection Views
-
-Collection Views are views that are scoped under the `/collections` route, such as the Collection List and Document Edit views.
-
-To easily swap out Collection Views with your own, or to [create entirely new ones](#adding-new-views), use the `admin.components.views` property of your [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
-
-```ts
-import type { SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const MyCollectionConfig: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
-  // ...
-  admin: {
-    components: {
-      views: {
-        Edit: MyCustomEditView, // highlight-line
-      },
-    },
-  },
-}
-```
-
-_For details on how to build Custom Views, see [Building Custom Views](#building-custom-views)._
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Note:</strong>
-  The `Edit` property will replace the _entire_ Edit View, including the title, tabs, etc., _as well as all nested [Document Views](#document-views)_, such as the API, Live Preview, and Version views. To replace only the Edit View precisely, use the `Edit.Default` key instead.
-</Banner>
-
-The following options are available:
-
-| Property   | Description                                                                                                       |
-| ---------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`Edit`** | The Edit View is used to edit a single document for any given Collection. [More details](#document-views).     |
-| **`List`** | The List View is used to show a list of documents for any given Collection.                                         |
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Note:</strong>
-  You can also add _new_ Collection Views to the config by adding a new key to the `views` object with at least a `path` and `Component` property. See [Adding New Views](#adding-new-views) for more information.
-</Banner>
-
-## Global Views
-
-Global Views are views that are scoped under the `/globals` route, such as the Document Edit View.
-
-To easily swap out Global Views with your own or [create entirely new ones](#adding-new-views), use the `admin.components.views` property in your [Global Config](../globals/overview):
-
-```ts
-import type { SanitizedGlobalConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const MyGlobalConfig: SanitizedGlobalConfig = {
-  // ...
-  admin: {
-    components: {
-      views: {
-        Edit: MyCustomEditView, // highlight-line
-      },
-    },
-  },
-})
-```
-
-_For details on how to build Custom Views, see [Building Custom Views](#building-custom-views)._
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Note:</strong>
-  The `Edit` property will replace the _entire_ Edit View, including the title, tabs, etc., _as well as all nested [Document Views](#document-views)_, such as the API, Live Preview, and Version views. To replace only the Edit View precisely, use the `Edit.Default` key instead.
-</Banner>
-
-The following options are available:
-
-| Property   | Description                                                         |
-| ---------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`Edit`** | The Edit View is used to edit a single document for any given Global. [More details](#document-views). |
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Note:</strong>
-  You can also add _new_ Global Views to the config by adding a new key to the `views` object with at least a `path` and `Component` property. See [Adding New Views](#adding-new-views) for more information.
-</Banner>
-
-## Document Views
-
-Document Views are views that are scoped under the `/collections/:collectionSlug/:id` or the `/globals/:globalSlug` route, such as the Edit View or the API View. All Document Views keep their overall structure across navigation changes, such as their title and tabs, and replace only the content below.
-
-To easily swap out Document Views with your own, or to [create entirely new ones](#adding-new-document-views), use the `admin.components.views.Edit[key]` property in your [Collection Config](../collections/overview) or [Global Config](../globals/overview):
-
-```ts
-import type { SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const MyCollectionOrGlobalConfig: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
-  // ...
-  admin: {
-    components: {
-      views: {
-        Edit: {
-          API: {
-            Component: MyCustomAPIView, // highlight-line
-          },
-        },
-      },
-    },
-  },
-})
-```
-
-_For details on how to build Custom Views, see [Building Custom Views](#building-custom-views)._
-
-<Banner type="warning">
- <strong>Note:</strong>
- If you need to replace the _entire_ Edit View, including _all_ nested Document Views, use the `Edit` key itself. See [Custom Collection Views](#collection-views) or [Custom Global Views](#global-views) for more information.
-</Banner>
-
-The following options are available:
-
-| Property          | Description                                                                                                                 |
-| ----------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`Default`**     | The Default view is the primary view in which your document is edited.                                                      |
-| **`Versions`**    | The Versions view is used to view the version history of a single document. [More details](../versions).                    |
-| **`Version`**     | The Version view is used to view a single version of a single document for a given collection. [More details](../versions). |
-| **`API`**         | The API view is used to display the REST API JSON response for a given document.                                            |
-| **`LivePreview`** | The LivePreview view is used to display the Live Preview interface. [More details](../live-preview).                        |
-
-### Document Tabs
-
-Each Document View can be given a new tab in the Edit View, if desired. Tabs are highly configurable, from as simple as changing the label to swapping out the entire component, they can be modified in any way. To add or customize tabs in the Edit View, use the `Component.Tab` key:
-
-```ts
-import type { SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const MyCollection: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
-  slug: 'my-collection',
-  admin: {
-    components: {
-      views: {
-        Edit: {
-          MyCustomTab: {
-            Component: MyCustomTab,
-            path: '/my-custom-tab',
-            Tab: MyCustomTab // highlight-line
-          },
-          AnotherCustomView: {
-            Component: AnotherCustomView,
-            path: '/another-custom-view',
-            // highlight-start
-            Tab: {
-              label: 'Another Custom View',
-              href: '/another-custom-view',
-            }
-            // highlight-end
-          },
-        },
-      },
-    },
-  },
-}
-```
-
-<Banner type="warning">
- <strong>Note:</strong>
- This applies to _both_ Collections _and_ Globals.
-</Banner>
-
-## Building Custom Views
-
-Custom Views are just [Custom Components](./components) rendered at the page-level. To understand how to build Custom Views, first review the [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components) guide. Once you have a Custom Component ready, you can use it as a Custom View.
-
-```ts
-import type { SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-import { MyCustomView } from './MyCustomView'
-
-export const MyCollectionConfig: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
-  // ...
-  admin: {
-    components: {
-      views: {
-        Edit: MyCustomView, // highlight-line
-      },
-    },
-  },
-}
-```
-
-Your Custom Views will be provided with the following props:
-
-| Prop                      | Description                                                                                                                            |
-| ------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |                                                                                            |
-| **`user`**                    | The currently logged in user.                                                                                                          |
-| **`locale`**                  | The current [Locale](../configuration/localization) of the [Admin Panel](./overview).                                                  |
-| **`navGroups`**               | The grouped navigation items according to `admin.group` in your [Collection Config](../collections/overview) or [Global Config](../globals/overview). |
-| **`params`**                  | An object containing the [Dynamic Route Parameters](https://nextjs.org/docs/app/building-your-application/routing/dynamic-routes).     |
-| **`permissions`**             | The permissions of the currently logged in user.                                                                                       |
-| **`searchParams`**            | An object containing the [Search Parameters](https://developer.mozilla.org/docs/Learn/Common_questions/What_is_a_URL#parameters).      |
-| **`visibleEntities`**         | The current user's visible entities according to your [Access Control](../access-control/overview).                                    |
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
-  All [Custom Server Components](./components) receive `payload` and `i18n` by default. See [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components) for more details.
-</Banner>
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Important:</strong>
-  It's up to you to secure your custom views. If your view requires a user to be logged in or to
-  have certain access rights, you should handle that within your view component yourself.
-</Banner>

docs/admin/vite.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,163 @@
+---
+title: Vite
+label: Vite
+order: 90
+desc: NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN
+---
+
+<Banner type="info">
+  The Vite bundler is currently in beta. If you would like to help us test this package, we'd love
+  to hear from you if you find any [bugs or issues](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/issues/)!
+</Banner>
+
+Payload has a Vite bundler that you can install and bundle the Admin Panel with. This is an alternative to the [Webpack](/docs/admin/webpack) bundler and might give some performance boosts to your development workflow.
+
+To use Vite as your bundler, first you need to install the package:
+
+```bash
+yarn add @payloadcms/bundler-vite
+```
+
+Then you will need to add the [bundler](/docs/admin/bundlers) to your Payload config:
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from '@payloadcms/config'
+import { viteBundler } from '@payloadcms/bundler-vite'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  collections: [],
+  admin: {
+    bundler: viteBundler(),
+  },
+})
+```
+
+Vite works fundamentally differently than Webpack. In development mode, it will first pre-bundle any of your dependencies that are CommonJS-only, and then it'll leverage ESM directly in your browser for a better HMR experience.
+
+It then uses Rollup to create production builds of your admin UI. With Vite, you should see a decent performance boost—especially after your first cold start. However, that first cold start might take a few more seconds.
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  In most cases, Vite should work out of the box. But existing Payload plugins may need to make
+  compatibility changes to support Vite.
+</Banner>
+
+This is because Vite aliases work fundamentally differently than Webpack aliases, and Payload relies on aliasing server-only code out of the Payload config to ensure that the bundled admin JS works within your browser.
+
+Here are the main differences between how Vite aliases work and how Webpack aliases work.
+
+**Vite aliases do not work with absolute paths.**
+
+In Vite, alias keys must <strong>exactly match</strong> a import paths. If you have 2 files that import the same server-only module, but have different import paths, you would need to add 2 aliases to support both import paths.
+
+```ts
+// File A
+import serverOnlyModule from '../server-only-module'
+
+// File B
+import serverOnlyModule from '../../server-only-module'
+
+// payload.config.ts
+// You would need to add 2 aliases to support both import paths
+export const buildConfig({
+  collections: [],
+  admin: {
+    bundler: viteBundler(),
+    vite: (incomingViteConfig) => {
+      const existingAliases = incomingViteConfig?.resolve?.alias || {};
+      let aliasArray: { find: string | RegExp; replacement: string; }[] = [];
+
+      // Pass the existing Vite aliases
+      if (Array.isArray(existingAliases)) {
+        aliasArray = existingAliases;
+      } else {
+        aliasArray = Object.values(existingAliases);
+      }
+
+      // Add your own aliases using the find and replacement keys
+      aliasArray.push({
+        find: '../server-only-module',
+        replacement: path.resolve(__dirname, './path/to/browser-safe-module.js')
+        find: '../../server-only-module',
+        replacement: path.resolve(__dirname, './path/to/browser-safe-module.js')
+      });
+
+      return {
+        ...incomingViteConfig,
+        resolve: {
+          ...(incomingViteConfig?.resolve || {}),
+          alias: aliasArray,
+        }
+      };
+    },
+  }
+})
+```
+
+**Vite aliases do not get applied to pre-bundled dependencies.**
+
+This especially affects plugins, as plugins will be pre-bundled by Vite using `esbuild`. To get around this and support Vite, plugin authors need to configure an alias to their plugin at the top level, so that the alias will work accordingly.
+
+Here's an example. Say your plugin is called `payload-plugin-cool`. It's imported as follows:
+
+```ts
+import { myCoolPlugin } from 'payload-plugin-cool'
+```
+
+That plugin should create an alias to support Vite as follows:
+
+```ts
+{
+  // aliases go here
+  find: 'payload-plugin-cool',
+  replacement: path.resolve(__dirname, './my-admin-plugin.js')
+}
+
+```
+
+This will effectively alias the entire plugin and work with Vite. If the plugin requires admin-specific code, then the `./my-admin-plugin.js` alias target file should reflect any changes necessary to the admin UI that the main server-side plugin performs.
+
+## Extending the Vite config
+
+The Payload config supports a new property for plugins to be able to extend the Vite config specifically. That property exists on the main Payload config under `admin.vite`. You can check out the [Vite docs](https://vitejs.dev/config/shared-options.html) for more information on what you can do with the Vite config.
+
+It's a function that takes a Vite config, and returns an updated Vite config. Here's an example:
+
+```ts
+export const buildConfig({
+  collections: [],
+  admin: {
+    bundler: viteBundler(),
+    vite: (incomingViteConfig) => {
+      const existingAliases = incomingViteConfig?.resolve?.alias || {};
+      let aliasArray: { find: string | RegExp; replacement: string; }[] = [];
+
+      // Pass the existing Vite aliases
+      if (Array.isArray(existingAliases)) {
+        aliasArray = existingAliases;
+      } else {
+        aliasArray = Object.values(existingAliases);
+      }
+
+      // Add your own aliases using the find and replacement keys
+      aliasArray.push({
+        find: '../server-only-module',
+        replacement: path.resolve(__dirname, './path/to/browser-safe-module.js')
+      });
+
+      return {
+        ...incomingViteConfig,
+        resolve: {
+          ...(incomingViteConfig?.resolve || {}),
+          alias: aliasArray,
+        }
+      };
+    },
+  }
+})
+```
+
+Learn more about [aliasing server-only modules](https://payloadcms.com/docs/admin/excluding-server-code#aliasing-server-only-modules).
+
+Even though there is a new property for Vite configs specifically, we have implemented some "compatibility" between Webpack and Vite out-of-the-box.
+
+If your config specifies Webpack aliases, we attempt to leverage them automatically within the Vite config. They are merged into the Vite alias configuration seamlessly and may work out-of-the-box.

docs/admin/webpack.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+---
+title: Webpack
+label: Webpack
+order: 80
+desc: The Payload admin panel uses Webpack 5 and supports many common functionalities such as SCSS and Typescript out of the box to give you more freedom.
+keywords: admin, webpack, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+---
+
+Payload has a Webpack (v5) bundler that you can build the Admin panel with. For now, we recommended using it because it is stable. If you are feeling a bit more adventurous you can give the [Vite](/docs/admin/vite) bundler a shot.
+
+Out of the box, the Webpack bundler supports common functionalities such as SCSS and Typescript, but there are many cases where you may need to add support for additional functionalities.
+
+## Installation
+
+```bash
+yarn add @payloadcms/bundler-webpack
+```
+
+### Import the bundler
+
+```ts
+// payload.config.ts
+
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { webpackBundler } from '@payloadcms/bundler-webpack'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  // highlight-start
+  admin: {
+    bundler: webpackBundler(),
+  },
+  // highlight-end
+})
+```
+
+## Extending Webpack
+
+If you need to extend the Webpack config, you can do so by passing a function to the `admin.webpack` property on your Payload config.
+The function will receive the Webpack config as an argument and should return the modified config.
+
+```ts
+// payload.config.ts
+
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { webpackBundler } from '@payloadcms/bundler-webpack'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  admin: {
+    bundler: webpackBundler()
+    // highlight-start
+    webpack: (config) => {
+      // full control of the Webpack config
+
+      return config
+    },
+    // highlight-end
+  },
+})
+```
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  <br />
+  If changes to your Webpack aliases are not surfacing, they might be
+  [cached](https://webpack.js.org/configuration/cache/) in `node_modules/.cache/webpack`. Try
+  deleting that folder and restarting your server.
+</Banner>

docs/authentication/api-keys.mdx

@@ -1,81 +0,0 @@
----
-title: API Key Strategy
-label: API Key Strategy
-order: 50
-desc: Enable API key based authentication to interface with Payload.
-keywords: authentication, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
----
-
-To integrate with third-party APIs or services, you might need the ability to generate API keys that can be used to identify as a certain user within Payload. API keys are generated on a user-by-user basis, similar to email and passwords, and are meant to represent a single user.
-
-For example, if you have a third-party service or external app that needs to be able to perform protected actions against Payload, first you need to create a user within Payload, i.e. `dev@thirdparty.com`. From your external application you will need to authenticate with that user, you have two options:
-
-1. Log in each time with that user and receive an expiring token to request with.
-1. Generate a non-expiring API key for that user to request with.
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  <br/>
-  This is particularly useful as you can create a "user" that reflects an integration with a specific external service and assign a "role" or specific access only needed by that service/integration.
-</Banner>
-
-Technically, both of these options will work for third-party integrations but the second option with API key is simpler, because it reduces the amount of work that your integrations need to do to be authenticated properly.
-
-To enable API keys on a collection, set the `useAPIKey` auth option to `true`. From there, a new interface will appear in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) for each document within the collection that allows you to generate an API key for each user in the Collection.
-
-```ts
-import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const ThirdPartyAccess: CollectionConfig = {
-  slug: 'third-party-access',
-  auth: {
-    useAPIKey: true, // highlight-line
-  },
-  fields: [],
-}
-```
-
-User API keys are encrypted within the database, meaning that if your database is compromised,
-your API keys will not be.
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Important:</strong>
-  If you change your `PAYLOAD_SECRET`, you will need to regenerate your API keys.
-  <br />
-  The secret key is used to encrypt the API keys, so if you change the secret, existing API keys will
-  no longer be valid.
-</Banner>
-
-### HTTP Authentication
-
-To authenticate REST or GraphQL API requests using an API key, set the `Authorization` header. The header is case-sensitive and needs the slug of the `auth.useAPIKey` enabled collection, then " API-Key ", followed by the `apiKey` that has been assigned. Payload's built-in middleware will then assign the user document to `req.user` and handle requests with the proper [Access Control](../access-control/overview). By doing this, Payload recognizes the request being made as a request by the user associated with that API key.
-
-**For example, using Fetch:**
-
-```ts
-import Users from '../collections/Users'
-
-const response = await fetch('http://localhost:3000/api/pages', {
-  headers: {
-    Authorization: `${Users.slug} API-Key ${YOUR_API_KEY}`,
-  },
-})
-```
-
-Payload ensures that the same, uniform [Access Control](../access-control/overview) is used across all authentication strategies. This enables you to utilize your existing Access Control configurations with both API keys and the standard email/password authentication. This consistency can aid in maintaining granular control over your API keys.
-
-### API Key Only Auth
-
-If you want to use API keys as the only authentication method for a collection, you can disable the default local strategy by setting `disableLocalStrategy` to `true` on the collection's `auth` property. This will disable the ability to authenticate with email and password, and will only allow for authentication via API key.
-
-```ts
-import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const ThirdPartyAccess: CollectionConfig = {
-  slug: 'third-party-access',
-  auth: {
-    useAPIKey: true,
-    disableLocalStrategy: true, // highlight-line
-  },
-}
-```

docs/authentication/config.mdx

@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ title: Authentication Config
 label: Config
 order: 20
 desc: Enable and customize options in the Authentication config for features including Forgot Password, Login Attempts, API key usage and more.
-keywords: authentication, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: authentication, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
 Payload's Authentication is extremely powerful and gives you everything you need when you go to build a new app or site in a secure and responsible manner.
@@ -18,12 +18,74 @@ To enable Authentication on a collection, define an `auth` property and set it t
 | **`tokenExpiration`**      | How long (in seconds) to keep the user logged in. JWTs and HTTP-only cookies will both expire at the same time.                                                                                                                     |
 | **`maxLoginAttempts`**     | Only allow a user to attempt logging in X amount of times. Automatically locks out a user from authenticating if this limit is passed. Set to `0` to disable.                                                                       |
 | **`lockTime`**             | Set the time (in milliseconds) that a user should be locked out if they fail authentication more times than `maxLoginAttempts` allows for.                                                                                          |
-| **`depth`**                | How many levels deep a `user` document should be populated when creating the JWT and binding the `user` to the `req`. Defaults to `0` and should only be modified if absolutely necessary, as this will affect performance. |
+| **`depth`**                | How many levels deep a `user` document should be populated when creating the JWT and binding the `user` to the express `req`. Defaults to `0` and should only be modified if absolutely necessary, as this will affect performance. |
 | **`cookies`**              | Set cookie options, including `secure`, `sameSite`, and `domain`. For advanced users.                                                                                                                                               |
 | **`forgotPassword`**       | Customize the way that the `forgotPassword` operation functions. [More](/docs/authentication/config#forgot-password)                                                                                                                |
 | **`verify`**               | Set to `true` or pass an object with verification options to require users to verify by email before they are allowed to log into your app. [More](/docs/authentication/config#email-verification)                                  |
 | **`disableLocalStrategy`** | Advanced - disable Payload's built-in local auth strategy. Only use this property if you have replaced Payload's auth mechanisms with your own.                                                                                     |
-| **`strategies`**           | Advanced - an array of custom authentification strategies to extend this collection's authentication with. [More](/docs/authentication/custom-strategies)                                                                         |
+| **`strategies`**           | Advanced - an array of PassportJS authentication strategies to extend this collection's authentication with. [More](/docs/authentication/config#strategies)                                                                         |
+
+### API keys
+
+To integrate with third-party APIs or services, you might need the ability to generate API keys that can be used to identify as a certain user within Payload.
+
+In Payload, users are essentially documents within a collection. Just like you can authenticate as a user with an email and password, which is considered as our default local auth strategy, you can also authenticate as a user with an API key. API keys are generated on a user-by-user basis, similar to email and passwords, and are meant to represent a single user.
+
+For example, if you have a third-party service or external app that needs to be able to perform protected actions at its discretion, you have two options:
+
+1. Create a user for the third-party app, and log in each time to receive a token before you attempt to access any protected actions
+1. Enable API key support for the Collection, where you can generate a non-expiring API key per user in the collection. This is particularly useful as you can create a "user" that reflects an integration with a specific external service and assign a "role" or specific access only needed by that service/integration. Alternatively, you could create a "super admin" user and assign an API key to that user so that any requests made with that API key are considered as being made by that super user.
+
+Technically, both of these options will work for third-party integrations but the second option with API key is simpler, because it reduces the amount of work that your integrations need to do to be authenticated properly.
+
+To enable API keys on a collection, set the `useAPIKey` auth option to `true`. From there, a new interface will appear in the Admin panel for each document within the collection that allows you to generate an API key for each user in the Collection.
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  User API keys are encrypted within the database, meaning that if your database is compromised,
+  your API keys will not be.
+</Banner>
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
+  If you change your `PAYLOAD_SECRET`, you will need to regenerate your API keys.
+  <br />
+  The secret key is used to encrypt the API keys, so if you change the secret, existing API keys will
+  no longer be valid.
+</Banner>
+
+#### Authenticating via API Key
+
+To authenticate REST or GraphQL API requests using an API key, set the `Authorization` header. The header is case-sensitive and needs the slug of the `auth.useAPIKey` enabled collection, then " API-Key ", followed by the `apiKey` that has been assigned. Payload's built-in middleware will then assign the user document to `req.user` and handle requests with the proper access control. By doing this, Payload recognizes the request being made as a request by the user associated with that API key.
+
+**For example, using Fetch:**
+
+```ts
+import User from '../collections/User'
+
+const response = await fetch('http://localhost:3000/api/pages', {
+  headers: {
+    Authorization: `${User.slug} API-Key ${YOUR_API_KEY}`,
+  },
+})
+```
+
+Payload ensures that the same, uniform access control is used across all authentication strategies. This enables you to utilize your existing access control configurations with both API keys and the standard email/password authentication. This consistency can aid in maintaining granular control over your API keys.
+
+#### API Key _Only_ Authentication
+
+If you want to use API keys as the only authentication method for a collection, you can disable the default local strategy by setting `disableLocalStrategy` to `true` on the collection's `auth` property. This will disable the ability to authenticate with email and password, and will only allow for authentication via API key.
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const Customers: CollectionConfig = {
+  slug: 'customers',
+  auth: {
+    useAPIKey: true,
+    disableLocalStrategy: true,
+  },
+}
+```
 
 ### Forgot Password
 
@@ -45,7 +107,7 @@ Function that accepts one argument, containing `{ req, token, user }`, that allo
 Example:
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
 export const Customers: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'customers',
@@ -117,7 +179,7 @@ Function that accepts one argument, containing `{ req, token, user }`, that allo
 Example:
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
 export const Customers: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'customers',
@@ -166,10 +228,35 @@ Example:
 }
 ```
 
+### Strategies
+
+As of Payload `1.0.0`, you can add additional authentication strategies to Payload easily by passing them to your collection's `auth.strategies` array.
+
+Behind the scenes, Payload uses PassportJS to power its local authentication strategy, so most strategies listed on the PassportJS website will work seamlessly. Combined with adding custom components to the admin panel's `Login` view, you can create advanced authentication strategies directly within Payload.
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  This is an advanced feature, so only attempt this if you are an experienced developer. Otherwise,
+  just let Payload's built-in authentication handle user auth for you.
+</Banner>
+
+The `strategies` property is an array that takes objects with the following properties:
+
+**`strategy`**
+
+This property can accept a Passport strategy directly, or you can pass a function that takes a `payload` argument, and returns a Passport strategy.
+
+**`name`**
+
+If you pass a strategy to the `strategy` property directly, the `name` property is optional and allows you to override the strategy's built-in name.
+
+However, if you pass a function to `strategy`, `name` is a required property.
+
+In either case, Payload will prefix the strategy name with the collection `slug` that the strategy is passed to.
+
 ### Admin autologin
 
 For testing and demo purposes you may want to skip forcing the admin user to login in order to access the panel.
-The `admin.autologin` property is used to configure the how visitors are handled when accessing the Admin Panel.
+The `admin.autologin` property is used to configure the how visitors are handled when accessing the admin panel.
 The default is that all users will have to login and this should not be enabled for environments where data needs to protected.
 
 #### autoLogin Options

docs/authentication/custom-strategies.mdx

@@ -1,94 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Custom Strategies
-label: Custom Strategies
-order: 60
-desc: Create custom authentication strategies to handle everything auth in Payload.
-keywords: authentication, config, configuration, overview, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
----
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  This is an advanced feature, so only attempt this if you are an experienced developer. Otherwise,
-  just let Payload's built-in authentication handle user auth for you.
-</Banner>
-
-### Creating a strategy
-
-At the core, a strategy is a way to authenticate a user making a request. As of `3.0` we moved away from passportJS in favor of pulling back the curtain and putting you in full control.
-
-A strategy is made up of the following:
-
-| Parameter                   | Description                                                               |
-| --------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*               | The name of your strategy                                                 |
-| **`authenticate`**&nbsp;\*  | A function that takes in the parameters below and returns a user or null. |
-
-The `authenticate` function is passed the following arguments:
-
-| Argument            | Description                                                                                       |
-| ------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`headers`** \*    | The headers on the incoming request. Useful for retrieving identifiable information on a request. |
-| **`payload`** \*    | The Payload class. Useful for authenticating the identifiable information against Payload.        |
-| **`isGraphQL`**     | Whether or not the request was made from a GraphQL endpoint. Default is `false`.                  |
-
-
-### Example Strategy
-
-At its core a strategy simply takes information from the incoming request and returns a user. This is exactly how Payload's built-in strategies function.
-
-Your `authenticate` method should return an object containing a Payload user document and any optional headers that you'd like Payload to set for you when we return a response.
-
-```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const Users: CollectionConfig = {
-  slug: 'users',
-  auth: {
-    disableLocalStrategy: true,
-    // highlight-start
-    strategies: [
-      {
-        name: 'custom-strategy',
-        authenticate: ({ payload, headers }) => {
-          const usersQuery = await payload.find({
-            collection: 'users',
-            where: {
-              code: {
-                equals: headers.get('code'),
-              },
-              secret: {
-                equals: headers.get('secret'),
-              },
-            },
-          })
-
-          return {
-            // Send the user back to authenticate,
-            // or send null if no user should be authenticated
-            user: usersQuery.docs[0] || null,
-
-            // Optionally, you can return headers
-            // that you'd like Payload to set here when
-            // it returns the response
-            responseHeaders: new Headers({
-              'some-header': 'my header value'
-            })
-          }
-        }
-      }
-    ]
-    // highlight-end
-  },
-  fields: [
-    {
-      name: 'code',
-      type: 'text',
-      index: true,
-      unique: true,
-    },
-    {
-      name: 'secret',
-      type: 'text',
-    },
-  ]
-}
-```

docs/authentication/http-only-cookies.mdx

@@ -1,91 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Cookie Strategy
-label: Cookie Strategy
-order: 30
-desc: Enable HTTP Cookie based authentication to interface with Payload.
-keywords: authentication, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
----
-
-Payload `login`, `logout`, and `refresh` operations make use of HTTP-only cookies for authentication purposes.
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  <br />
-  You can access the logged-in user from [Access Control](../access-control/overview) functions and hooks from the `req.user` property.
-  <br />
-  [Learn more about token data](/docs/authentication/token-data).
-</Banner>
-
-### Automatic browser inclusion
-
-Modern browsers automatically include `http-only` cookies when making requests directly to URLs—meaning that if you are running your API on `https://example.com`, and you have logged in and visit `https://example.com/test-page`, your browser will automatically include the Payload authentication cookie for you.
-
-### HTTP Authentication
-
-However, if you use `fetch` or similar APIs to retrieve Payload resources from its REST or GraphQL API, you must specify to include credentials (cookies).
-
-Fetch example, including credentials:
-
-```ts
-const response = await fetch('http://localhost:3000/api/pages', {
-  credentials: 'include',
-})
-
-const pages = await response.json()
-```
-
-For more about including cookies in requests from your app to your Payload API, [read the MDN docs](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Fetch_API/Using_Fetch#Sending_a_request_with_credentials_included).
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  <br />
-  To make sure you have a Payload cookie set properly in your browser after logging in, you can use
-  the browsers Developer Tools > Application > Cookies > [your-domain-here]. The Developer tools
-  will still show HTTP-only cookies.
-</Banner>
-
-### CSRF Attacks
-
-CSRF (cross-site request forgery) attacks are common and dangerous. By using an HTTP-only cookie, Payload removes many XSS vulnerabilities, however, CSRF attacks can still be possible.
-
-For example, let's say you have a popular app `https://payload-finances.com` that allows users to manage finances, send and receive money. As Payload is using HTTP-only cookies, that means that browsers automatically will include cookies when sending requests to your domain - <strong>no matter what page created the request</strong>.
-
-So, if a user of `https://payload-finances.com` is logged in and is browsing around on the internet, they might stumble onto a page with malicious intent. Let's look at an example:
-
-```ts
-// malicious-intent.com
-// makes an authenticated request as on your behalf
-
-const maliciousRequest = await fetch(`https://payload-finances.com/api/me`, {
-  credentials: 'include'
-}).then(res => await res.json())
-```
-
-In this scenario, if your cookie was still valid, malicious-intent.com would be able to make requests like the one above on your behalf. This is a CSRF attack.
-
-### CSRF Prevention
-
-Define domains that your trust and are willing to accept Payload HTTP-only cookie based requests from. Use the `csrf` option on the base Payload Config to do this:
-
-```ts
-// payload.config.ts
-
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
-
-const config = buildConfig({
-  serverURL: 'https://my-payload-instance.com',
-  // highlight-start
-  csrf: [
-    // whitelist of domains to allow cookie auth from
-    'https://your-frontend-app.com',
-    'https://your-other-frontend-app.com',
-    // `config.serverURL` is added by default if defined
-  ],
-  // highlight-end
-  collections: [
-    // collections here
-  ],
-})
-
-export default config
-```

docs/authentication/jwt.mdx

@@ -1,54 +0,0 @@
----
-title: JWT Strategy
-label: JWT Strategy
-order: 40
-desc: Enable JSON Web Token based authentication to interface with Payload.
-keywords: authentication, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
----
-
-Payload offers the ability to authenticate via `JWT` (JSON web token). These can be read from the responses of `login`, `refresh`, and `me` auth operations.
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  <br />
-  You can access the logged-in user from [Access Control](../access-control/overview) functions and hooks from the `req.user` property.
-  <br />
-  [Learn more about token data](/docs/authentication/token-data).
-</Banner>
-
-### Identifying Users Via The Authorization Header
-
-In addition to authenticating via an HTTP-only cookie, you can also identify users via the `Authorization` header on an HTTP request.
-
-Example:
-
-```ts
-const user = await fetch('http://localhost:3000/api/users/login', {
-  method: 'POST',
-  body: JSON.stringify({
-    email: 'dev@payloadcms.com',
-    password: 'password',
-  })
-}).then(req => await req.json())
-
-const request = await fetch('http://localhost:3000', {
-  headers: {
-    Authorization: `JWT ${user.token}`,
-  },
-})
-```
-
-### Omitting The Token
-
-In some cases you may want to prevent the token from being returned from the auth operations. You can do that by setting `removeTokenFromResponse` to `true` like so:
-
-```ts
-import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const UsersWithoutJWTs: CollectionConfig = {
-  slug: 'users-without-jwts',
-  auth: {
-    removeTokenFromRepsonse: true, // highlight-line
-  },
-}
-```

docs/authentication/operations.mdx

@@ -1,16 +1,16 @@
 ---
 title: Authentication Operations
 label: Operations
-order: 80
+order: 30
 desc: Enabling Authentication automatically makes key operations available such as Login, Logout, Verify, Unlock, Reset Password and more.
-keywords: authentication, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: authentication, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
 Enabling Authentication on a Collection automatically exposes additional auth-based operations in the Local, REST, and GraphQL APIs.
 
 ## Access
 
-The Access operation returns what a logged in user can and can't do with the collections and globals that are registered via your config. This data can be immensely helpful if your app needs to show and hide certain features based on [Access Control](../access-control/overview), just as the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) does.
+The Access operation returns what a logged in user can and can't do with the collections and globals that are registered via your config. This data can be immensely helpful if your app needs to show and hide certain features based on access control, as the Payload Admin panel does.
 
 **REST API endpoint**:
 
@@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ query {
 
 ## Login
 
-Accepts an `email` and `password`. On success, it will return the logged in user as well as a token that can be used to authenticate. In the GraphQL and REST APIs, this operation also automatically sets an HTTP-only cookie including the user's token. If you pass a `res` to the Local API operation, Payload will set a cookie there as well.
+Accepts an `email` and `password`. On success, it will return the logged in user as well as a token that can be used to authenticate. In the GraphQL and REST APIs, this operation also automatically sets an HTTP-only cookie including the user's token. If you pass an Express `res` to the Local API operation, Payload will set a cookie there as well.
 
 **Example REST API login**:
 
@@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ mutation {
 
 ## Refresh
 
-Allows for "refreshing" JWTs. If your user has a token that is about to expire, but the user is still active and using the app, you might want to use the `refresh` operation to receive a new token by executing this operation via the authenticated user.
+Allows for "refreshing" JWTs. If your user has a token that is about to expire, but the user is still active and using the app, you might want to use the `refresh` operation to receive a new token by sending the operation the token that is about to expire.
 
 This operation requires a non-expired token to send back a new one. If the user's token has already expired, you will need to allow them to log in again to retrieve a new token.
 
@@ -237,6 +237,13 @@ mutation {
 }
 ```
 
+<Banner type="success">
+  The Refresh operation will automatically find the user's token in either a JWT header or the
+  HTTP-only cookie. But, you can specify the token you're looking to refresh by providing the REST
+  API with a `token` within the JSON body of the request, or by providing the GraphQL resolver a
+  `token` arg.
+</Banner>
+
 ## Verify by Email
 
 If your collection supports email verification, the Verify operation will be exposed which accepts a verification token and sets the user's `_verified` property to `true`, thereby allowing the user to authenticate with the Payload API.
@@ -271,9 +278,9 @@ const result = await payload.verifyEmail({
 
 ## Unlock
 
-If a user locks themselves out and you wish to deliberately unlock them, you can utilize the Unlock operation. The [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) features an Unlock control automatically for all collections that feature max login attempts, but you can programmatically unlock users as well by using the Unlock operation.
+If a user locks themselves out and you wish to deliberately unlock them, you can utilize the Unlock operation. The Admin panel features an Unlock control automatically for all collections that feature max login attempts, but you can programmatically unlock users as well by using the Unlock operation.
 
-To restrict who is allowed to unlock users, you can utilize the [`unlock`](../access-control/overview#unlock) access control function.
+To restrict who is allowed to unlock users, you can utilize the [`unlock`](/docs/access-control/overview#unlock) access control function.
 
 **Example REST API unlock**:
 
@@ -308,7 +315,7 @@ Payload comes with built-in forgot password functionality. Submitting an email a
 
 The link to reset the user's password contains a token which is what allows the user to securely reset their password.
 
-By default, the Forgot Password operations send users to the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) to reset their password, but you can customize the generated email to send users to the frontend of your app instead by [overriding the email HTML](/docs/authentication/config#forgot-password).
+By default, the Forgot Password operations send users to the Payload Admin panel to reset their password, but you can customize the generated email to send users to the frontend of your app instead by [overriding the email HTML](/docs/authentication/config#forgot-password).
 
 **Example REST API Forgot Password**:
 

docs/authentication/overview.mdx

@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ title: Authentication Overview
 label: Overview
 order: 10
 desc: Payload provides highly secure user Authentication out of the box, and you can fully customize, override, or remove the default Authentication support.
-keywords: authentication, config, configuration, overview, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: authentication, config, configuration, overview, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
 <YouTube
@@ -16,10 +16,10 @@ keywords: authentication, config, configuration, overview, documentation, Conten
   allows for users to identify themselves to Payload.
 </Banner>
 
-Authentication is used within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) itself as well as throughout your app(s) themselves however you determine necessary.
+Authentication is used within the Payload Admin panel itself as well as throughout your app(s) themselves however you determine necessary.
 
-![Authentication Admin Panel functionality](https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/auth-admin.jpg)
-_Admin Panel screenshot depicting an Admins Collection with Auth enabled_
+![Authentication admin panel functionality](https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/auth-admin.jpg)
+_Admin panel screenshot depicting an Admins Collection with Auth enabled_
 
 **Here are some common use cases of Authentication outside of Payload's dashboard itself:**
 
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ _Admin Panel screenshot depicting an Admins Collection with Auth enabled_
 - P2P app or social site where users need to log in and manage their profiles
 - Online game where players need to track their progress over time
 
-By default, Payload provides you with a `User` collection that supports Authentication, which is used to access the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview). But, you can add support to one or many Collections of your own. For more information on how to customize, override, or remove the default `User` collection, [click here](/docs/admin/overview#the-admin-user-collection).
+By default, Payload provides you with a `User` collection that supports Authentication, which is used to access the Admin panel. But, you can add support to one or many Collections of your own. For more information on how to customize, override, or remove the default `User` collection, [click here](/docs/admin/overview#the-admin-user-collection).
 
 ## Enabling Auth on a collection
 
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ Every Payload Collection can opt-in to supporting Authentication by specifying t
 Simple example collection:
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
 export const Admins: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'admins',
@@ -66,39 +66,111 @@ export const Admins: CollectionConfig = {
 **By enabling Authentication on a config, the following modifications will automatically be made to your Collection:**
 
 1. `email` as well as password `salt` & `hash` fields will be added to your Collection's schema
-1. The [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) will feature a new set of corresponding UI to allow for changing password and editing email
+1. The Admin panel will feature a new set of corresponding UI to allow for changing password and editing email
 1. [A new set of `operations`](/docs/authentication/operations) will be exposed via Payload's REST, Local, and GraphQL APIs
 
 Once enabled, each document that is created within the Collection can be thought of as a `user` - who can make use of commonly required authentication functions such as logging in / out, resetting their password, and more.
 
-## Authentication Strategies
-
-Out of the box Payload ships with a few powerful authentication strategies. HTTP-Only Cookies, JWT's and API-Keys, they can work together or individually. You can also have multiple collections that have auth enabled, but only 1 of them can be used to log into the Admin Panel.
-
-### HTTP-Only Cookies
-
-HTTP-only cookies are a highly secure method of storing identifiable data on a user's device so that Payload can automatically recognize a returning user until their cookie expires. They are totally protected from common XSS attacks and <strong>cannot be read by JavaScript in the browser</strong>, unlike JWT's.
-
-You can learn more about this strategy from the [HTTP-Only Cookies](/docs/authentication/http-only-cookies) docs.
-
-### JSON Web Tokens
-
-JWT (JSON Web Tokens) can also be utilized to perform authentication. Tokens are generated on `login`, `refresh` and `me` operations and can be attached to future requests to authenticate users.
-
-You can learn more about this strategy from the [JWT](/docs/authentication/jwt) docs.
-
-### API Keys
-
-API Keys can be enabled on auth collections. These are particularly useful when you want to authenticate against Payload from a third party service.
-
-You can learn more about this strategy from the [API Keys](/docs/authentication/api-keys) docs.
-
-### Custom Strategies
-
-There are cases where these may not be enough for your application. Payload is extendable by design so you can wire up your own strategy when you need to.
-
-You can learn more about custom strategies from the [Custom Strategies](/docs/authentication/custom-strategies) docs.
-
 ## Logging in / out, resetting password, etc.
 
 [Click here](/docs/authentication/operations) for a list of all automatically-enabled Auth operations, including `login`, `logout`, `refresh`, and others.
+
+## Token-based auth
+
+Successfully logging in returns a `JWT` (JSON web token) which is how a user will identify themselves to Payload. By providing this JWT via either an HTTP-only cookie or an `Authorization: JWT` or `Authorization: Bearer` header, Payload will automatically identify the user and add its user JWT data to the Express `req`, which is available throughout Payload including within access control, hooks, and more.
+
+You can specify what data gets encoded to the JWT token by setting `saveToJWT` to true in your auth collection fields. If you wish to use a different key other than the field `name`, you can provide it to `saveToJWT` as a string. It is also possible to use `saveToJWT` on fields that are nested in inside groups and tabs. If a group has a `saveToJWT` set it will include the object with all sub-fields in the token. You can set `saveToJWT: false` for any fields you wish to omit. If a field inside a group has `saveToJWT` set, but the group does not, the field will be included at the top level of the token.
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  <br />
+  You can access the logged-in user from access control functions and hooks via the Express{' '}
+  <strong>req</strong>. The logged-in user is automatically added as the <strong>user</strong>{' '}
+  property.
+</Banner>
+
+## HTTP-only cookies
+
+Payload `login`, `logout`, and `refresh` operations make use of HTTP-only cookies for authentication purposes. HTTP-only cookies are a highly secure method of storing identifiable data on a user's device so that Payload can automatically recognize a returning user until their cookie expires. They are totally protected from common XSS attacks and cannot be read at all via JavaScript in the browser.
+
+#### Automatic browser inclusion
+
+Modern browsers automatically include `http-only` cookies when making requests directly to URLs—meaning that if you are running your API on http://example.com, and you have logged in and visit http://example.com/test-page, your browser will automatically include the Payload authentication cookie for you.
+
+#### Using Fetch or other HTTP APIs
+
+However, if you use `fetch` or similar APIs to retrieve Payload resources from its REST or GraphQL API, you need to specify to include credentials (cookies).
+
+Fetch example, including credentials:
+
+```ts
+const response = await fetch('http://localhost:3000/api/pages', {
+  credentials: 'include',
+})
+
+const pages = await response.json()
+```
+
+For more about how to automatically include cookies in requests from your app to your Payload API, [click here](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Fetch_API/Using_Fetch#Sending_a_request_with_credentials_included).
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  <br />
+  To make sure you have a Payload cookie set properly in your browser after logging in, you can use
+  Chrome's Developer Tools - Application - Cookies - [your-domain-here]. The Chrome Developer tools
+  will still show HTTP-only cookies, even when JavaScript running on the page can't.
+</Banner>
+
+## CSRF Protection
+
+CSRF (cross-site request forgery) attacks are common and dangerous. By using an HTTP-only cookie, Payload removes many XSS vulnerabilities, however, CSRF attacks can still be possible.
+
+For example, let's say you have a very popular app running at coolsite.com. This app allows users to manage finances and send / receive money. As Payload is using HTTP-only cookies, that means that browsers automatically will include cookies when sending requests to your domain - no matter what page created the request.
+
+So, if a user of coolsite.com is logged in and just browsing around on the internet, they might stumble onto a page with bad intentions. That bad page might automatically make requests to all sorts of sites to see if they can find one that they can log into - and coolsite.com might be on their list. If your user was logged in while they visited that evil site, the attacker could do whatever they wanted as if they were your coolsite.com user by just sending requests to the coolsite API (which would automatically include the auth cookie). They could send themselves a bunch of money from your user's account, change the user's password, etc. This is what a CSRF attack is.
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>
+    To protect against CSRF attacks, Payload only accepts cookie-based authentication from domains
+    that you explicitly whitelist.
+  </strong>
+</Banner>
+
+To define domains that should allow users to identify themselves via the Payload HTTP-only cookie, use the `csrf` option on the base Payload config to whitelist domains that you trust.
+
+`payload.config.ts`:
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+
+const config = buildConfig({
+  collections: [
+    // collections here
+  ],
+  // highlight-start
+  csrf: [
+    // whitelist of domains to allow cookie auth from
+    'https://your-frontend-app.com',
+    'https://your-other-frontend-app.com',
+  ],
+  // highlight-end
+})
+
+export default config
+```
+
+## Identifying users via the Authorization Header
+
+In addition to authenticating via an HTTP-only cookie, you can also identify users via the `Authorization` header on an HTTP request.
+
+Example:
+
+```ts
+const request = await fetch('http://localhost:3000', {
+  headers: {
+    Authorization: `JWT ${token}`,
+  },
+})
+```
+
+You can retrieve a user's token via the response to `login`, `refresh`, and `me` auth operations.

docs/authentication/token-data.mdx

@@ -1,107 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Token Data
-label: Token Data
-order: 70
-desc: Storing data for read on the request object.
-keywords: authentication, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
----
-
-During the lifecycle of a request you will be able to access the data you have configured to be stored in the JWT by accessing `req.user`. The user object is automatically appeneded to the request for you.
-
-### Definining Token Data
-
-You can specify what data gets encoded to the Cookie/JWT-Token by setting `saveToJWT` property on fields within your auth collection.
-
-```ts
-import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const Users: CollectionConfig = {
-  slug: 'users',
-  auth: true,
-  fields: [
-    {
-      // will be stored in the JWT
-      saveToJWT: true,
-      type: 'select',
-      name: 'role',
-      options: [
-        'super-admin',
-        'user',
-      ]
-    },
-    {
-      // the entire object will be stored in the JWT
-      // tab fields can do the same thing!
-      saveToJWT: true,
-      type: 'group',
-      name: 'group1',
-      fields: [
-        {
-          type: 'text',
-          name: 'includeField',
-        },
-        {
-          // will be omitted from the JWT
-          saveToJWT: false,
-          type: 'text',
-          name: 'omitField',
-        },
-      ]
-    },
-    {
-      type: 'group',
-      name: 'group2',
-      fields: [
-        {
-          // will be stored in the JWT
-          // but stored at the top level
-          saveToJWT: true,
-          type: 'text',
-          name: 'includeField',
-        },
-        {
-          type: 'text',
-          name: 'omitField',
-        },
-      ]
-    },
-  ]
-}
-```
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  <br/>
-  If you wish to use a different key other than the field `name`, you can define `saveToJWT` as a string.
-</Banner>
-
-
-### Using Token Data
-
-This is especially helpful when writing [Hooks](../hooks/overview) and [Access Control](../access-control/overview) that depend on user defined fields.
-
-```ts
-import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const Invoices: CollectionConfig = {
-  slug: 'invoices',
-  access: {
-    read: ({ req, data }) => {
-      if (!req?.user) return false
-      // highlight-start
-      if ({ req.user?.role === 'super-admin'}) {
-        return true
-      }
-      // highlight-end
-      return data.owner === req.user.id
-    }
-  }
-  fields: [
-    {
-      name: 'owner',
-      relationTo: 'users'
-    },
-    // ... other fields
-  ],
-}
-```

docs/authentication/using-middleware.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+---
+title: Using the Payload Auth Middleware
+label: Using the Middleware
+order: 40
+desc: Make full use of Payload's built-in authentication with your own custom Express endpoints by adding Payload's authentication middleware.
+keywords: authentication, middleware, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+---
+
+Because Payload uses your existing Express server, you are free to add whatever logic you need to your app through endpoints of your own. However, Payload does not add its middleware to your Express app itself—instead, it scopes all of its middleware to Payload-specific routers.
+
+This approach has a ton of benefits - it's great for isolation of concerns and limiting scope, but it also means that your additional routes won't have access to Payload's user authentication.
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  You can make full use of Payload's built-in authentication within your own custom Express
+  endpoints by adding Payload's authentication middleware.
+</Banner>
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  Payload must be initialized before the `payload.authenticate` middleware can be used. This is done
+  by calling `payload.init()` prior to adding the middleware.
+</Banner>
+
+Example in `server.js`:
+
+```ts
+import express from 'express'
+import payload from 'payload'
+
+const app = express()
+
+const start = async () => {
+  await payload.init({
+    secret: 'PAYLOAD_SECRET_KEY',
+    express: app,
+  })
+
+  const router = express.Router()
+
+  // Note: Payload must be initialized before the `payload.authenticate` middleware can be used
+  router.use(payload.authenticate) // highlight-line
+
+  router.get('/', (req, res) => {
+    if (req.user) {
+      return res.send(`Authenticated successfully as ${req.user.email}.`)
+    }
+
+    return res.send('Not authenticated')
+  })
+
+  app.use('/some-route-here', router)
+
+  app.listen(3000)
+}
+
+start()
+```

docs/cloud/configuration.mdx

@@ -44,9 +44,9 @@ If you are deploying a new project from a template, the following settings will
 Any of the features in Payload Cloud that require environment variables will automatically be provided to your application. If your app requires any custom environment variables, you can set them here.
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  Note: For security reasons, any variables you wish to provide to the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) must be prefixed
-  with `NEXT_PUBLIC_`.  Learn more
-  [here](../configuration/environment-vars).
+  Note: For security reasons, any variables you wish to provide to the Admin panel must be prefixed
+  with `PAYLOAD_PUBLIC_`.  Learn more
+  [here](https://payloadcms.com/docs/admin/webpack#admin-environment-vars).
 </Banner>
 
 ## Payment

docs/cloud/projects.mdx

@@ -59,9 +59,9 @@ You can update settings from your Project’s Settings tab. Changes to your buil
 From the Environment Variables page of the Settings tab, you can add, update and delete variables for use in your project. Like build settings, these changes will trigger a redeployment of your project.
 
 <Banner>
-  Note: For security reasons, any variables you wish to provide to the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) must be prefixed
+  Note: For security reasons, any variables you wish to provide to the Admin panel must be prefixed
   with `PAYLOAD_PUBLIC_`.  Learn more
-  [here](../configuration/environment-vars).
+  [here](https://payloadcms.com/docs/admin/webpack#admin-environment-vars).
 </Banner>
 
 ## Custom Domains
@@ -98,13 +98,13 @@ From there, you are ready to make updates to your project. When you are ready to
 
 ## Cloud Plugin
 
-Projects generated from a template will come pre-configured with the official Cloud Plugin, but if you are using your own repository you will need to add this into your project. To do so, add the plugin to your Payload Config:
+Projects generated from a template will come pre-configured with the official Cloud Plugin, but if you are using your own repository you will need to add this into your project. To do so, add the plugin to your Payload config:
 
 `yarn add @payloadcms/plugin-cloud`
 
 ```js
 import { payloadCloud } from '@payloadcms/plugin-cloud'
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
 
 export default buildConfig({
   plugins: [payloadCloud()],
@@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ export default buildConfig({
 ```
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Note:** If your Payload Config already has an email with transport, this will take precedence
+  **Note:** If your Payload config already has an email with transport, this will take precedence
   over Payload Cloud's email service.
 </Banner>
 

docs/configuration/collections.mdx

@@ -3,235 +3,186 @@ title: Collection Configs
 label: Collections
 order: 20
 desc: Structure your Collections for your needs by defining fields, adding slugs and labels, establishing access control, tying in hooks, setting timestamps and more.
-keywords: collections, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: collections, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
-A Collection is a group of records, called Documents, that all share a common schema. You can define as many Collections as your application needs. Each Collection saves to the [Database](../database/overview) based on the [Fields](../fields/overview) that you define, and automatically generates the [Local API](../local-api/overview), [REST API](../rest-api/overview), and [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview) to manage your Documents.
+Payload Collections are defined through configs of their own, and you can define as many as your application needs. Each
+Collection will scaffold a new collection automatically in your database of choice, based on fields that you define.
 
-Collections are also the primary way to achieve [Authentication](../authentication/overview) in Payload. By defining a Collection with `auth` options, that Collection receives additional operations to support user authentication.
+It's often best practice to write your Collections in separate files and then import them into the main Payload config.
 
-Collections are the primary way to structure recurring data in your application, such as users, products, pages, posts, and other types of content that you might want to manage. Each Collection can have its own unique [Access Control](../access-control/overview), [Hooks](../hooks/overview), [Admin Options](#admin-options), and more.
+## Options
 
-To define a Collection Config, use the `collection` property in your [Payload Config](./overview):
+| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
+|------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| **`slug`** \*          | Unique, URL-friendly string that will act as an identifier for this Collection.                                                                                                                                          |
+| **`fields`** \*        | Array of field types that will determine the structure and functionality of the data stored within this Collection. [Click here](/docs/fields/overview) for a full list of field types as well as how to configure them. |
+| **`labels`**           | Singular and plural labels for use in identifying this Collection throughout Payload. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                                           |
+| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-options).                                                                                                                                               |
+| **`hooks`**            | Entry points to "tie in" to Collection actions at specific points. [More](/docs/hooks/overview#collection-hooks)                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**           | Provide access control functions to define exactly who should be able to do what with Documents in this Collection. [More](/docs/access-control/overview/#collections)                                                   |
+| **`auth`**             | Specify options if you would like this Collection to feature authentication. For more, consult the [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config) documentation.                                                          |
+| **`upload`**           | Specify options if you would like this Collection to support file uploads. For more, consult the [Uploads](/docs/upload/overview) documentation.                                                                         |
+| **`timestamps`**       | Set to false to disable documents' automatically generated `createdAt` and `updatedAt` timestamps.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`versions`**         | Set to true to enable default options, or configure with object properties. [More](/docs/versions/overview#collection-config)                                                                                            |
+| **`endpoints`**        | Add custom routes to the REST API. Set to `false` to disable routes. [More](/docs/rest-api/overview#custom-endpoints)                                                                                                    |
+| **`graphQL`**          | An object with `singularName` and `pluralName` strings used in schema generation. Auto-generated from slug if not defined. Set to `false` to disable GraphQL.                                                            |
+| **`typescript`**       | An object with property `interface` as the text used in schema generation. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                                                      |
+| **`disableDuplicate`** | When true, do not show the "Duplicate" button while editing documents within this collection and prevent `duplicate` from all APIs.                                                                                      |
+| **`defaultSort`**      | Pass a top-level field to sort by default in the collection List view. Prefix the name of the field with a minus symbol ("-") to sort in descending order.                                                               |
+| **`dbName`**      | Custom table or collection name depending on the database adapter. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.
+| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                                                |
+
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
+
+### Simple collection example
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
-export default buildConfig({
-  // ...
-  collections: [ // highlight-line
-    // Your Collections go here
+export const Orders: CollectionConfig = {
+  slug: 'orders',
+  fields: [
+    {
+      name: 'total',
+      type: 'number',
+      required: true,
+    },
+    {
+      name: 'placedBy',
+      type: 'relationship',
+      relationTo: 'customers',
+      required: true,
+    },
   ],
-})
+}
 ```
 
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  If your Collection is only ever meant to contain a single Document, consider using a [Global](./globals) instead.
-</Banner>
+### More collection config examples
 
-## Config Options
+You can find an assortment
+of [example collection configs](https://github.com/payloadcms/public-demo/tree/master/src/payload/collections) in the Public
+Demo source code on GitHub.
 
-It's often best practice to write your Collections in separate files and then import them into the main [Payload Config](../overview).
+## Admin options
 
-Here is what a simple Collection Config might look like:
+You can customize the way that the Admin panel behaves on a collection-by-collection basis by defining the `admin`
+property on a collection's config.
+
+| Option                       | Description                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ---------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| `group`                      | Text used as a label for grouping collection and global links together in the navigation.                                                                                                             |
+| `hidden`                     | Set to true or a function, called with the current user, returning true to exclude this collection from navigation and admin routing.                                                                 |
+| `hooks`                      | Admin-specific hooks for this collection. [More](#admin-hooks)                                                                                                                                        |
+| `useAsTitle`                 | Specify a top-level field to use for a document title throughout the Admin panel. If no field is defined, the ID of the document is used as the title.                                                |
+| `description`                | Text or React component to display below the Collection label in the List view to give editors more information.                                                                                      |
+| `defaultColumns`             | Array of field names that correspond to which columns to show by default in this collection's List view.                                                                                              |
+| `hideAPIURL`                 | Hides the "API URL" meta field while editing documents within this collection.                                                                                                                        |
+| `enableRichTextLink`         | The [Rich Text](/docs/fields/rich-text) field features a `Link` element which allows for users to automatically reference related documents within their rich text. Set to `true` by default.         |
+| `enableRichTextRelationship` | The [Rich Text](/docs/fields/rich-text) field features a `Relationship` element which allows for users to automatically reference related documents within their rich text. Set to `true` by default. |
+| `meta`                       | Metadata overrides to apply to the [Admin panel](../admin/overview). Included properties are `description` and `openGraph`.                                                                           |
+| `preview`                    | Function to generate preview URLS within the Admin panel that can point to your app. [More](#preview).                                                                                                |
+| `livePreview`                | Enable real-time editing for instant visual feedback of your front-end application. [More](/docs/live-preview/overview).                                                                              |
+| `components`                 | Swap in your own React components to be used within this collection. [More](/docs/admin/components#collections)                                                                                       |
+| `listSearchableFields`       | Specify which fields should be searched in the List search view. [More](#list-searchable-fields)                                                                                                      |
+| **`pagination`**             | Set pagination-specific options for this collection. [More](#pagination)                                                                                                                              |
+
+## Preview
+
+Collection `admin` options can accept a `preview` function that will be used to generate a link pointing to the frontend
+of your app to preview data.
+
+If the function is specified, a Preview button will automatically appear in the corresponding collection's Edit view.
+Clicking the Preview button will link to the URL that is generated by the function.
+
+**The preview function accepts two arguments:**
+
+1. The document being edited
+1. An `options` object, containing `locale` and `token` properties. The `token` is the currently logged-in user's JWT.
+
+**Example collection with preview function:**
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
 export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'posts',
   fields: [
     {
-      name: 'title',
+      name: 'slug',
       type: 'text',
-    }
-  ]
-}
-```
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
-  For a more complex example, see the [Public Demo](https://github.com/payloadcms/public-demo) source code on GitHub, or the [Templates](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/templates) and [Examples](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples) directories in the Payload repository.
-</Banner>
-
-The following options are available:
-
-| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
-|------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| **`admin`**            | The configuration options for the Admin Panel. [More details](#admin-options).                                                                                                                                               |
-| **`access`**           | Provide Access Control functions to define exactly who should be able to do what with Documents in this Collection. [More details](../access-control/collections).                                                   |
-| **`auth`**             | Specify options if you would like this Collection to feature authentication. For more, consult the [Authentication](../authentication/config) documentation.                                                          |
-| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                          |
-| **`disableDuplicate`** | When true, do not show the "Duplicate" button while editing documents within this Collection and prevent `duplicate` from all APIs.                                                                                      |
-| **`defaultSort`**      | Pass a top-level field to sort by default in the Collection List View. Prefix the name of the field with a minus symbol ("-") to sort in descending order.                                                               |
-| **`dbName`**      | Custom table or Collection name depending on the Database Adapter. Auto-generated from slug if not defined. |
-| **`endpoints`**        | Add custom routes to the REST API. Set to `false` to disable routes. [More details](../rest-api/overview#custom-endpoints).                                                                                                    |
-| **`fields`** \*        | Array of field types that will determine the structure and functionality of the data stored within this Collection. [Click here](../fields/overview) for a full list of field types as well as how to configure them. |
-| **`graphQL`**          | An object with `singularName` and `pluralName` strings used in schema generation. Auto-generated from slug if not defined. Set to `false` to disable GraphQL.                                                            |
-| **`hooks`**            | Entry point for Hooks. [More details](../hooks/overview#collection-hooks).                                                                                                         |
-| **`labels`**           | Singular and plural labels for use in identifying this Collection throughout Payload. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                                           |
-| **`slug`** \*          | Unique, URL-friendly string that will act as an identifier for this Collection.                                                                                                                                          |
-| **`timestamps`**       | Set to false to disable documents' automatically generated `createdAt` and `updatedAt` timestamps.                                                                                                                       |
-| **`typescript`**       | An object with property `interface` as the text used in schema generation. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`upload`**           | Specify options if you would like this Collection to support file uploads. For more, consult the [Uploads](../upload/overview) documentation.                                                                         |
-| **`versions`**         | Set to true to enable default options, or configure with object properties. [More details](../versions/overview#collection-config).                                                                                            |
-
-_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
-
-### Fields
-
-Fields define the schema of the Documents within a Collection. To learn more, go to the [Fields](../fields/overview) documentation.
-
-### Access Control
-
-[Collection Access Control](../access-control/overview) determines what a user can and cannot do with any given Document within a Collection. To learn more, go to the [Access Control](../access-control/overview) documentation.
-
-### Hooks
-
-[Collection Hooks](../hooks/collections) allow you to tie into the lifecycle of your Documents so you can execute your own logic during specific events. To learn more, go to the [Hooks](../hooks/overview) documentation.
-
-### Admin Options
-
-You can customize the way that the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) behaves on a Collection-by-Collection basis.
-
-To configure Admin Options for Collections, use the `admin` property in your Collection Config:
-
-```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
-  // ...
-  admin: { // highlight-line
-    // ...
-  },
-}
-```
-
-The following options are available:
-
-| Option                       | Description                                                                                                                                                                                           |
-| ---------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`group`**                      | Text used as a label for grouping Collection and Global links together in the navigation.                                                                                                             |
-| **`hidden`**                     | Set to true or a function, called with the current user, returning true to exclude this Collection from navigation and admin routing.                                                                 |
-| **`hooks`**                      | Admin-specific hooks for this Collection. [More details](#admin-hooks).                                                                                                                                        |
-| **`useAsTitle`**                 | Specify a top-level field to use for a document title throughout the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview). If no field is defined, the ID of the document is used as the title.                                                |
-| **`description`**                | Text or React component to display below the Collection label in the List View to give editors more information.                                                                                      |
-| **`defaultColumns`**             | Array of field names that correspond to which columns to show by default in this Collection's List View.                                                                                              |
-| **`hideAPIURL`**                 | Hides the "API URL" meta field while editing documents within this Collection.                                                                                                                        |
-| **`enableRichTextLink`**         | The [Rich Text](../fields/rich-text) field features a `Link` element which allows for users to automatically reference related documents within their rich text. Set to `true` by default.         |
-| **`enableRichTextRelationship`** | The [Rich Text](../fields/rich-text) field features a `Relationship` element which allows for users to automatically reference related documents within their rich text. Set to `true` by default. |
-| **`meta`**                       | Metadata overrides to apply to the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview). Included properties are `description` and `openGraph`.                                                                           |
-| **`preview`**                    | Function to generate preview URLs within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) that can point to your app. [More details](#preview).                                                                                                |
-| **`livePreview`**                | Enable real-time editing for instant visual feedback of your front-end application. [More details](../live-preview/overview).                                                                              |
-| **`components`**                 | Swap in your own React components to be used within this Collection. [More details](../admin/components#collections).                                                                                       |
-| **`listSearchableFields`**       | Specify which fields should be searched in the List search view. [More details](#list-searchable-fields).                                                                                                      |
-| **`pagination`**             | Set pagination-specific options for this Collection. [More details](#pagination).                                                                                                                              |
-
-#### Preview
-
-It is possible to display a Preview Button in the Admin Panel within the Edit View. This will allow editors to visit the frontend of your app the corresponds to the document they are actively editing. This way they can preview the latest, potentially unpublished changes.
-
-To configure the Preview Button, set the `admin.preview` property to a function in your Collection Config:
-
-```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
-  // ...
+      required: true,
+    },
+  ],
   admin: {
-    // highlight-start
     preview: (doc, { locale }) => {
       if (doc?.slug) {
-        return `/${doc.slug}?locale=${locale}`
+        return `https://bigbird.com/preview/posts/${doc.slug}?locale=${locale}`
       }
 
       return null
     },
-    // highlight-end
   },
 }
 ```
 
-The preview function receives two arguments:
+## Pagination
 
-| Argument | Description |
-| --- | --- |
-| **`doc`** | The document being edited |
-| **`ctx`** | An object containing `locale` and `token` properties. The `token` is the currently logged-in user's JWT. |
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
-  For fully working example of this, check of the official [Draft Preview Example](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/draft-preview) in the [Examples Directory](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples).
-</Banner>
-
-#### Pagination
-
-All Collections receive their own List View which displays a paginated list of documents that can be sorted and filtered. The pagination behavior of the List View can be customized on a per-Collection basis.
-
-To configure pagination options, use the `admin.pagination` property in your Collection Config:
-
-```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
-  // ...
-  admin: {
-    // highlight-start
-    pagination: {
-      defaultLimit: 10,
-      limits: [10, 20, 50],
-    },
-    // highlight-end
-  },
-}
-```
-
-The following options are available:
+Here are a few options that you can specify options for pagination on a collection-by-collection basis:
 
 | Option         | Description                                                                                         |
 | -------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
 | `defaultLimit` | Integer that specifies the default per-page limit that should be used. Defaults to 10.              |
-| `limits`       | Provide an array of integers to use as per-page options for admins to choose from in the List View. |
+| `limits`       | Provide an array of integers to use as per-page options for admins to choose from in the List view. |
 
-#### List Searchable Fields
+## Access control
 
-In the List View, there is a "search" box that allows you to quickly find a document through a simple text search. By default, it searches on the ID field. If defined, the `admin.useAsTitle` field is used. Or, you can explicitly define which fields to search based on the needs of your application.
+You can specify extremely granular access control (what users can do with documents in a collection) on a collection by
+collection basis. To learn more, go to the [Access Control](/docs/access-control/overview) docs.
 
-To define which fields should be searched, use the `admin.listSearchableFields` property in your Collection Config:
+## Hooks
 
-```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+Hooks are a powerful way to extend collection functionality and execute your own logic, and can be defined on a
+collection by collection basis. To learn more, go to the [Hooks](/docs/hooks/overview) documentation.
 
-export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
-  // ...
-  admin: {
-    // highlight-start
-    listSearchableFields: ['title', 'slug'],
-    // highlight-end
-  },
-}
-```
+## Field types
+
+Collections support all field types that Payload has to offer—including simple fields like text and checkboxes all the
+way to more complicated layout-building field groups like Blocks. [Click here](/docs/fields/overview) to learn more
+about field types.
+
+## List Searchable Fields
+
+In the List view, there is a "search" box that allows you to quickly find a document with a search. By default, it
+searches on the ID field. If you have `admin.useAsTitle` defined, the list search will use that field. However, you can
+define more than one field to search to make it easier on your admin editors to find the data they need.
+
+For example, let's say you have a Posts collection with `title`, `metaDescription`, and `tags` fields - and you want all
+three of those fields to be searchable in the List view. You can simply
+add `admin.listSearchableFields: ['title', 'metaDescription', 'tags']` - and the admin UI will automatically search on
+those three fields plus the ID field.
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  If you are adding `listSearchableFields`, make sure you index each of these fields so your admin queries can remain performant.
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  <br />
+  If you are adding <strong>listSearchableFields</strong>, make sure you index each of these fields
+  so your admin queries can remain performant.
 </Banner>
 
 ## TypeScript
 
-You can import Collection types as follows:
+You can import collection types as follows:
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
-// This is the type used for incoming Collection configs.
+// This is the type used for incoming collection configs.
 // Only the bare minimum properties are marked as required.
 ```
 
 ```ts
-import { SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
-// This is the type used after an incoming Collection config is fully sanitized.
+// This is the type used after an incoming collection config is fully sanitized.
 // Generally, this is only used internally by Payload.
 ```

docs/configuration/environment-vars.mdx

@@ -1,101 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Environment Variables
-label: Environment Variables
-order: 100
-desc: Learn how to use Environment Variables in your Payload project
----
-
-Environment Variables are a way to store sensitive information that your application needs to function. This could be anything from API keys to [Database](../database/overview) credentials. Payload allows you to easily use Environment Variables within your config and throughout your application.
-
-## Next.js Applications
-
-If you are using Next.js, no additional setup is required other than creating your `.env` file.
-
-To use Environment Variables, add a `.env` file to the root of your project:
-
-```plaintext
-project-name/
-├─ .env
-├─ package.json
-├─ payload.config.ts
-```
-
-Here is an example of what an `.env` file might look like:
-
-```plaintext
-SERVER_URL=localhost:3000
-DATABASE_URI=mongodb://localhost:27017/my-database
-```
-
-To use Environment Variables in your Payload Config, you can access them directly from `process.env`:
-
-```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export default buildConfig({
-  serverURL: process.env.SERVER_URL, // highlight-line
-  // ...
-})
-```
-
-## Client-side Environments
-
-For security and safety reasons, the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) does **not** include Environment Variables in its _client-side_ bundle by default. But, Next.js provides a mechanism to expose Environment Variables to the client-side bundle when needed.
-
-If you are building a [Custom Component](../admin/components) and need to access Environment Variables from the client-side, you can do so by prefixing them with `NEXT_PUBLIC_`.
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Important:</strong>
-  Be careful about what variables you provide to your client-side code. Analyze every single one to make sure that you're not accidentally leaking sensitive information. Only ever include keys that are safe for the public to read in plain text.
-</Banner>
-
-For example, if you've got the following Environment Variable:
-
-```bash
-NEXT_PUBLIC_STRIPE_PUBLISHABLE_KEY=pk_test_XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
-```
-
-This key will automatically be made available to the client-side Payload bundle and can be referenced in your Custom Component as follows:
-
-```tsx
-'use client'
-import React from 'react'
-
-const stripeKey = process.env.NEXT_PUBLIC_STRIPE_PUBLISHABLE_KEY // highlight-line
-
-const MyClientComponent = () => {
-  // do something with the key
-
-  return (
-    <div>
-      My Client Component
-    </div>
-  )
-}
-```
-
-For more information, check out the [Next.js Documentation](https://nextjs.org/docs/app/building-your-application/configuring/environment-variables).
-
-## Outside of Next.js
-
-If you are using Payload outside of Next.js, we suggest using the [`dotenv`](https://www.npmjs.com/package/dotenv) package to handle Environment Variables from `.env` files. This will automatically load your Environment Variables into `process.env`.
-
-To do this, import the package as high up in your application as possible:
-
-```ts
-import dotenv from 'dotenv'
-dotenv.config() // highlight-line
-
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export default buildConfig({
-  serverURL: process.env.SERVER_URL,
-  // ...
-})
-```
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  Be sure that `dotenv` can find your `.env` file. By default, it will look for a file named `.env` in the root of your project. If you need to specify a different file, pass the path into the config options.
-</Banner>
-

docs/configuration/express.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+---
+title: Express
+label: Express
+order: 60
+desc: Payload utilizes Express middleware packages, you can customize how they work by passing in configuration options.
+keywords: config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+---
+
+Payload utilizes a few Express-specific middleware packages within its own routers. You can customize how they work by passing in configuration options to the main Payload config's `express` property.
+
+## Custom Middleware
+
+Payload allows you to pass in custom Express middleware to be used on all of the routes it opens. This is useful for adding logging or any other custom functionality to your endpoints.
+
+There are 2 exposed properties. Each property is an array of middleware functions.
+
+- `preMiddleware` - runs before any of the Payload middleware
+- `postMiddleware` - runs after all of the Payload middleware
+
+```ts
+{
+  express: {
+    preMiddleware: [
+      (req, res, next) => {
+        // do something
+        next()
+      }
+    ],
+    postMiddleware: [
+      (req, res, next) => {
+        // do something
+        next()
+      }
+    ]
+  }
+}
+
+// Example logging middleware function
+const requestLoggerMiddleware = (req, res, next) => {
+  req.payload.logger.info(`request: ${req.method} ${req.url}`)
+  next()
+}
+```
+
+## JSON
+
+`express.json()` is used to parse JSON body content into JavaScript objects accessible on the Express `req`. Payload allows you to customize all of the `json` method's options. Common examples of customization use-cases are increasing the max allowed JSON body size which defaults to `2MB`.
+
+**Example payload.config.js for how to increase the max JSON size allowed to be sent to Payload endpoints:**
+
+```js
+{
+	express: {
+		json: {
+			limit: '4mb',
+		}
+	}
+}
+```
+
+You can find a list of all available options that are able to be passed to `express.json()` [here](https://expressjs.com/en/api.html).
+
+## Compression
+
+Payload uses the `compression` package to optimize transfer size for all of the routes it opens, and you can pass customization options through the Payload config.
+
+To customize compression options, pass an object to the Payload config's `express` property.
+
+**Example payload.config.js:**
+
+```js
+{
+  express: {
+    compression: {
+      // settings go here
+    }
+  }
+}
+```
+
+Typically, the default options for this package are suitable. However, for a list of all available customization options, [click here](http://expressjs.com/en/resources/middleware/compression.html).

docs/configuration/globals.mdx

@@ -3,41 +3,39 @@ title: Global Configs
 label: Globals
 order: 30
 desc: Set up your Global config for your needs by defining fields, adding slugs and labels, establishing access control, tying in hooks and more.
-keywords: globals, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: globals, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
-Globals are in many ways similar to [Collections](../configuration/collections), except they correspond to only a single Document. You can define as many Globals as your application needs. Each Global saves to the [Database](../database/overview) based on the [Fields](../fields/overview) that you define, and automatically generates the [Local API](../local-api/overview), [REST API](../rest-api/overview), and [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview) to manage your Documents.
+Global configs are in many ways similar to [Collections](/docs/configuration/collections). The big difference is that Collections will potentially contain _many_ documents, while a Global is a "one-off". Globals are perfect for things like header nav, site-wide banner alerts, app-wide localized strings, and other "global" data that your site or app might rely on.
 
-Globals are the primary way to structure singletons in Payload, such as a header navigation, site-wide banner alerts, or app-wide localized strings. Each Global can have its own unique [Access Control](../access-control/overview), [Hooks](../hooks/overview), [Admin Options](#admin-options), and more.
+As with Collection configs, it's often best practice to write your Globals in separate files and then import them into the main Payload config.
 
-To define a Global Config, use the `globals` property in your [Payload Config](./overview):
+## Options
+
+| Option             | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
+| ------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`slug`** \*      | Unique, URL-friendly string that will act as an identifier for this Global.                                                                                                                                          |
+| **`fields`** \*    | Array of field types that will determine the structure and functionality of the data stored within this Global. [Click here](/docs/fields/overview) for a full list of field types as well as how to configure them. |
+| **`label`**        | Text for the name in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                                              |
+| **`description`**  | Text or React component to display below the Global header to give editors more information.                                                                                                                         |
+| **`admin`**        | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](/docs/configuration/globals#admin-options).                                                                                                                |
+| **`hooks`**        | Entry points to "tie in" to collection actions at specific points. [More](/docs/hooks/overview#global-hooks)                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**       | Provide access control functions to define exactly who should be able to do what with this Global. [More](/docs/access-control/overview/#globals)                                                                    |
+| **`versions`**     | Set to true to enable default options, or configure with object properties. [More](/docs/versions/overview#globals-config)                                                                                           |
+| **`endpoints`**    | Add custom routes to the REST API. [More](/docs/rest-api/overview#custom-endpoints)                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`graphQL.name`** | Text used in schema generation. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                                                                                             |
+| **`typescript`**   | An object with property `interface` as the text used in schema generation. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                                                  |
+| **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                                            |
+| **`dbName`**       | Custom table or collection name for this global depending on the database adapter. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.
+
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
+
+### Simple Global example
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
-export default buildConfig({
-  // ...
-  globals: [ // highlight-line
-    // Your Globals go here
-  ],
-})
-```
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  If you have more than one Global that share the same structure, consider using a [Collection](../configuration/collections) instead.
-</Banner>
-
-## Config Options
-
-It's often best practice to write your Globals in separate files and then import them into the main [Payload Config](./overview).
-
-Here is what a simple Global Config might look like:
-
-```ts
-import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const Nav: GlobalConfig = {
+const Nav: GlobalConfig = {
   slug: 'nav',
   fields: [
     {
@@ -56,125 +54,91 @@ export const Nav: GlobalConfig = {
     },
   ],
 }
+
+export default Nav
 ```
 
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
-  For a more complex example, see the [Public Demo](https://github.com/payloadcms/public-demo) source code on GitHub, or the [Templates](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/templates) and [Examples](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples) directories in the Payload repository.
-</Banner>
+### Global config example
 
-The following options are available:
+You can find a few [example Global configs](https://github.com/payloadcms/public-demo/tree/master/src/payload/globals) in the Public Demo source code on GitHub.
 
-| Option             | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
-| ------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`access`**       | Provide Access Control functions to define exactly who should be able to do what with this Global. [More details](../access-control/globals).                                                                    |
-| **`admin`**        | The configuration options for the Admin Panel. [More details](#admin-options).                                                                           |
-| **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                                            |
-| **`dbName`**       | Custom table or collection name for this Global depending on the Database Adapter. Auto-generated from slug if not defined. |
-| **`description`**  | Text or React component to display below the Global header to give editors more information.                                                                                                                         |
-| **`endpoints`**    | Add custom routes to the REST API. [More details](../rest-api/overview#custom-endpoints).                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`fields`** \*    | Array of field types that will determine the structure and functionality of the data stored within this Global. [Click here](../fields/overview) for a full list of field types as well as how to configure them. |
-| **`graphQL.name`** | Text used in schema generation. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                                                                          |
-| **`hooks`**        | Entry point for Hooks. [More details](../hooks/overview#global-hooks).  |
-| **`label`**        | Text for the name in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                                                                                                                                      |
-| **`slug`** \*      | Unique, URL-friendly string that will act as an identifier for this Global.                                                                                                                                          |
-| **`typescript`**   | An object with property `interface` as the text used in schema generation. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.    |
-| **`versions`**     | Set to true to enable default options, or configure with object properties. [More details](../versions/overview#globals-config).                                                                                           |
+## Admin options
 
-_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
-
-### Fields
-
-Fields define the schema of the Global. To learn more, go to the [Fields](../fields/overview) documentation.
-
-### Access Control
-
-[Global Access Control](../access-control/globals) determines what a user can and cannot do with any given Global Document. To learn more, go to the [Access Control](../access-control/overview) documentation.
-
-### Hooks
-
-[Global Hooks](../hooks/globals) allow you to tie into the lifecycle of your Documents so you can execute your own logic during specific events. To learn more, go to the [Hooks](../hooks/overview) documentation.
-
-### Admin Options
-
-You can customize the way that the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) behaves on a Global-by-Global basis.
-
-To configure Admin Options for Globals, use the `admin` property in your Global Config:
-
-```ts
-import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
-
-const MyGlobal: GlobalConfig = {
-  // ...
-  admin: { // highlight-line
-    // ...
-  },
-}
-```
-
-The following options are available:
+You can customize the way that the Admin panel behaves on a Global-by-Global basis by defining the `admin` property on a Global's config.
 
 | Option        | Description                                                                                                                       |
 | ------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`group`**       | Text used as a label for grouping Collection and Global links together in the navigation.                                         |
-| **`hidden`**      | Set to true or a function, called with the current user, returning true to exclude this Global from navigation and admin routing. |
-| **`components`**  | Swap in your own React components to be used within this Global. [More details](../admin/components#globals).                           |
-| **`preview`**     | Function to generate a preview URL within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) for this Global that can point to your app. [More details](#preview).           |
-| **`livePreview`** | Enable real-time editing for instant visual feedback of your front-end application. [More details](../live-preview/overview).          |
-| **`hideAPIURL`**  | Hides the "API URL" meta field while editing documents within this collection.                                                    |
-| **`meta`**        | Metadata overrides to apply to the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview). Included properties are `description` and `openGraph`.       |
+| `group`       | Text used as a label for grouping collection and global links together in the navigation.                                         |
+| `hidden`      | Set to true or a function, called with the current user, returning true to exclude this global from navigation and admin routing. |
+| `components`  | Swap in your own React components to be used within this Global. [More](/docs/admin/components#globals)                           |
+| `preview`     | Function to generate a preview URL within the Admin panel for this global that can point to your app. [More](#preview).           |
+| `livePreview` | Enable real-time editing for instant visual feedback of your front-end application. [More](/docs/live-preview/overview).          |
+| `hideAPIURL`  | Hides the "API URL" meta field while editing documents within this collection.                                                    |
+| `meta`        | Metadata overrides to apply to the [Admin panel](../admin/overview). Included properties are `description` and `openGraph`.       |
 
-#### Preview
+## Preview
 
-It is possible to display a Preview Button in the Admin Panel within the Edit View. This will allow editors to visit the frontend of your app the corresponds to the document they are actively editing. This way they can preview the latest, potentially unpublished changes.
+Global `admin` options can accept a `preview` function that will be used to generate a link pointing to the frontend of your app to preview data.
 
-To configure the Preview Button, set the `admin.preview` property to a function in your Global Config:
+If the function is specified, a Preview button will automatically appear in the corresponding global's Edit view. Clicking the Preview button will link to the URL that is generated by the function.
+
+**The preview function accepts two arguments:**
+
+1. The document being edited
+1. An `options` object, containing `locale` and `token` properties. The `token` is the currently logged-in user's JWT.
+
+**Example global with preview function:**
 
 ```ts
-import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
+import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
-export const MainMenu: GlobalConfig = {
-  // ...
+export const MyGlobal: GlobalConfig = {
+  slug: 'my-global',
+  fields: [
+    {
+      name: 'slug',
+      type: 'text',
+      required: true,
+    },
+  ],
   admin: {
-    // highlight-start
     preview: (doc, { locale }) => {
       if (doc?.slug) {
-        return `/${doc.slug}?locale=${locale}`
+        return `https://bigbird.com/preview/${doc.slug}?locale=${locale}`
       }
 
       return null
     },
-    // highlight-end
   },
 }
 ```
 
-The preview function receives two arguments:
+## Access control
 
-| Argument | Description |
-| --- | --- |
-| **`doc`** | The document being edited |
-| **`ctx`** | An object containing `locale` and `token` properties. The `token` is the currently logged-in user's JWT. |
+As with Collections, you can specify extremely granular access control (what users can do with this Global) on a Global-by-Global basis. However, Globals only have `update` and `read` access control due to their nature of only having one document. To learn more, go to the [Access Control](/docs/access-control/overview) docs.
 
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
-  For fully working example of this, check of the official [Draft Preview Example](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/draft-preview) in the [Examples Directory](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples).
-</Banner>
+## Hooks
+
+Globals also fully support a smaller subset of Hooks. To learn more, go to the [Hooks](/docs/hooks/overview) documentation.
+
+## Field types
+
+Globals support all field types that Payload has to offer—including simple fields like text and checkboxes all the way to more complicated layout-building field groups like Blocks. [Click here](/docs/fields/overview) to learn more about field types.
 
 ## TypeScript
 
-You can import Global types as follows:
+You can import global types as follows:
 
 ```ts
-import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
+import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
-// This is the type used for incoming Global configs.
+// This is the type used for incoming global configs.
 // Only the bare minimum properties are marked as required.
 ```
 
 ```ts
-import { SanitizedGlobalConfig } from 'payload'
+import { SanitizedGlobalConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
-// This is the type used after an incoming Global config is fully sanitized.
+// This is the type used after an incoming global config is fully sanitized.
 // Generally, this is only used internally by Payload.
 ```

docs/configuration/i18n.mdx

@@ -3,97 +3,90 @@ title: I18n
 label: I18n
 order: 40
 desc: Manage and customize internationalization support in your CMS editor experience
-keywords: internationalization, i18n, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: internationalization, i18n, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
-The [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) is translated in over [30 languages and counting](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/beta/packages/translations). With I18n, editors can navigate the interface and read API error messages in their preferred language. This is similar to [Localization](./localization), but instead of managing translations for the data itself, you are managing translations for your application's interface.
+Not only does Payload support managing localized content, it also has internationalization support so that admin users can work in their preferred language. It comes included by default and can be extended in your config.
 
-By default, Payload comes with preinstalled with English, but you can easily load other languages into your own application. Languages are automatically detected based on the request. If no language was detected, or if the user's language is not yet supported by your application, English will be chosen.
+While Payload's built-in features come translated, you may want to also translate parts of your project's configuration too. This is possible in places like collections and globals labels and groups, field labels, descriptions and input placeholder text. The admin UI will display all the correct translations you provide based on the user's language.
 
-To configure I18n, use the `i18n` key in your [Payload Config](./overview):
+Here is an example of a simple collection supporting both English and Spanish editors:
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
-export default buildConfig({
-  // ...
-  i18n: { // highlight-line
-    // ...
+export const Articles: CollectionConfig = {
+  slug: 'articles',
+  labels: {
+    singular: {
+      en: 'Article',
+      es: 'Artículo',
+    },
+    plural: {
+      en: 'Articles',
+      es: 'Artículos',
+    },
   },
-})
+  admin: {
+    group: { en: 'Content', es: 'Contenido' },
+  },
+  fields: [
+    {
+      name: 'title',
+      type: 'text',
+      label: {
+        en: 'Title',
+        es: 'Título',
+      },
+      admin: {
+        placeholder: { en: 'Enter title', es: 'Introduce el título' },
+      },
+    },
+    {
+      name: 'type',
+      type: 'radio',
+      options: [
+        {
+          value: 'news',
+          label: { en: 'News', es: 'Noticias' },
+        }, // etc...
+      ],
+    },
+  ],
+}
 ```
 
-<Banner type="success">
+## Admin UI
+
+The Payload admin panel reads the language settings of a user's browser and display all text in that language, or will fall back to English if the user's language is not yet supported.
+After a user logs in, they can change their language selection in the `/account` view.
+
+<Banner>
   <strong>Note:</strong>
-  If there is a language that Payload does not yet support, we accept [code contributions](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/main/CONTRIBUTING.md).
+  <br />
+  If there is a language that Payload does not yet support, we accept code
+  [contributions](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/main/CONTRIBUTING.md).
 </Banner>
 
-## Config Options
+## Node Express
 
-You can easily customize and override any of the i18n settings that Payload provides by default. Payload will use your custom options and merge them in with its own.
+Payload's backend uses express middleware to set the language on incoming requests before they are handled. This allows backend validation to return error messages in the user's own language or system generated emails to be sent using the correct translation. You can make HTTP requests with the `accept-language` header and Payload will use that language.
+
+Anywhere in your Payload app that you have access to the `req` object, you can access payload's extensive internationalization features assigned to `req.i18n`. To access text translations you can use `req.t('namespace:key')`.
+
+## Configuration Options
+
+In your Payload config, you can add translations and customize the settings in `i18n`. Payload will use your custom options and merge it with the default, allowing you to override the settings Payload provides.
+
+**Example Payload config extending i18n:**
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export default buildConfig({
-  // ...
-  // highlight-start
-  i18n: {
-    fallbackLanguage: 'en', // default
-    debug: false, // default
-  }
-  // highlight-end
-})
-```
-
-The following options are available:
-
-| Option                | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
-| --------------------- | --------------------------------|
-| **`fallbackLanguage`**     | The language to fall back to if the user's preferred language is not supported. Default is `'en'`.                                                                                                                           |
-| **`debug`**           | Whether to log debug information to the console. Default is `false`.                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`translations`**    | An object containing the translations. The keys are the language codes and the values are the translations.                                                                                                                |
-| **`supportedLanguages`** | An object containing the supported languages. The keys are the language codes and the values are the translations.                                                                                                         |
-
-## Adding Languages
-
-You can easily add new languages to your Payload app by providing the translations for the new language. Payload maintains a number of built-in translations that can be imported from `@payloadcms/translations`, but you can also provide your own [Custom Translations](#custom-translations) to support any language.
-
-To add a new language, use the `i18n.supportedLanguages` key in your [Payload Config](./overview):
-
-```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
-import { en } from '@payloadcms/translations/languages/en'
-import { de } from '@payloadcms/translations/languages/de'
-
-export default buildConfig({
-  // ...
-  // highlight-start
-  i18n: {
-    supportedLanguages: { en, de },
-  },
-  // highlight-end
-})
-```
-
-<Banner type="warning">
- <strong>Tip:</strong>
- It's best to only support the languages that you need so that the bundled JavaScript is kept to a minimum for your project.
-</Banner>
-
-### Custom Translations
-
-You can customize Payload's built-in translations either by extending existing languages or by adding new languages entirely. This can be done by injecting new translation strings into existing languages, or by providing an entirely new language keys altogether.
-
-To add Custom Translations, use the `i18n.translations` key in your [Payload Config](./overview):
-
-```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
 
 export default buildConfig({
   //...
   i18n: {
-    // highlight-start
+    fallbackLanguage: 'en', // default
     translations: {
       en: {
         custom: {
@@ -106,79 +99,14 @@ export default buildConfig({
         },
       },
     },
-    // highlight-end
   },
   //...
 })
 ```
 
-### Project Translations
+## Types for custom translations
 
-While Payload's built-in features come fully translated, you may also want to translate parts of your own project. This is possible in places like [Collections](./collections) and [Globals](./globals), such as on their labels and groups, field labels, descriptions or input placeholder text.
-
-To do this, provide the translations wherever applicable, keyed to the language code:
-
-```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const Articles: CollectionConfig = {
-  slug: 'articles',
-  labels: {
-    singular: {
-      // highlight-start
-      en: 'Article',
-      es: 'Artículo',
-      // highlight-end
-    },
-    plural: {
-      // highlight-start
-      en: 'Articles',
-      es: 'Artículos',
-      // highlight-end
-    },
-  },
-  admin: {
-    group: {
-      // highlight-start
-      en: 'Content',
-      es: 'Contenido',
-      // highlight-end
-    },
-  },
-  fields: [
-    {
-      name: 'title',
-      type: 'text',
-      label: {
-        // highlight-start
-        en: 'Title',
-        es: 'Título',
-        // highlight-end
-      },
-      admin: {
-        placeholder: {
-          // highlight-start
-          en: 'Enter title',
-          es: 'Introduce el título'
-          // highlight-end
-        },
-      },
-    },
-  ],
-}
-```
-
-## Node
-
-Payload's backend sets the language on incoming requests before they are handled. This allows backend validation to return error messages in the user's own language or system generated emails to be sent using the correct translation. You can make HTTP requests with the `accept-language` header and Payload will use that language.
-
-Anywhere in your Payload app that you have access to the `req` object, you can access Payload's extensive internationalization features assigned to `req.i18n`. To access text translations you can use `req.t('namespace:key')`.
-
-## TypeScript
-
-In order to use custom translations in your project, you need to provide the types for the translations.
-
-Here is an example of how you can define the types for the custom translations in a [Custom Component](../admin/components):
+In order to use custom translations in your project, you need to provide the types for the translations. Here is an example of how you can define the types for the custom translations in a custom react component:
 
 ```ts
 'use client'
@@ -206,7 +134,7 @@ export const MyComponent: React.FC = () => {
 
 ```
 
-Additionally, Payload exposes the `t` function in various places, for example in labels. Here is how you would type those:
+Additionally, payload exposes the `t` function in various places, for example in labels. Here is how you would type those:
 
 ```ts
 import type {
@@ -214,7 +142,7 @@ import type {
   NestedKeysStripped,
   TFunction,
 } from '@payloadcms/translations'
-import type { Field } from 'payload'
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
 
 const customTranslations = {
   en: {

docs/configuration/localization.mdx

@@ -2,48 +2,39 @@
 title: Localization
 label: Localization
 order: 50
-desc: Add and maintain as many locales as you need by adding Localization to your Payload Config, set options for default locale, fallbacks, fields and more.
-keywords: localization, internationalization, i18n, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+desc: Add and maintain as many locales as you need by adding Localization to your Payload config, set options for default locale, fallbacks, fields and more.
+keywords: localization, internationalization, i18n, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
-Localization is one of the most important features of a modern CMS. It allows you to manage content in multiple languages, then serve it to your users based on their requested language. This is similar to [I18n](./i18n), but instead of managing translations for your application's interface, you are managing translations for the data itself.
+Payload features deep field-based localization support. Maintaining as many locales as you need is easy. All
+localization support is opt-in by default. To do so, follow the two steps below.
 
-With Localization, you can begin to serve personalized content to your users based on their specific language preferences, such as a multilingual website or multi-site application. There are no limits to the number of locales you can add to your Payload project.
+## Enabling in the Payload config
 
-To configure Localization, use the `localization` key in your [Payload Config](./overview):
+Add the `localization` property to your Payload config to enable localization project-wide. You'll need to provide a
+list of all locales that you'd like to support as well as set a few other options.
+
+**Example Payload config set up for localization:**
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
 
 export default buildConfig({
-  // ...
-  localization: { // highlight-line
-    // ...
-  },
-})
-```
-
-## Config Options
-
-Add the `localization` property to your Payload Config to enable Localization project-wide. You'll need to provide a list of all locales that you'd like to support as well as set a few other options.
-
-To configure locales, use the `localization.locales` property in your [Payload Config](./overview):
-
-```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export default buildConfig({
-  // ...
+  collections: [
+    // collections go here
+  ],
   localization: {
-    locales: ['en', 'es', 'de'] // highlight-line
+    locales: ['en', 'es', 'de'],
+    defaultLocale: 'en',
+    fallback: true,
   },
 })
 ```
 
-You can also define locales using [full configuration objects](#locale-object):
+**Example Payload config set up for localization with full locales objects:**
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
 
 export default buildConfig({
   collections: [
@@ -69,26 +60,50 @@ export default buildConfig({
 })
 ```
 
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  Localization works very well alongside [I18n](/docs/configuration/i18n).
-</Banner>
+**Example Payload config set up for localization with full locales objects (
+including [internationalization](/docs/configuration/i18n) support):**
 
-The following options are available:
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
 
-| Option         | Description                                                                                                                    |
-| -------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
-| **`locales`**  | Array of all the languages that you would like to support. [More details](#locales)                                            |
-| **`defaultLocale`** | Required string that matches one of the locale codes from the array provided. By default, if no locale is specified, documents will be returned in this locale. |
-| **`fallback`** | Boolean enabling "fallback" locale functionality. If a document is requested in a locale, but a field does not have a localized value corresponding to the requested locale, then if this property is enabled, the document will automatically fall back to the fallback locale value. If this property is not enabled, the value will not be populated. |
+export default buildConfig({
+  collections: [
+    // collections go here
+  ],
+  localization: {
+    locales: [
+      {
+        label: {
+          en: 'English', // English label
+          nb: 'Engelsk', // Norwegian label
+        },
+        code: 'en',
+      },
+      {
+        label: {
+          en: 'Norwegian', // English label
+          nb: 'Norsk', // Norwegian label
+        },
+        code: 'nb',
+      },
+    ],
+    defaultLocale: 'en',
+    fallback: true,
+  },
+})
+```
 
-### Locales
+**Here is a brief explanation of each of the options available within the `localization` property:**
 
-The locales array is a list of all the languages that you would like to support. This can be strings for each language code, or [full configuration objects](#locale-object) for more advanced options.
+**`locales`**
 
-The locale codes do not need to be in any specific format. It's up to you to define how to represent your locales. Common patterns are to use two-letter ISO 639 language codes or four-letter language and country codes (ISO 3166‑1) such as `en-US`, `en-UK`, `es-MX`, etc.
+Array-based list of all the languages that you would like to support. This can be an array containing strings for each
+language code you want your project to store and serve or objects with a `label`, a locale `code`, `rtl` (
+right-to-left), and `fallbackLocale` property. The locale codes do not need to be in any specific format. It's up to you
+to define how to represent your locales. Common patterns are to use two-letter ISO 639 language codes or four-letter
+language and country codes (ISO 3166‑1) such as `en-US`, `en-UK`, `es-MX`, etc.
 
-#### Locale Object
+## Locale Object Properties
 
 | Option               | Description                                                                                                                    |
 | -------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
@@ -99,11 +114,23 @@ The locale codes do not need to be in any specific format. It's up to you to def
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-## Field Localization
+**`defaultLocale`**
 
-Payload Localization works on a **field** level—not a document level. In addition to configuring the base Payload Config to support Localization, you need to specify each field that you would like to localize.
+Required string that matches one of the locale codes from the array provided. By default, if no locale is specified,
+documents will be returned in this locale.
 
-**Here is an example of how to enable Localization for a field:**
+**`fallback`**
+
+Boolean enabling "fallback" locale functionality. If a document is requested in a locale, but a field does not have a
+localized value corresponding to the requested locale, then if this property is enabled, the document will automatically
+fall back to the fallback locale value. If this property is not enabled, the value will not be populated.
+
+## Field by field localization
+
+Payload localization works on a **field** level—not a document level. In addition to configuring the base Payload config
+to support localization, you need to specify each field that you would like to localize.
+
+**Here is an example of how to enable localization for a field:**
 
 ```js
 {
@@ -115,27 +142,31 @@ Payload Localization works on a **field** level—not a document level. In addit
 }
 ```
 
-With the above configuration, the `title` field will now be saved in the database as an object of all locales instead of a single string.
+With the above configuration, the `title` field will now be saved in the database as an object of all locales instead of
+a single string.
 
-All field types with a `name` property support the `localized` property—even the more complex field types like `array`s and `block`s.
+All field types with a `name` property support the `localized` property—even the more complex field types like `array`s
+and `block`s.
 
-<Banner type="info">
+<Banner>
   <strong>Note:</strong>
-  Enabling Localization for field types that support nested fields will automatically create
+  <br />
+  Enabling localization for field types that support nested fields will automatically create
   localized "sets" of all fields contained within the field. For example, if you have a page layout
   using a blocks field type, you have the choice of either localizing the full layout, by enabling
-  Localization on the top-level blocks field, or only certain fields within the layout.
+  localization on the top-level blocks field, or only certain fields within the layout.
 </Banner>
 
 <Banner type="warning">
   <strong>Important:</strong>
+  <br />
   When converting an existing field to or from `localized: true` the data structure in the document
   will change for this field and so existing data for this field will be lost. Before changing the
-  Localization setting on fields with existing data, you may need to consider a field migration
+  localization setting on fields with existing data, you may need to consider a field migration
   strategy.
 </Banner>
 
-## Retrieving Localized Docs
+## Retrieving localized docs
 
 When retrieving documents, you can specify which locale you'd like to receive as well as which fallback locale should be
 used.
@@ -151,7 +182,7 @@ Specify your desired locale by providing the `locale` query parameter directly i
 **`?fallback-locale=`**
 
 Specify fallback locale to be used by providing the `fallback-locale` query parameter. This can be provided as either a
-valid locale as provided to your base Payload Config, or `'null'`, `'false'`, or `'none'` to disable falling back.
+valid locale as provided to your base Payload config, or `'null'`, `'false'`, or `'none'` to disable falling back.
 
 **Example:**
 
@@ -203,9 +234,10 @@ const posts = await payload.find({
 })
 ```
 
-<Banner type="success">
+<Banner type="alert">
   <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  The REST and Local APIs can return all Localization data in one request by passing 'all' or '*' as
+  <br />
+  The REST and Local APIs can return all localization data in one request by passing 'all' or '*' as
   the <strong>locale</strong> parameter. The response will be structured so that field values come
   back as the full objects keyed for each locale instead of the single, translated value.
 </Banner>

docs/configuration/overview.mdx

@@ -2,155 +2,149 @@
 title: The Payload Config
 label: Overview
 order: 10
-desc: The Payload Config is central to everything that Payload does, from adding custom React components, to modifying collections, controlling localization and much more.
-keywords: overview, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+desc: The Payload config is central to everything that Payload does, from adding custom React components, to modifying collections, controlling localization and much more.
+keywords: overview, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
-Payload is a _config-based_, code-first CMS and application framework. The Payload Config is central to everything that Payload does, allowing for deep configuration of your application through a simple and intuitive API. The Payload Config is a fully-typed JavaScript object that can be infinitely extended upon.
+Payload is a _config-based_, code-first CMS and application framework. The Payload config is central to everything that Payload does. It scaffolds the data that Payload stores as well as maintains custom React components, hook logic, custom validations, and much more.
 
-Everything from your [Database](../database/overview) choice, to the appearance of the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), is fully controlled through the Payload Config. From here you can define [Fields](../fields/overview), add [Localization](./localization), enable [Authentication](../authentication/overview), configure [Access Control](../access-control/overview), and so much more.
+**Also, because the Payload source code is fully written in TypeScript, its configs are strongly typed—meaning that even if you aren't using TypeScript, your IDE (such as VSCode) may still provide helpful information like type-ahead suggestions while you write your config.**
 
-The Payload Config is a `payload.config.ts` file typically located in the root of your project:
-
-```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export default buildConfig({
-  // Your config goes here
-})
-```
-
-The Payload Config is strongly typed and ties directly into Payload's TypeScript codebase. This means your IDE (such as VSCode) will provide helpful information like type-ahead suggestions while you write your config.
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  The location of your Payload Config can be customized. [More details](#customizing--automating-config-location-detection).
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
+  <br />
+  This file is included in the Payload admin bundle, so make sure you do not embed any sensitive
+  information.
 </Banner>
 
-## Config Options
+## Options
 
-To author your Payload Config, first determine which [Database](../database/overview) you'd like to use, then use [Collections](./collections) or [Globals](./globals) to define the schema of your data.
+| Option                | Description                                                                                                                                                                        |
+| --------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| `admin` \*            | Base Payload admin configuration. Specify bundler\*, custom components, control metadata, set the Admin user collection, and [more](/docs/admin/overview#admin-options). Required. |
+| `editor` \*           | Rich Text Editor which will be used by richText fields. Required.                                                                                                                  |
+| `db` \*               | Database Adapter which will be used by Payload. Read more [here](/docs/database/overview). Required.                                                                               |
+| `serverURL`           | A string used to define the absolute URL of your app including the protocol, for example `https://example.com`. No paths allowed, only protocol, domain and (optionally) port      |
+| `collections`         | An array of all Collections that Payload will manage. To read more about how to define your collection configs, [click here](/docs/configuration/collections).                     |
+| `globals`             | An array of all Globals that Payload will manage. For more on Globals and their configs, [click here](/docs/configuration/globals).                                                |
+| `cors`                | Either a whitelist array of URLS to allow CORS requests from, or a wildcard string (`'*'`) to accept incoming requests from any domain.                                            |
+| `localization`        | Opt-in and control how Payload handles the translation of your content into multiple locales. [More](/docs/configuration/localization)                                             |
+| `graphQL`             | Manage GraphQL-specific functionality here. Define your own queries and mutations, manage query complexity limits, and [more](/docs/graphql/overview#graphql-options).             |
+| `cookiePrefix`        | A string that will be prefixed to all cookies that Payload sets.                                                                                                                   |
+| `csrf`                | A whitelist array of URLs to allow Payload cookies to be accepted from as a form of CSRF protection. [More](/docs/authentication/overview#csrf-protection)                         |
+| `defaultDepth`        | If a user does not specify `depth` while requesting a resource, this depth will be used. [More](/docs/getting-started/concepts#depth)                                              |
+| `maxDepth`            | The maximum allowed depth to be permitted application-wide. This setting helps prevent against malicious queries. Defaults to `10`.                                                |
+| `indexSortableFields` | Automatically index all sortable top-level fields in the database to improve sort performance and add database compatibility for Azure Cosmos and similar.                         |
+| `upload`              | Base Payload upload configuration. [More](/docs/upload/overview#payload-wide-upload-options).                                                                                      |
+| `routes`              | Control the routing structure that Payload binds itself to. Specify `admin`, `api`, `graphQL`, and `graphQLPlayground`.                                                            |
+| `email`               | Base email settings to allow Payload to generate email such as Forgot Password requests and other requirements. [More](/docs/email/overview#configuration)                         |
+| `express`             | Express-specific middleware options such as compression and JSON parsing. [More](/docs/configuration/express)                                                                      |
+| `debug`               | Enable to expose more detailed error information.                                                                                                                                  |
+| `telemetry`           | Disable Payload telemetry by passing `false`. [More](/docs/configuration/overview#telemetry)                                                                                       |
+| `rateLimit`           | Control IP-based rate limiting for all Payload resources. Used to prevent DDoS attacks and [more](/docs/production/preventing-abuse#rate-limiting-requests).                       |
+| `hooks`               | Tap into Payload-wide hooks. [More](/docs/hooks/overview)                                                                                                                          |
+| `plugins`             | An array of Payload plugins. [More](/docs/plugins/overview)                                                                                                                        |
+| `endpoints`           | An array of custom API endpoints added to the Payload router. [More](/docs/rest-api/overview#custom-endpoints)                                                                     |
+| `custom`              | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                          |
 
-Here is one of the simplest possible Payload configs:
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
+
+### Simple example
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
 import { mongooseAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-mongodb'
-// import { postgresAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-postgres'
+import { postgresAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-postgres' // beta
+
+import { viteBundler } from '@payloadcms/bundler-vite'
+import { webpackBundler } from '@payloadcms/bundler-webpack'
+
+import { lexicalEditor } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical' // beta
+import { slateEditor } from '@payloadcms/richtext-slate'
 
 export default buildConfig({
-  secret: process.env.PAYLOAD_SECRET,
-  db: mongooseAdapter({
-    url: process.env.DATABASE_URI,
-  }),
+  admin: {
+    bundler: webpackBundler(), // or viteBundler()
+  },
+  db: mongooseAdapter({}) // or postgresAdapter({}),
+  editor: lexicalEditor({}) // or slateEditor({})
   collections: [
     {
       slug: 'pages',
       fields: [
         {
           name: 'title',
-          type: 'text'
-        }
-      ]
-    }
+          type: 'text',
+          required: true,
+        },
+        {
+          name: 'content',
+          type: 'richText',
+          required: true,
+        },
+      ],
+    },
+  ],
+  globals: [
+    {
+      slug: 'header',
+      fields: [
+        {
+          name: 'nav',
+          type: 'array',
+          fields: [
+            {
+              name: 'page',
+              type: 'relationship',
+              relationTo: 'pages',
+            },
+          ],
+        },
+      ],
+    },
   ],
 })
 ```
 
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
-  For a more complex example, see the [Public Demo](https://github.com/payloadcms/public-demo) source code on GitHub, or the [Templates](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/templates) and [Examples](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples) directories in the Payload repository.
-</Banner>
+### Full example config
 
-The following options are available:
+You can see a full [example config](https://github.com/payloadcms/public-demo/blob/master/src/payload/payload.config.ts) in the Public Demo source code on GitHub.
 
-| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                        |
-| ---------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`admin`**                | The configuration options for the Admin Panel, including Custom Components, Live Preview, etc. [More details](../admin/overview#admin-options). |
-| **`bin`**                  | Register custom bin scripts with the `payload` bin function. |
-| **`editor`**               | The Rich Text Editor which will be used by `richText` fields. [More details](../rich-text/overview). |
-| **`db`** \*                | The Database Adapter which will be used by Payload. [More details](../database/overview). |
-| **`serverURL`**            | A string used to define the absolute URL of your app including the protocol, for example `https://example.com`. No paths allowed, only protocol, domain and (optionally) port |
-| **`collections`**          | An array of Collections for Payload to manage. [More details](./collections). |
-| **`globals`**              | An array of Globals for Payload to manage. [More details](./globals). |
-| **`cors`**                 | Cross-origin resource sharing (CORS) is a mechanism that accept incoming requests from given domains. You can also customize the `Access-Control-Allow-Headers` header. [More](#cors) |
-| **`localization`**         | Opt-in and control how Payload handles the translation of your content into multiple locales. [More details](./localization). |
-| **`graphQL`**              | Manage GraphQL-specific functionality, including custom queries and mutations, query complexity limits, etc. [More details](../graphql/overview#graphql-options). |
-| **`cookiePrefix`**         | A string that will be prefixed to all cookies that Payload sets. |
-| **`csrf`**                 | A whitelist array of URLs to allow Payload cookies to be accepted from as a form of CSRF protection. [More details](../authentication/overview#csrf-protection). |
-| **`defaultDepth`**         | If a user does not specify `depth` while requesting a resource, this depth will be used. [More details](../queries/depth). |
-| **`defaultMaxTextLength`** | The maximum allowed string length to be permitted application-wide. Helps to prevent malicious public document creation. |
-| **`maxDepth`**             | The maximum allowed depth to be permitted application-wide. This setting helps prevent against malicious queries. Defaults to `10`. |
-| **`indexSortableFields`**  | Automatically index all sortable top-level fields in the database to improve sort performance and add database compatibility for Azure Cosmos and similar. |
-| **`upload`**               | Base Payload upload configuration. [More details](../upload/overview#payload-wide-upload-options). |
-| **`routes`**               | Control the routing structure that Payload binds itself to. Specify `admin`, `api`, `graphQL`, and `graphQLPlayground`. [More details](../admin/overview#root-level-routes). |
-| **`email`**                | Configure the Email Adapter for Payload to use. [More details](../email/overview). |
-| **`debug`**                | Enable to expose more detailed error information. |
-| **`telemetry`**            | Disable Payload telemetry by passing `false`. [More details](#telemetry). |
-| **`rateLimit`**            | Control IP-based rate limiting for all Payload resources. Used to prevent DDoS attacks, etc. [More details](../production/preventing-abuse#rate-limiting-requests). |
-| **`hooks`**                | Tap into Payload-wide hooks. [More details](../hooks/overview). |
-| **`plugins`**              | An array of Payload plugins. [More details](../plugins/overview). |
-| **`endpoints`**            | An array of custom API endpoints added to the Payload router. [More details](../rest-api/overview#custom-endpoints). |
-| **`custom`**               | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins). |
-| **`i18n`**                 | Internationalization configuration. Pass all i18n languages you'd like the admin UI to support. Defaults to English-only. [More details](./i18n). |
-| **`secret`** \*            | A secure, unguessable string that Payload will use for any encryption workflows - for example, password salt / hashing. |
-| **`sharp`**                | If you would like Payload to offer cropping, focal point selection, and automatic media resizing, install and pass the Sharp module to the config here. |
-| **`typescript`**           | Configure TypeScript settings here. [More details](#typescript). |
+## Using environment variables in your config
 
-_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
+We suggest using the `dotenv` package to handle environment variables alongside of Payload. All that's necessary to do is to require the package as high up in your application as possible (for example, at the top of your `server.js` file), and ensure that it can find an `.env` file that you create.
+
+**Add this line to the top of your server:**
+
+```
+require('dotenv').config()
+// ...
+// the rest of your `server.js` file goes here
+```
+
+Note that if you rely on any environment variables in your config itself, you should also call `dotenv()` at the top of your config itself as well. There's no harm in calling it in both your server and your config itself!
+
+**Here is an example project structure w/ `dotenv` and an `.env` file:**
+
+```
+project-name
+---- .env
+---- package.json
+---- payload.config.js
+---- server.js
+```
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
-  Some properties are removed from the client-side bundle. [More details](../admin/components#accessing-the-payload-config).
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
+  <br />
+  If you use an environment variable to configure any properties that are required for the Admin
+  panel to function (ex. serverURL or any routes), you need to make sure that your Admin panel code
+  can access it. [Click here](/docs/admin/webpack#admin-environment-vars) for more info.
 </Banner>
 
+## Customizing & Automating Config Location Detection
 
-### TypeScript
-
-Payload exposes a variety of TypeScript settings that you can leverage. These settings are used to auto-generate TypeScript interfaces for your Collections and Globals, and to ensure that Payload uses your [Generated Types](../typescript/overview) for all Local API methods.
-
-To customize the TypeScript settings, use the `typescript` property in your Payload Config:
-
-```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export default buildConfig({
-  // ...
-  typescript: { // highlight-line
-    // ...
-  }
-})
-```
-
-The following options are available:
-
-| Option          | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
-| --------------- | --------------------- |
-| **`autoGenerate`** | By default, Payload will auto-generate TypeScript interfaces for all collections and globals that your config defines. Opt out by setting `typescript.autoGenerate: false`. [More details](../typescript/overview). |
-| **`declare`**     | By default, Payload adds a `declare` block to your generated types, which makes sure that Payload uses your generated types for all Local API methods. Opt out by setting `typescript.declare: false`. |
-| **`outputFile`**  | Control the output path and filename of Payload's auto-generated types by defining the `typescript.outputFile` property to a full, absolute path. |
-
-#### Importing Payload Config types
-
-You can import config types as follows:
-
-```ts
-import { Config } from 'payload'
-
-// This is the type used for an incoming Payload Config.
-// Only the bare minimum properties are marked as required.
-```
-
-```ts
-import { SanitizedConfig } from 'payload'
-
-// This is the type used after an incoming Payload Config is fully sanitized.
-// Generally, this is only used internally by Payload.
-```
-
-## Config Location
-
-For Payload command-line scripts, we need to be able to locate your Payload Config. We'll check a variety of locations for the presence of `payload.config.ts` by default, including the root current working directory, your `tsconfig`'s `rootDir`, and your `tsconfig`'s `outDir`.
+Payload is designed to automatically locate your configuration file. By default, it will first look in the root of your current working directory for a file named `payload.config.js` or `payload.config.ts` if you're using TypeScript.
 
 In development mode, if the configuration file is not found at the root, Payload will attempt to read your `tsconfig.json`, and search in the directory specified in `compilerOptions.rootDir` (typically "src").
 
@@ -158,58 +152,46 @@ In production mode, Payload will first attempt to find the config file in the ou
 
 Please ensure your `tsconfig.json` is properly configured if you want Payload to accurately auto-detect your configuration file location. If `tsconfig.json` does not exist or doesn't specify `rootDir` or `outDir`, Payload will default to the current working directory.
 
-### Customizing the Config Location
+### Overriding the Config Location
 
-In addition to the above automated detection, you can specify your own location for the Payload Config. This is done by using the environment variable `PAYLOAD_CONFIG_PATH`. The path you provide via this environment variable can either be absolute or relative to your current working directory. This can be useful in situations where your Payload Config is not in a standard location, or you wish to switch between multiple configurations.
+In addition to the above automated detection, you can specify your own location for the Payload config file. This is done by using the environment variable `PAYLOAD_CONFIG_PATH`. The path you provide via this environment variable can either be absolute or relative to your current working directory. This can be useful in situations where your Payload config is not in a standard location, or you wish to switch between multiple configurations.
 
 **Example in package.json:**
 
 ```json
 {
   "scripts": {
-    "payload": "PAYLOAD_CONFIG_PATH=/path/to/custom-config.ts payload"
+    "dev": "PAYLOAD_CONFIG_PATH=path/to/custom-config.js node server.js"
   }
 }
 ```
 
 When `PAYLOAD_CONFIG_PATH` is set, Payload will use this path to load the configuration, bypassing all automated detection.
 
+## Developing within the Config
+
+Payload comes with `isomorphic-fetch` installed which means that even in Node, you can use the `fetch` API just as you would within the browser. No need to import `axios` or similar, unless you want to!
+
+## TypeScript
+
+You can import config types as follows:
+
+```ts
+import { Config } from 'payload/config'
+
+// This is the type used for an incoming Payload config.
+// Only the bare minimum properties are marked as required.
+```
+
+```ts
+import { SanitizedConfig } from 'payload/config'
+
+// This is the type used after an incoming Payload config is fully sanitized.
+// Generally, this is only used internally by Payload.
+```
+
 ## Telemetry
 
-Payload collects **completely anonymous** telemetry data about general usage. This data is super important to us and helps us accurately understand how we're growing and what we can do to build the software into everything that it can possibly be. The telemetry that we collect also help us demonstrate our growth in an accurate manner, which helps us as we seek investment to build and scale our team. If we can accurately demonstrate our growth, we can more effectively continue to support Payload as free and open-source software. To opt out of telemetry, you can pass `telemetry: false` within your Payload Config.
+Payload collects **completely anonymous** telemetry data about general usage. This data is super important to us and helps us accurately understand how we're growing and what we can do to build the software into everything that it can possibly be. The telemetry that we collect also help us demonstrate our growth in an accurate manner, which helps us as we seek investment to build and scale our team. If we can accurately demonstrate our growth, we can more effectively continue to support Payload as free and open-source software. To opt out of telemetry, you can pass `telemetry: false` within your Payload config.
 
 For more information about what we track, take a look at our [privacy policy](/privacy).
-
-## Cross-origin resource sharing (CORS)
-
-Cross-origin resource sharing (CORS) can be configured with either a whitelist array of URLS to allow CORS requests from, a wildcard string (`*`) to accept incoming requests from any domain, or a object with the following properties:
-
-| Option    | Description                                                                                                                                                                        |
-| --------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| `origins` | Either a whitelist array of URLS to allow CORS requests from, or a wildcard string (`'*'`) to accept incoming requests from any domain. |
-| `headers  | A list of allowed headers that will be appended in `Access-Control-Allow-Headers`. |
-
-Here's an example showing how to allow incoming requests from any domain:
-
-```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
-
-export default buildConfig({
-  // ...
-  cors: '*'
-})
-```
-
-Here's an example showing how to append a new header (`x-custom-header`) in `Access-Control-Allow-Headers`:
-
-```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
-
-export default buildConfig({
-  // ...
-  cors: {
-    origins: ['http://localhost:3000']
-    headers: ['x-custom-header']
-  }
-})
-```

docs/database/migrations.mdx

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 title: Migrations
 label: Migrations
 order: 20
-keywords: database, migrations, ddl, sql, mongodb, postgres, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, typescript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: database, migrations, ddl, sql, mongodb, postgres, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, typescript, node, react, express
 desc: Payload features first-party database migrations all done in TypeScript.
 ---
 
@@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ that will be called if for some reason the migration fails to complete successfu
 all changes that you attempt to make within the migration, and the `down` should ideally revert any changes you make.
 
 For an added level of safety, migrations should leverage Payload [transactions](/docs/database/transactions). Migration
-functions should make use of the `req` by adding it to the arguments of your Payload Local API calls such
-as `payload.create` and Database Adapter methods like `payload.db.create`.
+functions should make use of the `req` by adding it to the arguments of your payload local API calls such
+as `payload.create` and database adapter methods like `payload.db.create`.
 
 Here is an example migration file:
 
@@ -124,90 +124,3 @@ Drops all entities from the database and re-runs all migrations from scratch.
 ```text
 npm run payload migrate:fresh
 ```
-
-## When to run migrations
-
-Depending on which Database Adapter you use, your migration workflow might differ subtly.
-
-In relational databases, migrations will be **required** for non-development database environments. But with MongoDB, you might only need to run migrations once in a while (or never even need them).
-
-#### MongoDB
-
-In MongoDB, you'll only ever really need to run migrations for times where you change your database shape, and you have lots of existing data that you'd like to transform from Shape A to Shape B.
-
-In this case, you can create a migration by running `pnpm payload migrate:create`, and then write the logic that you need to perform to migrate your documents to their new shape. You can then either run your migrations in CI before you build / deploy, or you can run them locally, against your production database, by using your production database connection string on your local computer and running the `pnpm payload migrate` command.
-
-#### Postgres
-
-In relational databases like Postgres, migrations are a bit more important, because each time you add a new field or a new collection, you'll need to update the shape of your database to match your Payload Config (otherwise you'll see errors upon trying to read / write your data).
-
-That means that Postgres users of Payload should become familiar with the entire migration workflow from top to bottom.
-
-Here is an overview of a common workflow for working locally against a development database, creating migrations, and then running migrations against your production database before deploying.
-
-**1 - work locally using push mode**
-
-Payload uses Drizzle ORM's powerful `push` mode to automatically sync data changes to your database for you while in development mode. By default, this is enabled and is the suggested workflow to using Postgres and Payload while doing local development.
-
-You can disable this setting and solely use migrations to manage your local development database (pass `push: false` to your Postgres adapter), but if you do disable it, you may see frequent errors while running development mode. This is because Payload will have updated to your new data shape, but your local database will not have updated.
-
-For this reason, we suggest that you leave `push` as its default setting and treat your local dev database as a sandbox.
-
-For more information about push mode and prototyping in development, [click here](/docs/beta/database/postgres#prototyping-in-dev-mode).
-
-The typical workflow in Payload is to build out your Payload configs, install plugins, and make progress in development mode - allowing Drizzle to push your changes to your local database for you. Once you're finished, you can create a migration.
-
-But importantly, you do not need to run migrations against your development database, because Drizzle will have already pushed your changes to your database for you.
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  Warning: do not mix "push" and migrations with your local development database. If you use "push"
-  locally, and then try to migrate, Payload will throw a warning, telling you that these two methods
-  are not meant to be used interchangeably.
-</Banner>
-
-**2 - create a migration**
-
-Once you're done with working in your Payload Config, you can create a migration. It's best practice to try and complete a specific task or fully build out a feature before you create a migration.
-
-But once you're ready, you can run `pnpm payload migrate:create`, which will perform the following steps for you:
-
-- We will look for any existing migrations, and automatically generate SQL changes necessary to convert your schema from its prior state to the new state of your Payload Config
-- We will then create a new migration file in your `/migrations` folder that contains all the SQL necessary to be run
-
-We won't immediately run this migration for you, however.
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  Tip: migrations created by Payload are relatively programmatic in nature, so there should not be any surprises, but before you check in the created migration it's a good idea to always double-check the contents of the migration files.
-</Banner>
-
-**3 - set up your build process to run migrations**
-
-Generally, you want to run migrations before you build Payload for production. This typically happens in your CI pipeline and can usually be configured on platforms like Payload Cloud, Vercel, or Netlify by specifying your build script.
-
-A common set of scripts in a `package.json`, set up to run migrations in CI, might look like this:
-
-```js
-  "scripts": {
-    // For running in dev mode
-    "dev": "next dev --turbo",
-
-    // To build your Next + Payload app for production
-    "build": "next build",
-
-    // A "tie-in" to Payload's CLI for convenience
-    // this helps you run `pnpm payload migrate:create` and similar
-    "payload": "cross-env NODE_OPTIONS=--no-deprecation payload",
-
-    // This command is what you'd set your `build script` to.
-    // Notice how it runs `payload migrate` and then `pnpm build`?
-    // This will run all migrations for you before building, in your CI,
-    // against your production database
-    "ci": "payload migrate && pnpm build",
-  },
-```
-
-In the example above, we've specified a `ci` script which we can use as our "build script" in the platform that we are deploying to production with.
-
-This will require that your build pipeline can connect to your database, and it will simply run the `payload migrate` command prior to starting the build process. By calling `payload migrate`, Payload will automatically execute any migrations in your `/migrations` folder that have not yet been executed against your production database, in the order that they were created.
-
-If it fails, the deployment will be rejected. But now, with your build script set up to run your migrations, you will be all set! Next time you deploy, your CI will execute the required migrations for you, and your database will be caught up with the shape that your Payload Config requires.

docs/database/mongodb.mdx

@@ -3,13 +3,13 @@ title: MongoDB
 label: MongoDB
 order: 40
 desc: Payload has supported MongoDB natively since we started. The flexible nature of MongoDB lends itself well to Payload's powerful fields.
-keywords: MongoDB, documentation, typescript, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: MongoDB, documentation, typescript, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
 To use Payload with MongoDB, install the package `@payloadcms/db-mongodb`. It will come with everything you need to
 store your Payload data in MongoDB.
 
-Then from there, pass it to your Payload Config as follows:
+Then from there, pass it to your Payload config as follows:
 
 ```ts
 import { mongooseAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-mongodb'
@@ -30,13 +30,13 @@ export default buildConfig({
 
 ## Options
 
-| Option               | Description |
-| -------------------- | ----------- |
-| `autoPluralization`  | Tell Mongoose to auto-pluralize any collection names if it encounters any singular words used as collection `slug`s. |
-| `connectOptions`     | Customize MongoDB connection options. Payload will connect to your MongoDB database using default options which you can override and extend to include all the [options](https://mongoosejs.com/docs/connections.html#options) available to mongoose. |
+| Option               | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
+| -------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | --- |
+| `autoPluralization`  | Tell Mongoose to auto-pluralize any collection names if it encounters any singular words used as collection `slug`s.                                                                                                                                                                          |
+| `connectOptions`     | Customize MongoDB connection options. Payload will connect to your MongoDB database using default options which you can override and extend to include all the [options](https://mongoosejs.com/docs/connections.html#options) available to mongoose.                                         |
 | `disableIndexHints`  | Set to true to disable hinting to MongoDB to use 'id' as index. This is currently done when counting documents for pagination, as it increases the speed of the count function used in that query. Disabling this optimization might fix some problems with AWS DocumentDB. Defaults to false |
-| `migrationDir`       | Customize the directory that migrations are stored. |
-| `transactionOptions` | An object with configuration properties used in [transactions](https://www.mongodb.com/docs/manual/core/transactions/) or `false` which will disable the use of transactions. |
+| `migrationDir`       | Customize the directory that migrations are stored.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| `transactionOptions` | An object with configuration properties used in [transactions](https://www.mongodb.com/docs/manual/core/transactions/) or `false` which will disable the use of transactions.                                                                                                                 |     |
 
 ## Access to Mongoose models
 

docs/database/overview.mdx

@@ -2,49 +2,24 @@
 title: Database
 label: Overview
 order: 10
-keywords: database, mongodb, postgres, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, typescript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: database, mongodb, postgres, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, typescript, node, react, express
 desc: With Payload, you bring your own database and own your data. You have full control.
 ---
 
-Payload is database agnostic, meaning you can use any type of database behind Payload's familiar APIs. Payload is designed to interact with your database through a Database Adapter, which is a thin layer that translates Payload's internal data structures into your database's native data structures.
+Payload interacts with your database via the database adapter that you choose. Right now, Payload officially supports two database adapters:
 
-Currently, Payload officially supports the following Database Adapters:
+1. [MongoDB](/docs/database/mongodb) w/ [Mongoose](https://mongoosejs.com/)
+1. [Postgres](/docs/database/postgres) w/ [Drizzle](https://drizzle.team/)
 
-- [MongoDB](/docs/database/mongodb) with [Mongoose](https://mongoosejs.com/)
-- [Postgres](/docs/database/postgres) with [Drizzle](https://drizzle.team/)
-- Coming soon: SQLite and MySQL using Drizzle.
+We will be adding support for SQLite and MySQL in the near future using Drizzle ORM.
 
-To configure a Database Adapter, use the `db` property in your [Payload Config](../configuration/overview):
+To use a specific database adapter, you need to install it and configure it according to its own specifications. Visit the documentation for your applicable database adapter to learn more.
 
-```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
-import { mongooseAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-mongodb'
-
-export default buildConfig({
-  // ...
-  // highlight-start
-  db: mongooseAdapter({
-    url: process.env.DATABASE_URI,
-  }),
-  // highlight-end
-})
-```
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
-  The Database Adapter is an external dependency and must be installed in your project separately from Payload. You can find the installation instructions for each Database Adapter in their respective documentation.
-</Banner>
-
-## Selecting a Database
+## Selecting a database
 
 There are several factors to consider when choosing which database technology and hosting option is right for your project and workload. Payload can theoretically support any database, but it's up to you to decide which database to use.
 
-There are two main categories of databases to choose from:
-
-- [Non-Relational Databases](#non-relational-databases)
-- [Relational Databases](#relational-databases)
-
-### Non-Relational Databases
+### When to use MongoDB
 
 If your project has a lot of dynamic fields, and you are comfortable with allowing Payload to enforce data integrity across your documents, MongoDB is a great choice. With it, your Payload documents are stored as _one_ document in your database—no matter if you have localization enabled, how many block or array fields you have, etc. This means that the shape of your data in your database will very closely reflect your field schema, and there is minimal complexity involved in storing or retrieving your data.
 
@@ -52,21 +27,47 @@ You should prefer MongoDB if:
 
 - You prefer simplicity within your database
 - You don't want to deal with keeping production / staging databases in sync via [DDL changes](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Data_definition_language)
-- Most (or everything) in your project is [Localized](../configuration/localization)
-- You leverage a lot of [Arrays](../fields/array), [Blocks](../fields/blocks), or `hasMany` [Select](../fields/select) fields
+- Most (or everything) in your project is localized
+- You leverage a lot of array fields, block fields, or `hasMany` select fields and similar
 
-### Relational Databases
+### When to use a relational DB
 
 Many projects might call for more rigid database architecture where the shape of your data is strongly enforced at the database level. For example, if you know the shape of your data and it's relatively "flat", and you don't anticipate it to change often, your workload might suit relational databases like Postgres very well.
 
 You should prefer a relational DB like Postgres if:
 
-- You are comfortable with [Migrations](./migrations)
+- You are comfortable with migration workflows
 - You require enforced data consistency at the database level
 - You have a lot of relationships between collections and require relationships to be enforced
 
-## Payload Differences
+### Differences in Payload features
 
-It's important to note that nearly every Payload feature is available in all of our officially supported Database Adapters, including [Localization](../configuration/localization), [Arrays](../fields/array), [Blocks](../fields/blocks), etc. The only thing that is not supported in Postgres yet is the [Point Field](/docs/fields/point), but that should be added soon.
+It's important to note that almost everything Payload does is available in all of our officially supported database adapters, including localization, arrays, blocks, etc.
 
-It's up to you to choose which database you would like to use based on the requirements of your project. Payload has no opinion on which database you should ultimately choose.
+The only thing that is not supported in Postgres yet is the [Point field](/docs/fields/point), but that should be added soon.
+
+It's up to you to choose which database you would like to use.
+
+## Configuration
+
+To configure the database for your Payload application, an adapter can be assigned to `config.db`. This property is required within your Payload config.
+
+Here's an example:
+
+```ts
+import { postgresAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-postgres'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  // Your config goes here
+  collections: [
+    // Collections go here
+  ],
+  // Here is where you pass your database adapter
+  // and the adapter will require options specific to itself
+  db: postgresAdapter({
+    pool: {
+      connectionString: process.env.DATABASE_URI,
+    },
+  }),
+})
+```

docs/database/postgres.mdx

@@ -2,15 +2,20 @@
 title: Postgres
 label: Postgres
 order: 50
-desc: Payload supports Postgres through an officially supported Drizzle Database Adapter.
-keywords: Postgres, documentation, typescript, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+desc: Payload supports Postgres through an officially supported Drizzle database adapter.
+keywords: Postgres, documentation, typescript, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
 To use Payload with Postgres, install the package `@payloadcms/db-postgres`. It leverages Drizzle ORM and `node-postgres` to interact with a Postgres database that you provide.
 
+<Banner>
+  The Postgres database adapter is currently in beta. If you would like to help us test this
+  package, we'd love to hear if you find any bugs or issues!
+</Banner>
+
 It automatically manages changes to your database for you in development mode, and exposes a full suite of migration controls for you to leverage in order to keep other database environments in sync with your schema. DDL transformations are automatically generated.
 
-To configure Payload to use Postgres, pass the `postgresAdapter` to your Payload Config as follows:
+To configure Payload to use Postgres, pass the `postgresAdapter` to your Payload config as follows:
 
 ```ts
 import { postgresAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-postgres'
@@ -68,14 +73,25 @@ In addition to exposing Drizzle directly, all of the tables, Drizzle relations,
 
 Drizzle exposes two ways to work locally in development mode.
 
-The first is [`db push`](https://orm.drizzle.team/kit-docs/overview#prototyping-with-db-push), which automatically pushes changes you make to your Payload Config (and therefore, Drizzle schema) to your database so you don't have to manually migrate every time you change your Payload Config. This only works in development mode, and should not be mixed with manually running [`migrate`](/docs/database/migrations) commands.
+The first is [`db push`](https://orm.drizzle.team/kit-docs/overview#prototyping-with-db-push), which automatically pushes changes you make to your Payload config (and therefore, Drizzle schema) to your database so you don't have to manually migrate every time you change your Payload config. This only works in development mode, and should not be mixed with manually running [`migrate`](/docs/database/migrations) commands.
 
 You will be warned if any changes that you make will entail data loss while in development mode. Push is enabled by default, but you can opt out if you'd like.
 
-Alternatively, you can disable `push` and rely solely on migrations to keep your local database in sync with your Payload Config.
+Alternatively, you can disable `push` and rely solely on migrations to keep your local database in sync with your Payload config.
 
 ## Migration workflows
 
-In Postgres, migrations are a fundamental aspect of working with Payload and you should become familiar with how they work.
+Migrations are extremely powerful thanks to the seamless way that Payload and Drizzle work together. Let's take the following scenario:
 
-For more information about migrations, [click here](/docs/beta/database/migrations#when-to-run-migrations).
+1. You are building your Payload config locally, with a local database used for testing.
+1. You have left the default setting of `push` enabled, so every time you change your Payload config (add or remove fields, collections, etc.), Drizzle will automatically push changes to your local DB.
+1. Once you're done with your changes, or have completed a feature, you can run `npm run payload migrate:create`.
+1. Payload and Drizzle will look for any existing migrations, and automatically generate all SQL changes necessary to convert your schema from its prior state into the state of your current Payload config, and store the resulting DDL in a newly created migration.
+1. Once you're ready to go to production, you will be able to run `npm run payload migrate` against your production database, which will apply any new migrations that have not yet run.
+1. Now your production database is in sync with your Payload config!
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  Warning: do not mix "push" and migrations with your local development database. If you use "push"
+  locally, and then try to migrate, Payload will throw a warning, telling you that these two methods
+  are not meant to be used interchangeably.
+</Banner>

docs/database/transactions.mdx

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 title: Transactions
 label: Transactions
 order: 30
-keywords: database, transactions, sql, mongodb, postgres, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, typescript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: database, transactions, sql, mongodb, postgres, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, typescript, node, react, express
 desc: Database transactions are fully supported within Payload.
 ---
 

docs/email/overview.mdx

@@ -3,14 +3,14 @@ title: Email Functionality
 label: Overview
 order: 10
 desc: Payload uses an adapter pattern to enable email functionality. Set up email functions such as password resets, order confirmations and more.
-keywords: email, overview, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: email, overview, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
 ## Introduction
 
 Payload has a few email adapters that can be imported to enable email functionality. The [@payloadcms/email-nodemailer](https://www.npmjs.com/package/@payloadcms/email-nodemailer) package will be the package most will want to install. This package provides an easy way to use [Nodemailer](https://nodemailer.com) for email and won't get in your way for those already familiar.
 
-The email adapter should be passed into the `email` property of the Payload Config. This will allow Payload to send emails for things like password resets, new user verification, and any other email sending needs you may have.
+The email adapter should be passed into the `email` property of the Payload config. This will allow Payload to send emails for things like password resets, new user verification, and any other email sending needs you may have.
 
 ## Configuration
 
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) options can be passed in using the `transpo
 **Example email options using SMTP:**
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
 import { nodemailerAdapter } from '@payloadcms/email-nodemailer'
 
 export default buildConfig({
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ export default buildConfig({
 **Example email options using nodemailer.createTransport:**
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
 import { nodemailerAdapter } from '@payloadcms/email-nodemailer'
 import nodemailer from 'nodemailer'
 
@@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ You also have the ability to bring your own nodemailer transport. This is an exa
 
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
 import { nodemailerAdapter } from '@payloadcms/email-nodemailer'
 import nodemailerSendgrid from 'nodemailer-sendgrid'
 
@@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ The Resend adapter requires an API key to be passed in the options. This can be
 | apiKey | The API key for the Resend service. |
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
 import { resendAdapter } from '@payloadcms/email-resend'
 
 export default buildConfig({
@@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ export default buildConfig({
 
 ## Sending Mail
 
-With a working transport you can call it anywhere you have access to Payload by calling `payload.sendEmail(message)`. The `message` will contain the `to`, `subject` and `html` or `text` for the email being sent. Other options are also available and can be seen in the sendEmail args. Support for these will depend on the adapter being used.
+With a working transport you can call it anywhere you have access to payload by calling `payload.sendEmail(message)`. The `message` will contain the `to`, `subject` and `html` or `text` for the email being sent. Other options are also available and can be seen in the sendEmail args. Support for these will depend on the adapter being used.
 
 ```ts
 // Example of sending an email

docs/examples/overview.mdx

@@ -1,40 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Examples
-label: Overview
-order: 10
-desc:
-keywords: example, examples, starter, boilerplate, template, templates
----
-
-Payload provides a vast array of examples to help you get started with your project no matter what you are working on. These examples are designed to be easy to get up and running, and to be easy to understand. They showcase nothing more than the specific features being demonstrated so you can easily decipher what is going on.
-
-Examples are changing every day, so be sure to check back often to see what new examples have been added. If you have a specific example you would like to see, please feel free to start a new [Discussion](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/discussions) or open a new [PR](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/pulls) to add it yourself.
-
-- [Auth](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/auth)
-- [Custom Server](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/custom-server)
-- [Draft Preview](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/draft-preview)
-- [Email](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/email)
-- [Form Builder](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/form-builder)
-- [Hierarchy](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/hierarchy)
-- [Live Preview](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/live-preview)
-- [Multi-tenant](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/multi-tenant)
-- [Nested Docs](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/nested-docs)
-- [Redirects](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/redirects)
-- [Tailwind / Shadcn-ui](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/tailwind-shadcn-ui)
-- [Tests](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/testing)
-- [Virtual Fields](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/virtual-fields)
-- [White-label Admin UI](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/whitelabel)
-
-When necessary, some examples include a front-end. Examples that require a front-end share this folder structure:
-
-```plaintext
-example/
-├── payload/
-├── next-app/
-├── next-pages/
-├── react-router/
-├── vue/
-├── svelte/
-```
-
-Where `payload` is your Payload project, and the other directories are dedicated to their respective front-end framework. We are adding new examples every day, so if your framework of choice is not yet supported in any particular example, please feel free to start a new [Discussion](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/discussions) or open a new [PR](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/pulls) to add it yourself.

docs/fields/array.mdx

@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ title: Array Field
 label: Array
 order: 20
 desc: Array fields are intended for sets of repeating fields, that you define. Learn how to use array fields, see examples and options.
-keywords: array, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: array, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
 <Banner>
@@ -14,8 +14,8 @@ keywords: array, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Managemen
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/array.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/array-dark.png"
-  alt="Array field with two Rows in Payload Admin Panel"
-  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of an Array field with two Rows"
+  alt="Array field with two Rows in Payload admin panel"
+  caption="Admin panel screenshot of an Array field with two Rows"
 />
 
 **Example uses:**
@@ -26,27 +26,26 @@ keywords: array, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Managemen
 
 ## Config
 
-| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
-| ---------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                                                                                                             |
-| **`label`**            | Text used as the heading in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) or an object with keys for each language. Auto-generated from name if not defined.                                                                                                                                                     |
-| **`fields`** \*        | Array of field types to correspond to each row of the Array.                                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
-| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                                                                                                                       |
-| **`minRows`**          | A number for the fewest allowed items during validation when a value is present.                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
-| **`maxRows`**          | A number for the most allowed items during validation when a value is present.                                                                                                                                                                                                     |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                                                                                                                                      |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                                                                                                                                   |
-| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide an array of row data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                                                                                                               |
-| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config. If enabled, a separate, localized set of all data within this Array will be kept, so there is no need to specify each nested field as `localized`. |
-| **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
-| **`labels`**           | Customize the row labels appearing in the Admin dashboard.                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
-| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
-| **`interfaceName`**    | Create a top level, reusable [Typescript interface](/docs/typescript/generating-types#custom-field-interfaces) & [GraphQL type](/docs/graphql/graphql-schema#custom-field-schemas).                                                                                                |
-| **`dbName`**           | Custom table name for the field when using SQL Database Adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from name if not defined.                                                                                                                                    |
-| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
+| Option              | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
+| ------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** \*       | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                                                                                                             |
+| **`label`**         | Text used as the heading in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language. Auto-generated from name if not defined.                                                                                                                                                     |
+| **`fields`** \*     | Array of field types to correspond to each row of the Array.                                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
+| **`validate`**      | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                                                                                                                       |
+| **`minRows`**       | A number for the fewest allowed items during validation when a value is present.                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
+| **`maxRows`**       | A number for the most allowed items during validation when a value is present.                                                                                                                                                                                                     |
+| **`saveToJWT`**     | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                                                                                                                                      |
+| **`hooks`**         | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**        | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                                                                                                                            |
+| **`hidden`**        | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.                                                                                                                                   |
+| **`defaultValue`**  | Provide an array of row data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                                                                                                               |
+| **`localized`**     | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config. If enabled, a separate, localized set of all data within this Array will be kept, so there is no need to specify each nested field as `localized`. |
+| **`required`**      | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
+| **`labels`**        | Customize the row labels appearing in the Admin dashboard.                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`admin`**         | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
+| **`custom`**        | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
+| **`interfaceName`** | Create a top level, reusable [Typescript interface](/docs/typescript/generating-types#custom-field-interfaces) & [GraphQL type](/docs/graphql/graphql-schema#custom-field-schemas).                                                                                                |
+| **`dbName`**        | Custom table name for the field when using SQL database adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from name if not defined.                                                                                                                                    |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
@@ -65,7 +64,7 @@ In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-conf
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/blocks.mdx

@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ title: Blocks Field
 label: Blocks
 order: 30
 desc: The Blocks field type is a great layout build and can be used to construct any flexible content model. Learn how to use Block fields, see examples and options.
-keywords: blocks, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: blocks, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
 <Banner>
@@ -16,8 +16,8 @@ keywords: blocks, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Manageme
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/blocks.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/blocks-dark.png"
-  alt="Admin Panel screenshot of add Blocks drawer view"
-  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of add Blocks drawer view"
+  alt="Admin panel screenshot of add Blocks drawer view"
+  caption="Admin panel screenshot of add Blocks drawer view"
 />
 
 **Example uses:**
@@ -28,25 +28,24 @@ keywords: blocks, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Manageme
 
 ## Field config
 
-| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
-| ---------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                                                                                                             |
-| **`label`**            | Text used as the heading in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language. Auto-generated from name if not defined.                                                                                                                                                     |
-| **`blocks`** \*        | Array of [block configs](/docs/fields/blocks#block-configs) to be made available to this field.                                                                                                                                                                                    |
-| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                                                                                                                       |
-| **`minRows`**          | A number for the fewest allowed items during validation when a value is present.                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
-| **`maxRows`**          | A number for the most allowed items during validation when a value is present.                                                                                                                                                                                                     |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                                                                                                                                      |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API response or the Admin Panel.                                                                                                                          |
-| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide an array of block data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                                                                                                             |
-| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config. If enabled, a separate, localized set of all data within this field will be kept, so there is no need to specify each nested field as `localized`. |
-| **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
-| **`labels`**           | Customize the block row labels appearing in the Admin dashboard.                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
-| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
-| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
-| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
+| Option             | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
+| ------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** \*      | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                                                                                                             |
+| **`label`**        | Text used as the heading in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language. Auto-generated from name if not defined.                                                                                                                                                     |
+| **`blocks`** \*    | Array of [block configs](/docs/fields/blocks#block-configs) to be made available to this field.                                                                                                                                                                                    |
+| **`validate`**     | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                                                                                                                       |
+| **`minRows`**      | A number for the fewest allowed items during validation when a value is present.                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
+| **`maxRows`**      | A number for the most allowed items during validation when a value is present.                                                                                                                                                                                                     |
+| **`saveToJWT`**    | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                                                                                                                                      |
+| **`hooks`**        | Provide field-level hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**       | Provide field-level access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                                                                                                                            |
+| **`hidden`**       | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API response or the Admin panel.                                                                                                                          |
+| **`defaultValue`** | Provide an array of block data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                                                                                                             |
+| **`localized`**    | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config. If enabled, a separate, localized set of all data within this field will be kept, so there is no need to specify each nested field as `localized`. |
+| **`unique`**       | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
+| **`labels`**       | Customize the block row labels appearing in the Admin dashboard.                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
+| **`admin`**        | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
+| **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
@@ -82,7 +81,7 @@ Blocks are defined as separate configs of their own.
 | **`imageAltText`**         | Customize this block's image thumbnail alt text.                                                                                                                                    |
 | **`interfaceName`**        | Create a top level, reusable [Typescript interface](/docs/typescript/generating-types#custom-field-interfaces) & [GraphQL type](/docs/graphql/graphql-schema#custom-field-schemas). |
 | **`graphQL.singularName`** | Text to use for the GraphQL schema name. Auto-generated from slug if not defined. NOTE: this is set for deprecation, prefer `interfaceName`.                                        |
-| **`dbName`**               | Custom table name for this block type when using SQL Database Adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from slug if not defined.
+| **`dbName`**               | Custom table name for this block type when using SQL database adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from slug if not defined.
 | **`custom`**               | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                           |
 
 ### Auto-generated data per block
@@ -95,14 +94,14 @@ The `blockType` is saved as the slug of the block that has been selected.
 
 **`blockName`**
 
-The Admin Panel provides each block with a `blockName` field which optionally allows editors to label their blocks for better editability and readability.
+The Admin panel provides each block with a `blockName` field which optionally allows editors to label their blocks for better editability and readability.
 
 ## Example
 
 `collections/ExampleCollection.js`
 
 ```ts
-import { Block, CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { Block, CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
 const QuoteBlock: Block = {
   slug: 'Quote', // required
@@ -145,5 +144,5 @@ export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
 As you build your own Block configs, you might want to store them in separate files but retain typing accordingly. To do so, you can import and use Payload's `Block` type:
 
 ```ts
-import type { Block } from 'payload'
+import type { Block } from 'payload/types'
 ```

docs/fields/checkbox.mdx

@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ title: Checkbox Field
 label: Checkbox
 order: 40
 desc: Checkbox field types allow the developer to save a boolean value in the database. Learn how to use Checkbox fields, see examples and options.
-keywords: checkbox, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: checkbox, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
 <Banner>The Checkbox field type saves a boolean in the database.</Banner>
@@ -11,28 +11,27 @@ keywords: checkbox, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Manage
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/checkbox.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/checkbox-dark.png"
-  alt="Checkbox field with text field in Payload Admin Panel"
-  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of Checkbox field with Text field below"
+  alt="Checkbox field with text field in Payload admin panel"
+  caption="Admin panel screenshot of Checkbox field with Text field below"
 />
 
 ## Config
 
-| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
-| ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
-| **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
-| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
-| **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
-| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value, will default to false if field is also `required`. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                     |
-| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
-| **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See the [default field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config) for more details.                                                    |
-| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
-| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
+| Option             | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
+| ------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** \*      | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
+| **`label`**        | Text used as a field label in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
+| **`validate`**     | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
+| **`index`**        | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
+| **`saveToJWT`**    | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
+| **`hooks`**        | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
+| **`access`**       | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
+| **`hidden`**       | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.                            |
+| **`defaultValue`** | Provide data to be used for this field's default value, will default to false if field is also `required`. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                     |
+| **`localized`**    | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
+| **`required`**     | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`admin`**        | Admin-specific configuration. See the [default field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config) for more details.                                                    |
+| **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
@@ -41,7 +40,7 @@ _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/code.mdx

@@ -4,44 +4,43 @@ label: Code
 order: 50
 desc: The Code field type will store any string in the Database. Learn how to use Code fields, see examples and options.
 
-keywords: code, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: code, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
 <Banner>
-  The Code field type saves a string in the database, but provides the Admin Panel with a code
+  The Code field type saves a string in the database, but provides the Admin panel with a code
   editor styled interface.
 </Banner>
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/code.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/code-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Code field in the Payload Admin Panel"
-  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Code field"
+  alt="Shows a Code field in the Payload admin panel"
+  caption="Admin panel screenshot of a Code field"
 />
 
 This field uses the `monaco-react` editor syntax highlighting.
 
 ## Config
 
-| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
-| ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
-| **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
-| **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
-| **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database#overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
-| **`minLength`**        | Used by the default validation function to ensure values are of a minimum character length.                                                                                 |
-| **`maxLength`**        | Used by the default validation function to ensure values are of a maximum character length.                                                                                 |
-| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
-| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
-| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
-| **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                   |
-| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
-| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
+| Option             | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
+| ------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** \*      | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
+| **`label`**        | Text used as a field label in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
+| **`unique`**       | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
+| **`index`**        | Build an [index](/docs/database#overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
+| **`minLength`**    | Used by the default validation function to ensure values are of a minimum character length.                                                                                 |
+| **`maxLength`**    | Used by the default validation function to ensure values are of a maximum character length.                                                                                 |
+| **`validate`**     | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
+| **`saveToJWT`**    | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
+| **`hooks`**        | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
+| **`access`**       | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
+| **`hidden`**       | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.                            |
+| **`defaultValue`** | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
+| **`localized`**    | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
+| **`required`**     | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`admin`**        | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                   |
+| **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
@@ -59,7 +58,7 @@ In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-conf
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/collapsible.mdx

@@ -3,19 +3,19 @@ title: Collapsible Field
 label: Collapsible
 order: 60
 desc: With the Collapsible field, you can place fields within a collapsible layout component that can be collapsed / expanded.
-keywords: row, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: row, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
 <Banner>
-  The Collapsible field is presentational-only and only affects the Admin Panel. By using it, you
+  The Collapsible field is presentational-only and only affects the Admin panel. By using it, you
   can place fields within a nice layout component that can be collapsed / expanded.
 </Banner>
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/collapsible.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/collapsible-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Collapsible field in the Payload Admin Panel"
-  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Collapsible field"
+  alt="Shows a Collapsible field in the Payload admin panel"
+  caption="Admin panel screenshot of a Collapsible field"
 />
 
 ## Config
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-conf
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/date.mdx

@@ -3,47 +3,46 @@ title: Date Field
 label: Date
 order: 70
 desc: The Date field type stores a Date in the database. Learn how to use and customize the Date field, see examples and options.
-keywords: date, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: date, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
 <Banner>
-  The Date field type saves a Date in the database and provides the Admin Panel with a customizable
+  The Date field type saves a Date in the database and provides the Admin panel with a customizable
   time picker interface.
 </Banner>
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/date.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/date-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Date field in the Payload Admin Panel"
-  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Date field"
+  alt="Shows a Date field in the Payload admin panel"
+  caption="Admin panel screenshot of a Date field"
 />
 
-This field uses [`react-datepicker`](https://www.npmjs.com/package/react-datepicker) for the Admin Panel component.
+This field uses [`react-datepicker`](https://www.npmjs.com/package/react-datepicker) for the Admin panel component.
 
 ## Config
 
-| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
-| ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
-| **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
-| **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
-| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
-| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
-| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
-| **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                   |
-| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
-| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
+| Option             | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
+| ------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** \*      | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
+| **`label`**        | Text used as a field label in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
+| **`index`**        | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
+| **`validate`**     | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
+| **`saveToJWT`**    | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
+| **`hooks`**        | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
+| **`access`**       | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
+| **`hidden`**       | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.                            |
+| **`defaultValue`** | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
+| **`localized`**    | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
+| **`required`**     | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`admin`**        | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                   |
+| **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 ## Admin Config
 
-In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), you can customize the following fields that will adjust how the component displays in the Admin Panel via the `date` property.
+In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), you can customize the following fields that will adjust how the component displays in the admin panel via the `date` property.
 
 | Property                       | Description                                                                                                                            |
 | ------------------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
@@ -77,7 +76,7 @@ When only `pickerAppearance` is set, an equivalent format will be rendered in th
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/email.mdx

@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ title: Email Field
 label: Email
 order: 80
 desc: The Email field enforces that the value provided is a valid email address. Learn how to use Email fields, see examples and options.
-keywords: email, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: email, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
 <Banner>The Email field enforces that the value provided is a valid email address.</Banner>
@@ -11,29 +11,28 @@ keywords: email, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Managemen
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/email.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/email-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows an Email field in the Payload Admin Panel"
-  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of an Email field"
+  alt="Shows an Email field in the Payload admin panel"
+  caption="Admin panel screenshot of an Email field"
 />
 
 ## Config
 
-| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
-| ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
-| **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
-| **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
-| **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
-| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
-| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
-| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
-| **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                   |
-| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
-| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
+| Option             | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
+| ------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** \*      | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
+| **`label`**        | Text used as a field label in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
+| **`unique`**       | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
+| **`index`**        | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
+| **`validate`**     | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
+| **`saveToJWT`**    | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
+| **`hooks`**        | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
+| **`access`**       | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
+| **`hidden`**       | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.                            |
+| **`defaultValue`** | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
+| **`localized`**    | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
+| **`required`**     | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`admin`**        | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                   |
+| **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
@@ -54,7 +53,7 @@ Set this property to a string that will be used for browser autocomplete.
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/group.mdx

@@ -3,39 +3,38 @@ title: Group Field
 label: Group
 order: 90
 desc: The Group field allows other fields to be nested under a common property. Learn how to use Group fields, see examples and options.
-keywords: group, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: group, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
 <Banner>
   The Group field allows fields to be nested under a common property name. It also groups fields
-  together visually in the Admin Panel.
+  together visually in the Admin panel.
 </Banner>
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/group.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/group-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Group field in the Payload Admin Panel"
-  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Group field"
+  alt="Shows a Group field in the Payload admin panel"
+  caption="Admin panel screenshot of a Group field"
 />
 
 ## Config
 
-| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
-| ---------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                                                                                                             |
-| **`fields`** \*        | Array of field types to nest within this Group.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
-| **`label`**            | Used as a heading in the Admin Panel and to name the generated GraphQL type.                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
-| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                                                                                                                       |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                                                                                                                                      |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                                                                                                                                   |
-| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide an object of data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config. If enabled, a separate, localized set of all data within this Group will be kept, so there is no need to specify each nested field as `localized`. |
-| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
-| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
-| **`interfaceName`**    | Create a top level, reusable [Typescript interface](/docs/typescript/generating-types#custom-field-interfaces) & [GraphQL type](/docs/graphql/graphql-schema#custom-field-schemas).                                                                                                |
-| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
+| Option              | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
+| ------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** \*       | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                                                                                                             |
+| **`fields`** \*     | Array of field types to nest within this Group.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
+| **`label`**         | Used as a heading in the Admin panel and to name the generated GraphQL type.                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
+| **`validate`**      | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                                                                                                                       |
+| **`saveToJWT`**     | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                                                                                                                                      |
+| **`hooks`**         | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**        | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                                                                                                                            |
+| **`hidden`**        | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.                                                                                                                                   |
+| **`defaultValue`**  | Provide an object of data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`localized`**     | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config. If enabled, a separate, localized set of all data within this Group will be kept, so there is no need to specify each nested field as `localized`. |
+| **`admin`**         | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
+| **`custom`**        | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
+| **`interfaceName`** | Create a top level, reusable [Typescript interface](/docs/typescript/generating-types#custom-field-interfaces) & [GraphQL type](/docs/graphql/graphql-schema#custom-field-schemas).                                                                                                |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
@@ -45,14 +44,14 @@ In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-conf
 
 **`hideGutter`**
 
-Set this property to `true` to hide this field's gutter within the Admin Panel. The field gutter is rendered as a vertical line and padding, but often if this field is nested within a Group, Block, or Array, you may want to hide the gutter.
+Set this property to `true` to hide this field's gutter within the admin panel. The field gutter is rendered as a vertical line and padding, but often if this field is nested within a Group, Block, or Array, you may want to hide the gutter.
 
 ## Example
 
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/json.mdx

@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ label: JSON
 order: 50
 desc: The JSON field type will store any string in the Database. Learn how to use JSON fields, see examples and options.
 
-keywords: json, jsonSchema, schema, validation, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: json, jsonSchema, schema, validation, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
 <Banner>
@@ -15,32 +15,31 @@ keywords: json, jsonSchema, schema, validation, fields, config, configuration, d
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/json.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/json-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a JSON field in the Payload Admin Panel"
-  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a JSON field"
+  alt="Shows a JSON field in the Payload admin panel"
+  caption="Admin panel screenshot of a JSON field"
 />
 
 This field uses the `monaco-react` editor syntax highlighting.
 
 ## Config
 
-| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
-| ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
-| **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
-| **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
-| **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
-| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
-| **`jsonSchema`**       | Provide a JSON schema that will be used for validation. [JSON schemas](https://json-schema.org/learn/getting-started-step-by-step)                                          |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
-| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
-| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
-| **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                   |
-| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
-| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
+| Option             | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
+| ------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** \*      | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
+| **`label`**        | Text used as a field label in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
+| **`unique`**       | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
+| **`index`**        | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
+| **`validate`**     | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
+| **`jsonSchema`**   | Provide a JSON schema that will be used for validation. [JSON schemas](https://json-schema.org/learn/getting-started-step-by-step)
+| **`saveToJWT`**    | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
+| **`hooks`**        | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
+| **`access`**       | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
+| **`hidden`**       | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.                            |
+| **`defaultValue`** | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
+| **`localized`**    | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
+| **`required`**     | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`admin`**        | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                   |
+| **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
@@ -57,7 +56,7 @@ In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-conf
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',
@@ -82,7 +81,7 @@ If you only provide a URL to a schema, Payload will fetch the desired schema if
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',
@@ -115,7 +114,7 @@ export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/number.mdx

@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ title: Number Field
 label: Number
 order: 100
 desc: Number fields store and validate numeric data. Learn how to use and format Number fields, see examples and Number field options.
-keywords: number, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: number, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
 <Banner>
@@ -14,34 +14,33 @@ keywords: number, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Manageme
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/number.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/number-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Number field in the Payload Admin Panel"
-  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Number field"
+  alt="Shows a Number field in the Payload admin panel"
+  caption="Admin panel screenshot of a Number field"
 />
 
 ## Config
 
-| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
-| ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
-| **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
-| **`min`**              | Minimum value accepted. Used in the default `validation` function.                                                                                                          |
-| **`max`**              | Maximum value accepted. Used in the default `validation` function.                                                                                                          |
-| **`hasMany`**          | Makes this field an ordered array of numbers instead of just a single number.                                                                                               |
-| **`minRows`**          | Minimum number of numbers in the numbers array, if `hasMany` is set to true.                                                                                                |
-| **`maxRows`**          | Maximum number of numbers in the numbers array, if `hasMany` is set to true.                                                                                                |
-| **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
-| **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
-| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
-| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
-| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
-| **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                   |
-| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
-| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
+| Option             | Description                                                                                                                                                                          |
+|--------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| **`name`** \*      | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                               |
+| **`label`**        | Text used as a field label in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                              |
+| **`min`**          | Minimum value accepted. Used in the default `validation` function.                                                                                                                   |
+| **`max`**          | Maximum value accepted. Used in the default `validation` function.                                                                                                                   |
+| **`hasMany`**      | Makes this field an ordered array of numbers instead of just a single number.                                                                                                        |
+| **`minRows`**      | Minimum number of numbers in the numbers array, if `hasMany` is set to true.                                                                                                         |
+| **`maxRows`**      | Maximum number of numbers in the numbers array, if `hasMany` is set to true.                                                                                                         |
+| **`unique`**       | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                         |
+| **`index`**        | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often.          |
+| **`validate`**     | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                         |
+| **`saveToJWT`**    | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                                        |
+| **`hooks`**        | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                           |
+| **`access`**       | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                              |
+| **`hidden`**       | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.                                     |
+| **`defaultValue`** | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                                 |
+| **`localized`**    | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                                      |
+| **`required`**     | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`admin`**        | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                            |
+| **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                            |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
@@ -66,7 +65,7 @@ Set this property to a string that will be used for browser autocomplete.
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/overview.mdx

@@ -2,296 +2,126 @@
 title: Fields Overview
 label: Overview
 order: 10
-desc: Fields are the building blocks of Payload, find out how to add or remove a field, change field type, add hooks, define Access Control and Validation.
-keywords: overview, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+desc: Fields are the building blocks of Payload, find out how to add or remove a field, change field type, add hooks, define access control and validation.
+keywords: overview, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
-Fields are the building blocks of Payload. They define the schema of the Documents that will be stored in the [Database](../database/overview), as well as automatically generate the corresponding UI within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview).
-
-There are many [Field Types](#field-types) to choose from, ranging anywhere from simple text strings to nested arrays and blocks. Most fields save data to the database, while others are strictly presentational. Fields can have [Custom Validations](#validation), [Conditional Logic](../admin/fields#conditional-logic), [Access Control](#field-level-access-control), [Hooks](#field-level-hooks), and so much more.
-
-To configure fields, use the `fields` property in your [Collection](../configuration/collections) or [Global](../configuration/globals) config:
-
-```ts
-import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const Page: CollectionConfig = {
-  // ...
-  fields: [ // highlight-line
-    // ...
-  ]
-}
-```
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  You can fully customize the appearance and behavior of all fields within the Admin Panel. [More details](../admin/fields).
+<Banner type="info">
+  Fields are the building blocks of Payload. Collections and Globals both use Fields to define the
+  shape of the data that they store. Payload offers a wide variety of field types - both simple and
+  complex.
 </Banner>
 
-## Field Types
+Fields are defined as an array on Collections and Globals via the `fields` key. They define the shape of the data that will be stored as well as automatically construct the corresponding Admin UI.
 
-Payload provides a wide variety of built-in Field Types, each with its own unique properties and behaviors that determine which values it can accept, how it is presented in the API, and how it will be rendered in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview).
+The required `type` property on a field determines what values it can accept, how it is presented in the API, and how the field will be rendered in the admin interface.
 
-To configure fields, use the `fields` property in your [Collection](../configuration/collections) or [Global](../configuration/globals) config:
+**Simple collection with two fields:**
 
 ```ts
-import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
 export const Page: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'pages',
-  // highlight-start
   fields: [
     {
-      name: 'field',
-      type: 'text',
-    }
-  ]
-  // highlight-end
+      name: 'myField',
+      type: 'text', // highlight-line
+    },
+    {
+      name: 'otherField',
+      type: 'checkbox', // highlight-line
+    },
+  ],
 }
 ```
 
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
-  Each field is an object with at least the `type` property. This matches the field to its corresponding Field Type. [More details](#field-options).
-</Banner>
+## Field types
 
-There are two main categories of fields in Payload:
+- [Array](/docs/fields/array) - for repeating content, supports nested fields
+- [Blocks](/docs/fields/blocks) - block-based fields, allowing powerful layout creation
+- [Checkbox](/docs/fields/checkbox) - boolean true / false checkbox
+- [Code](/docs/fields/code) - code editor that saves a string to the database
+- [Collapsible](/docs/fields/collapsible) - used for admin layout, nest fields within a collapsible component
+- [Date](/docs/fields/date) - date / time field that saves a timestamp
+- [Email](/docs/fields/email) - validates the entry is a properly formatted email
+- [Group](/docs/fields/group) - nest fields within an object
+- [JSON](/docs/fields/json) - saves actual JSON in the database
+- [Number](/docs/fields/number) - field that enforces that its value be a number
+- [Point](/docs/fields/point) - geometric coordinates for location data
+- [Radio](/docs/fields/radio) - radio button group, allowing only one value to be selected
+- [Relationship](/docs/fields/relationship) - assign relationships to other collections
+- [Rich Text](/docs/fields/rich-text) - fully extensible Rich Text editor
+- [Row](/docs/fields/row) - used for admin field layout, no effect on data shape
+- [Select](/docs/fields/select) - dropdown / picklist style value selector
+- [Tabs](/docs/fields/tabs) - used for admin layout, nest fields within tabs
+- [Text](/docs/fields/text) - simple text input
+- [Textarea](/docs/fields/textarea) - allows a bit larger of a text editor
+- [Upload](/docs/fields/upload) - allows local file and image upload
+- [UI](/docs/fields/ui) - inject your own custom components and do whatever you need
 
-- [Data Fields](#data-fields)
-- [Presentational Fields](#presentational-fields)
+## Field-level hooks
 
-To begin writing fields, first determine which [Field Type](#field-types) best supports your application. Then to author your field accordingly using the [Field Options](#field-options) for your chosen field type.
+One of the most powerful parts about Payload is its ability for you to define field-level hooks that can control the logic of your fields to a fine-grained level. for more information about how to define field hooks, [click here](/docs/hooks/overview#field-hooks).
 
-### Data Fields
+## Field-level access control
 
-Data Fields are used to store data in the [Database](../database/overview). All Data Fields have a `name` property. This is the key that will be used to store the field's value.
+In addition to being able to define access control on a document-level, you can define extremely granular permissions on a field by field level. For more information about field-level access control, [click here](/docs/access-control/overview#fields).
 
-Here are the available Data Fields:
+## Field names
 
-- [Array](./array) - for repeating content, supports nested fields
-- [Blocks](./blocks) - for block-based content, supports nested fields
-- [Checkbox](./checkbox) - saves boolean true / false values
-- [Code](./code) - renders a code editor interface that saves a string
-- [Date](./date) - renders a date picker and saves a timestamp
-- [Email](./email) - ensures the value is a properly formatted email address
-- [Group](./group) - nests fields within a keyed object
-- [JSON](./json) - renders a JSON editor interface that saves a JSON object
-- [Number](./number) - saves numeric values
-- [Point](./point) - for location data, saves geometric coordinates
-- [Radio](./radio) - renders a radio button group that allows only one value to be selected
-- [Relationship](./relationship) - assign relationships to other collections
-- [Rich Text](./rich-text) - renders a fully extensible rich text editor
-- [Select](./select) - renders a dropdown / picklist style value selector
-- [Tabs (Named)](./tabs) - similar to group, but renders nested fields within a tabbed layout
-- [Text](./text) - simple text input that saves a string
-- [Textarea](./textarea) - similar to text, but allows for multi-line input
-- [Upload](./upload) - allows local file and image upload
+Some fields use their `name` property as a unique identifier to store and retrieve from the database. `__v`, `salt`, and `hash` are all reserved field names which are sanitized from Payload's config and cannot be used.
 
-### Presentational Fields
+## Validation
 
-Presentational Fields do not store data in the database. Instead, they are used to organize and present other fields in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), or to add custom UI components.
+Field validation is enforced automatically based on the field type and other properties such as `required` or `min` and `max` value constraints on certain field types. This default behavior can be replaced by providing your own validate function for any field. It will be used on both the frontend and the backend, so it should not rely on any Node-specific packages. The validation function can be either synchronous or asynchronous and expects to return either `true` or a string error message to display in both API responses and within the Admin panel.
 
-Here are the available Presentational Fields:
+There are two arguments available to custom validation functions.
 
-- [Collapsible](/docs/fields/collapsible) - nests fields within a collapsible component
-- [Row](/docs/fields/row) - aligns fields horizontally
-- [Tabs (Unnamed)](/docs/fields/tabs) - nests fields within a tabbed layout
-- [UI](/docs/fields/ui) - blank field for custom UI components
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  Don't see a Field Type that fits your needs? You can build your own using a [Custom Field Component](../admin/fields#the-field-component).
-</Banner>
-
-## Field Options
-
-All fields require at least the `type` property. This matches the field to its corresponding [Field Type](#field-types) to determine its appearance and behavior within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview). Each Field Type has its own unique set of options based on its own type.
-
-To set a field's type, use the `type` property in your Field Config:
-
-```ts
-import type { Field } from 'payload'
-
-export const MyField: Field = {
-  type: 'text', // highlight-line
-  name: 'myField',
-}
-```
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  For a full list of configuration options, see the documentation for each [Field Type](#field-types).
-</Banner>
-
-### Field Names
-
-All [Data Fields](#data-fields) require a `name` property. This is the key that will be used to store and retrieve the field's value in the database. This property must be unique within the Collection, Global, or nested group that it is defined in.
-
-To set a field's name, use the `name` property in your Field Config:
-
-```ts
-import type { Field } from 'payload'
-
-export const MyField: Field = {
-  type: 'text',
-  name: 'myField', // highlight-line
-}
-```
-
-Payload reserves various field names for internal use. Using reserved field names will result in your field being sanitized from the config.
-
-The following field names are forbidden and cannot be used:
-
-  - `__v`
-  - `salt`
-  - `hash`
-  - `file`
-
-### Field-level Hooks
-
-In addition to being able to define [Hooks](../hooks/overview) on a document-level, you can define extremely granular logic field-by-field.
-
-To define Field-level Hooks, use the `hooks` property in your Field Config:
-
-```ts
-import type { Field } from 'payload'
-
-export const MyField: Field = {
-  type: 'text',
-  name: 'myField',
-  // highlight-start
-  hooks: {
-    // ...
-  }
-  // highlight-end
-}
-```
-
-For full details on Field-level Hooks, see the [Field Hooks](../hooks/fields) documentation.
-
-### Field-level Access Control
-
-In addition to being able to define [Access Control](../access-control/overview) on a document-level, you can define extremely granular permissions field-by-field.
-
-To define Field-level Access Control, use the `access` property in your Field Config:
-
-```ts
-import type { Field } from 'payload'
-
-export const MyField: Field = {
-  type: 'text',
-  name: 'myField',
-  // highlight-start
-  access: {
-    // ...
-  }
-  // highlight-end
-}
-```
-
-For full details on Field-level Access Control, see the [Field Access Control](../access-control/fields) documentation.
-
-### Default Values
-
-Fields can be optionally prefilled with initial values. This is used in both the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) as well as API requests to populate missing or undefined field values during the `create` or `update` operations.
-
-To set a field's default value, use the `defaultValue` property in your Field Config:
-
-```ts
-import type { Field } from 'payload'
-
-export const MyField: Field = {
-  type: 'text',
-  name: 'myField',
-  defaultValue: 'Hello, World!', // highlight-line
-}
-```
-
-Default values can be defined as a static string or a function that returns a string. Functions are called with the following arguments:
-
-- `user` - the authenticated user object
-- `locale` - the currently selected locale string
-
-Here is an example of a `defaultValue` function:
-
-```ts
-import type { Field } from 'payload'
-
-const translation: {
-  en: 'Written by'
-  es: 'Escrito por'
-}
-
-export const myField: Field = {
-  name: 'attribution',
-  type: 'text',
-  // highlight-start
-  defaultValue: ({ user, locale }) =>
-    `${translation[locale]} ${user.name}`,
-  // highlight-end
-}
-```
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  You can use async `defaultValue` functions to fill fields with data from API requests.
-</Banner>
-
-### Validation
-
-Fields are automatically validated based on their [Field Type](#field-types) and other [Field Options](#field-options) such as `required` or `min` and `max` value constraints. If needed, however, field validations can be customized or entirely replaced by providing your own custom validation functions.
-
-To set a custom field validation function, use the `validate` property in your Field Config:
-
-```ts
-import type { Field } from 'payload'
-
-export const MyField: Field = {
-  type: 'text',
-  name: 'myField',
-  validate: value => Boolean(value) || 'This field is required' // highlight-line
-}
-```
-
-Custom validation functions should return either `true` or a `string` representing the error message to display in API responses.
-
-The following arguments are provided to the `validate` function:
-
-| Argument | Description                                                                                   |
-| -------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| `value`  | The value of the field being validated.                                                        |
-| `ctx`   | An object with additional data and context. [More details](#validation-context) |
-
-#### Validation Context
-
-The `ctx` argument contains full document data, sibling field data, the current operation, and other useful information such as currently authenticated in user:
-
-```ts
-import type { Field } from 'payload'
-
-export const MyField: Field = {
-  type: 'text',
-  name: 'myField',
-  // highlight-start
-  validate: (val, { user }) =>
-    Boolean(user) || 'You must be logged in to save this field',
-  // highlight-end
-}
-```
-
-The following additional properties are provided in the `ctx` object:
+1. The value which is currently assigned to the field
+2. An optional object with dynamic properties for more complex validation having the following:
 
 | Property      | Description                                                                                                              |
 | ------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
-| `data`        | An object containing the full collection or global document currently being edited.                                       |
-| `siblingData` | An object containing document data that is scoped to only fields within the same parent of this field.                    |
-| `operation`   | Will be `create` or `update` depending on the UI action or API call.                                                      |
-| `id`          | The `id` of the current document being edited. `id` is `undefined` during the `create` operation.                         |
-| `req`        | The current HTTP request object. Contains `payload`, `user`, etc. |
+| `data`        | An object containing the full collection or global document currently being edited                                       |
+| `siblingData` | An object containing document data that is scoped to only fields within the same parent of this field                    |
+| `operation`   | Will be `create` or `update` depending on the UI action or API call                                                      |
+| `id`          | The `id` of the current document being edited. `id` is `undefined` during the `create` operation                         |
+| `t`           | The function for translating text, [more](/docs/configuration/i18n)                                                      |
+| `user`        | An object containing the currently authenticated user                                                                    |
+| `payload`     | If the `validate` function is being executed on the server, Payload will be exposed for easily running local operations. |
 
-#### Reusing Default Field Validations
+## Example
 
-When using custom validation functions, Payload will use yours in place of the default. However, you might want to simply augment the default validation with your own custom logic.
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
-To reuse default field validations, call them from within your custom validation function:
+export const Orders: CollectionConfig = {
+  slug: 'orders',
+  fields: [
+    {
+      name: 'customerNumber',
+      type: 'text',
+      validate: async (val, { operation }) => {
+        if (operation !== 'create') {
+          // skip validation on update
+          return true
+        }
+        const response = await fetch(`https://your-api.com/customers/${val}`)
+        if (response.ok) {
+          return true
+        }
+
+        return 'The customer number provided does not match any customers within our records.'
+      },
+    },
+  ],
+}
+```
+
+When supplying a field `validate` function, Payload will use yours in place of the default. To make use of the default field validation in your custom logic you can import, call and return the result as needed.
+
+For example:
 
 ```ts
 import { text } from 'payload/fields/validations'
@@ -300,87 +130,194 @@ const field: Field = {
   name: 'notBad',
   type: 'text',
   validate: (val, args) => {
-    if (val === 'bad') return 'This cannot be "bad"'
-    return text(val, args) // highlight-line
+    if (val === 'bad') {
+      return 'This cannot be "bad"'
+    }
+    // highlight-start
+    return text(val, args)
+    // highlight-end
   },
 }
 ```
 
-#### Async Field Validations
+## Customizable ID
 
-Custom validation functions can also be asynchronous depending on your needs. This makes it possible to make requests to external services or perform other miscellaneous asynchronous logic.
+Collections ID fields are generated automatically by default. An explicit `id` field can be declared in the `fields` array to override this behavior.
+Users are then required to provide a custom ID value when creating a record through the Admin UI or API.
+Valid ID types are `number` and `text`.
 
-To write asynchronous validation functions, use the `async` keyword to define your function:
+Example:
 
 ```ts
-import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const Orders: CollectionConfig = {
-  slug: 'orders',
+{
   fields: [
     {
-      name: 'customerNumber',
-      type: 'text',
-      // highlight-start
-      validate: async (val, { operation }) => {
-        if (operation !== 'create') return true
-        const response = await fetch(`https://your-api.com/customers/${val}`)
-        if (response.ok) return true
-        return 'The customer number provided does not match any customers within our records.'
-      },
-      // highlight-end
-    },
-  ],
-}
-```
-
-### Admin Options
-
-In addition to each field's base configuration, you can use the `admin` key to specify traits and properties for fields that will only effect how they are _rendered_ within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), such as their appearance or behavior.
-
-```ts
-import type { Field } from 'payload'
-
-export const MyField: Field = {
-  type: 'text',
-  name: 'myField',
-  admin: { // highlight-line
-    // ...
-  }
-}
-```
-
-For full details on Admin Options, see the [Field Admin Options](../admin/fields) documentation.
-
-## Custom ID Fields
-
-All [Collections](../configuration/collections) automatically generate their own ID field. If needed, you can override this behavior by providing an explicit ID field to your config. This will force users to provide a their own ID value when creating a record.
-
-To define a custom ID field, add a new field with the `name` property set to `id`:
-
-```ts
-import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const MyCollection: CollectionConfig = {
-  // ...
-  fields: [
-    {
-      name: 'id', // highlight-line
+      name: 'id',
       type: 'number',
     },
   ],
 }
 ```
 
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
-  The Custom ID Fields can only be of type [`Number`](./number) or [`Text`](./text).
+## Admin config
+
+In addition to each field's base configuration, you can define specific traits and properties for fields that only have effect on how they are rendered in the Admin panel. The following properties are available for all fields within the `admin` property:
+
+| Option              | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
+| ------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| `condition`         | You can programmatically show / hide fields based on what other fields are doing. [Click here](#conditional-logic) for more info.                                                                                                |
+| `components`        | All field components can be completely and easily swapped out for custom components that you define. [Click here](#custom-components) for more info.                                                                             |
+| `description`       | Helper text to display with the field to provide more information for the editor user. [Click here](#description) for more info.                                                                                                 |
+| `position`          | Specify if the field should be rendered in the sidebar by defining `position: 'sidebar'`.                                                                                                                                        |
+| `width`             | Restrict the width of a field. you can pass any string-based value here, be it pixels, percentages, etc. This property is especially useful when fields are nested within a `Row` type where they can be organized horizontally. |
+| `style`             | Attach raw CSS style properties to the root DOM element of a field.                                                                                                                                                              |
+| `className`         | Attach a CSS class name to the root DOM element of a field.                                                                                                                                                                      |
+| `readOnly`          | Setting a field to `readOnly` has no effect on the API whatsoever but disables the admin component's editability to prevent editors from modifying the field's value.                                                            |
+| `disabled`          | If a field is `disabled`, it is completely omitted from the Admin panel.                                                                                                                                                         |
+| `disableBulkEdit`   | Set `disableBulkEdit` to `true` to prevent fields from appearing in the select options when making edits for multiple documents.                                                                                                 |
+| `disableListColumn` | Set `disableListColumn` to `true` to prevent fields from appearing in the list view column selector.                                                                                                                             |
+| `disableListFilter` | Set `disableListFilter` to `true` to prevent fields from appearing in the list view filter options.                                                                                                                              |
+| `hidden`            | Setting a field's `hidden` property on its `admin` config will transform it into a `hidden` input type. Its value will still submit with the Admin panel's requests, but the field itself will not be visible to editors.        |
+
+## Custom components
+
+All Payload fields support the ability to swap in your own React components with ease. For more information, including examples, [click here](/docs/admin/components#fields).
+
+## Conditional logic
+
+You can show and hide fields based on what other fields are doing by utilizing conditional logic on a field by field basis. The `condition` property on a field's admin config accepts a function which takes three arguments:
+
+- `data` - the entire document's data that is currently being edited
+- `siblingData` - only the fields that are direct siblings to the field with the condition
+- `{ user }` - the final argument is an object containing the currently authenticated user
+
+The `condition` function should return a boolean that will control if the field should be displayed or not.
+
+**Example:**
+
+```ts
+{
+  fields: [
+    {
+      name: 'enableGreeting',
+      type: 'checkbox',
+      defaultValue: false,
+    },
+    {
+      name: 'greeting',
+      type: 'text',
+      admin: {
+        // highlight-start
+        condition: (data, siblingData, { user }) => {
+          if (data.enableGreeting) {
+            return true
+          } else {
+            return false
+          }
+        },
+        // highlight-end
+      },
+    },
+  ]
+}
+```
+
+## Default values
+
+Fields can be prefilled with starting values using the `defaultValue` property. This is used in the admin UI and also on the backend as API requests will be populated with missing or undefined field values. You can assign the defaultValue directly in the field configuration or supply a function for dynamic behavior. Values assigned during a create request on the server are added before validation occurs.
+
+Functions are called with an optional argument object containing:
+
+- `user` - the authenticated user object
+- `locale` - the currently selected locale string
+
+Here is an example of a defaultValue function that uses both:
+
+```ts
+const translation: {
+  en: 'Written by'
+  es: 'Escrito por'
+}
+
+const field = {
+  name: 'attribution',
+  type: 'text',
+  // highlight-start
+  defaultValue: ({ user, locale }) => `${translation[locale]} ${user.name}`,
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  You can use async defaultValue functions to fill fields with data from API requests.
 </Banner>
 
+## Description
+
+A description can be configured in three ways.
+
+- As a string
+- As a function which returns a string
+- As a React component
+
+Functions are called with an optional argument object with the following shape, and React components are rendered with the following props:
+
+- `path` - the path of the field
+- `value` - the current value of the field
+
+As shown above, you can simply provide a string that will show by the field, but there are use cases where you may want to create some dynamic feedback. By using a function or a component for the `description` property you can provide realtime feedback as the user interacts with the form.
+
+**Function Example:**
+
+```ts
+{
+  fields: [
+    {
+      name: 'message',
+      type: 'text',
+      maxLength: 20,
+      admin: {
+        description: ({ path, value }) =>
+          `${typeof value === 'string' ? 20 - value.length : '20'} characters left (field: ${path})`,
+      },
+    },
+  ]
+}
+```
+
+This example will display the number of characters allowed as the user types.
+
+**Component Example:**
+
+```ts
+{
+  fields: [
+    {
+      name: 'message',
+      type: 'text',
+      maxLength: 20,
+      admin: {
+        description:
+          ({ path, value }) => (
+            <div>
+              Character count:
+              {' '}
+              { value?.length || 0 }
+               (field: {path})
+            </div>
+          )
+      }
+    }
+  ]
+}
+```
+
+This component will count the number of characters entered, as well as display the path of the field.
+
 ## TypeScript
 
-You can import the Payload `Field` type as well as other common types from the `payload` package. [More details](../typescript/overview).
+You can import the internal Payload `Field` type as well as other common field types as follows:
 
 ```ts
-import type { Field } from 'payload'
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
 ```

docs/fields/point.mdx

@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ label: Point
 order: 110
 desc: The Point field type stores coordinates in the database. Learn how to use Point field for geolocation and geometry.
 
-keywords: point, geolocation, geospatial, geojson, 2dsphere, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: point, geolocation, geospatial, geojson, 2dsphere, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
 <Banner>
@@ -19,31 +19,30 @@ keywords: point, geolocation, geospatial, geojson, 2dsphere, config, configurati
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/point.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/point-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Point field in the Payload Admin Panel"
-  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Point field"
+  alt="Shows a Point field in the Payload admin panel"
+  caption="Admin panel screenshot of a Point field"
 />
 
 The data structure in the database matches the GeoJSON structure to represent point. The Payload APIs simplifies the object data to only the [longitude, latitude] location.
 
 ## Config
 
-| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                               |
-| ---------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                    |
-| **`label`**            | Used as a field label in the Admin Panel and to name the generated GraphQL type.                                                                                                          |
-| **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                              |
-| **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. To support location queries, point index defaults to `2dsphere`, to disable the index set to `false`. |
-| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                              |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                                             |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                                          |
-| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                                      |
-| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                                           |
-| **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                                       |
-| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                                 |
-| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                 |
-| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                               |
+| Option             | Description                                                                                                                                                                               |
+| ------------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** \*      | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                    |
+| **`label`**        | Used as a field label in the Admin panel and to name the generated GraphQL type.                                                                                                          |
+| **`unique`**       | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                              |
+| **`index`**        | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. To support location queries, point index defaults to `2dsphere`, to disable the index set to `false`. |
+| **`validate`**     | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                              |
+| **`saveToJWT`**    | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                                             |
+| **`hooks`**        | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                                |
+| **`access`**       | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                                   |
+| **`hidden`**       | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.                                          |
+| **`defaultValue`** | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                                      |
+| **`localized`**    | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                                           |
+| **`required`**     | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                                       |
+| **`admin`**        | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                                 |
+| **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                 |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
@@ -56,7 +55,7 @@ _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/radio.mdx

@@ -3,41 +3,40 @@ title: Radio Group Field
 label: Radio Group
 order: 120
 desc: The Radio field type allows for the selection of one value from a predefined set of possible values. Learn how to use Radio fields, see examples and options.
-keywords: radio, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: radio, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
 <Banner>
   The Radio Group field type allows for the selection of one value from a predefined set of possible
-  values and presents a radio group-style set of inputs to the Admin Panel.
+  values and presents a radio group-style set of inputs to the Admin panel.
 </Banner>
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/radio.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/radio-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Radio field in the Payload Admin Panel"
-  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Radio field"
+  alt="Shows a Radio field in the Payload admin panel"
+  caption="Admin panel screenshot of a Radio field"
 />
 
 ## Config
 
-| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
-| ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
-| **`options`** \*       | Array of options to allow the field to store. Can either be an array of strings, or an array of objects containing an `label` string and a `value` string.                  |
-| **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
-| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
-| **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
-| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. The default value must exist within provided values in `options`. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)      |
-| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
-| **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                   |
-| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
-| **`enumName`**         | Custom enum name for this field when using SQL Database Adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from name if not defined.                             |
-| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
+| Option             | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
+| ------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** \*      | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
+| **`options`** \*   | Array of options to allow the field to store. Can either be an array of strings, or an array of objects containing an `label` string and a `value` string.                  |
+| **`label`**        | Text used as a field label in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
+| **`validate`**     | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
+| **`index`**        | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
+| **`saveToJWT`**    | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
+| **`hooks`**        | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
+| **`access`**       | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
+| **`hidden`**       | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.                            |
+| **`defaultValue`** | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. The default value must exist within provided values in `options`. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)      |
+| **`localized`**    | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
+| **`required`**     | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`admin`**        | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                   |
+| **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
+| **`enumName`**     | Custom enum name for this field when using SQL database adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from name if not defined.
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
@@ -63,7 +62,7 @@ The `layout` property allows for the radio group to be styled as a horizonally o
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/relationship.mdx

@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ title: Relationship Field
 label: Relationship
 order: 130
 desc: The Relationship field provides the ability to relate documents together. Learn how to use Relationship fields, see examples and options.
-keywords: relationship, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: relationship, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
 <Banner>
@@ -14,8 +14,8 @@ keywords: relationship, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Ma
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/relationship.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/relationship-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a relationship field in the Payload Admin Panel"
-  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Relationship field"
+  alt="Shows a relationship field in the Payload admin panel"
+  caption="Admin panel screenshot of a Relationship field"
 />
 
 **Example uses:**
@@ -26,36 +26,35 @@ keywords: relationship, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Ma
 
 ## Config
 
-| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                     |
-| ---------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                          |
-| **`relationTo`** \*    | Provide one or many collection `slug`s to be able to assign relationships to.                                                                                                   |
-| **`filterOptions`**    | A query to filter which options appear in the UI and validate against. [More](#filtering-relationship-options).                                                                 |
-| **`hasMany`**          | Boolean when, if set to `true`, allows this field to have many relations instead of only one.                                                                                   |
-| **`minRows`**          | A number for the fewest allowed items during validation when a value is present. Used with `hasMany`.                                                                           |
-| **`maxRows`**          | A number for the most allowed items during validation when a value is present. Used with `hasMany`.                                                                             |
-| **`maxDepth`**         | Sets a maximum population depth for this field, regardless of the remaining depth when this field is reached. [Max Depth](/docs/getting-started/concepts#field-level-max-depth) |
-| **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                         |
-| **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                    |
-| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                    |
-| **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often.     |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                                   |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                                |
-| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                            |
-| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                                 |
-| **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                             |
-| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See the [default field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config) for more details.                                                        |
-| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                       |
-| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                     |
+| Option              | Description                                                                                                                                                                    |
+|---------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| **`name`** \*       | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                         |
+| **`relationTo`** \* | Provide one or many collection `slug`s to be able to assign relationships to.                                                                                                  |
+| **`filterOptions`** | A query to filter which options appear in the UI and validate against. [More](#filtering-relationship-options).                                                                |
+| **`hasMany`**       | Boolean when, if set to `true`, allows this field to have many relations instead of only one.                                                                                  |
+| **`minRows`**       | A number for the fewest allowed items during validation when a value is present. Used with `hasMany`.                                                                          |
+| **`maxRows`**       | A number for the most allowed items during validation when a value is present. Used with `hasMany`.                                                                            |
+| **`maxDepth`**      | Sets a maximum population depth for this field, regardless of the remaining depth when this field is reached. [Max Depth](/docs/getting-started/concepts#field-level-max-depth) |
+| **`label`**         | Text used as a field label in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                        |
+| **`unique`**        | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                   |
+| **`validate`**      | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                   |
+| **`index`**         | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often.    |
+| **`saveToJWT`**     | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                                  |
+| **`hooks`**         | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                     |
+| **`access`**        | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                        |
+| **`hidden`**        | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.                               |
+| **`defaultValue`**  | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                           |
+| **`localized`**     | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                                |
+| **`required`**      | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                            |
+| **`admin`**         | Admin-specific configuration. See the [default field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config) for more details.                                                       |
+| **`custom`**        | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                      |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 <Banner type="success">
   <strong>Tip:</strong>
   <br />
-  The [Depth](../queries/depth) parameter can be used to automatically populate
+  The [Depth](/docs/getting-started/concepts#depth) parameter can be used to automatically populate
   related documents that are returned by the API.
 </Banner>
 
@@ -143,7 +142,7 @@ called with an argument object with the following properties:
 ## Example
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/rich-text.mdx

@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ title: Rich Text Field
 label: Rich Text
 order: 140
 desc: The Rich Text field allows dynamic content to be written through the Admin Panel. Learn how to use Rich Text fields, see examples and options.
-keywords: rich text, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: rich text, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
 <Banner>
@@ -14,8 +14,8 @@ keywords: rich text, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Manag
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/richtext.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/richtext-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Rich Text field in the Payload Admin Panel"
-  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Rich Text field"
+  alt="Shows a Rich Text field in the Payload admin panel"
+  caption="Admin panel screenshot of a Rich Text field"
 />
 
 Payload's rich text field is built on an "adapter pattern" which lets you specify which rich text editor you'd like to use.
@@ -28,10 +28,7 @@ Right now, Payload is officially supporting two rich text editors:
 <Banner type="success">
   <strong>
     Consistent with Payload's goal of making you learn as little of Payload as possible, customizing
-    and using the Rich Text Editor does not involve learning how to develop for a
-    {' '}
-    <em>Payload</em>
-    {' '}
+    and using the Rich Text Editor does not involve learning how to develop for a <em>Payload</em>{' '}
     rich text editor.
   </strong>
 
@@ -41,22 +38,21 @@ Right now, Payload is officially supporting two rich text editors:
 
 ## Config
 
-| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                             |
-| ---------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                  |
-| **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                 |
-| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)            |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.           |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.        |
-| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                    |
-| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                         |
-| **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                     |
-| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                               |
-| **`editor`**           | Override the rich text editor specified in your base configuration for this field.                                                                      |
-| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                               |
-| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                             |
+| Option             | Description                                                                                                                                             |
+| ------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** \*      | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                  |
+| **`label`**        | Text used as a field label in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                 |
+| **`validate`**     | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)            |
+| **`saveToJWT`**    | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.           |
+| **`hooks`**        | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                              |
+| **`access`**       | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control) |
+| **`hidden`**       | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.        |
+| **`defaultValue`** | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                    |
+| **`localized`**    | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                         |
+| **`required`**     | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                     |
+| **`admin`**        | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                               |
+| **`editor`**       | Override the rich text editor specified in your base configuration for this field.                                                                      |
+| **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                               |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
@@ -70,11 +66,11 @@ Set this property to define a placeholder string in the text input.
 
 **`hideGutter`**
 
-Set this property to `true` to hide this field's gutter within the Admin Panel. The field gutter is rendered as a vertical line and padding, but often if this field is nested within a Group, Block, or Array, you may want to hide the gutter.
+Set this property to `true` to hide this field's gutter within the admin panel. The field gutter is rendered as a vertical line and padding, but often if this field is nested within a Group, Block, or Array, you may want to hide the gutter.
 
 **`rtl`**
 
-Override the default text direction of the Admin Panel for this field. Set to `true` to force right-to-left text direction.
+Override the default text direction of the Admin panel for this field. Set to `true` to force right-to-left text direction.
 
 ## Editor-specific options
 

docs/fields/row.mdx

@@ -3,19 +3,19 @@ title: Row Field
 label: Row
 order: 150
 desc: With the Row field you can arrange fields next to each other in the Admin Panel to help you customize your Dashboard.
-keywords: row, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: row, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
 <Banner>
-  The Row field is presentational-only and only affects the Admin Panel. By using it, you can
+  The Row field is presentational-only and only affects the Admin panel. By using it, you can
   arrange fields next to each other horizontally.
 </Banner>
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/row.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/row-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a row field in the Payload Admin Panel"
-  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Row field"
+  alt="Shows a row field in the Payload admin panel"
+  caption="Admin panel screenshot of a Row field"
 />
 
 ## Config
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/select.mdx

@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ title: Select Field
 label: Select
 order: 160
 desc: The Select field provides a dropdown-style interface for choosing options from a predefined list. Learn how to use Select fields, see examples and options.
-keywords: select, multi-select, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: select, multi-select, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
 <Banner>
@@ -14,33 +14,32 @@ keywords: select, multi-select, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Co
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/select.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/select-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Select field in the Payload Admin Panel"
-  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Select field"
+  alt="Shows a Select field in the Payload admin panel"
+  caption="Admin panel screenshot of a Select field"
 />
 
 ## Config
 
-| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                   |
-| ---------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                        |
-| **`options`** \*       | Array of options to allow the field to store. Can either be an array of strings, or an array of objects containing a `label` string and a `value` string.                     |
-| **`hasMany`**          | Boolean when, if set to `true`, allows this field to have many selections instead of only one.                                                                                |
-| **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                       |
-| **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                  |
-| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                  |
-| **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often.   |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                                 |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                              |
-| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                          |
-| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                               |
-| **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                           |
-| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See the [default field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config) for more details.                                                      |
-| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                     |
-| **`enumName`**         | Custom enum name for this field when using SQL Database Adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from name if not defined.                               |
-| **`dbName`**           | Custom table name (if `hasMany` set to `true`) for this field when using SQL Database Adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from name if not defined. |
-| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                   |
+| Option             | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
+| ------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** \*      | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
+| **`options`** \*   | Array of options to allow the field to store. Can either be an array of strings, or an array of objects containing a `label` string and a `value` string.                   |
+| **`hasMany`**      | Boolean when, if set to `true`, allows this field to have many selections instead of only one.                                                                              |
+| **`label`**        | Text used as a field label in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
+| **`unique`**       | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
+| **`validate`**     | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
+| **`index`**        | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
+| **`saveToJWT`**    | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
+| **`hooks`**        | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
+| **`access`**       | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
+| **`hidden`**       | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.                            |
+| **`defaultValue`** | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
+| **`localized`**    | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
+| **`required`**     | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`admin`**        | Admin-specific configuration. See the [default field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config) for more details.                                                    |
+| **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
+| **`enumName`**     | Custom enum name for this field when using SQL database adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from name if not defined.                               |
+| **`dbName`**       | Custom table name (if `hasMany` set to `true`) for this field when using SQL database adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from name if not defined. |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
@@ -70,7 +69,7 @@ Set to `true` if you'd like this field to be sortable within the Admin UI using
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/tabs.mdx

@@ -3,11 +3,11 @@ title: Tabs Field
 label: Tabs
 order: 170
 desc: The Tabs field is a great way to organize complex editing experiences into specific tab-based areas.
-keywords: tabs, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: tabs, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
 <Banner>
-  The Tabs field is presentational-only and only affects the Admin Panel (unless a tab is named). By
+  The Tabs field is presentational-only and only affects the Admin panel (unless a tab is named). By
   using it, you can place fields within a nice layout component that separates certain sub-fields by
   a tabbed interface.
 </Banner>
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ keywords: tabs, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/tabs.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/tabs-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a tabs field used to separate Hero and Page layout in the Payload Admin Panel"
+  alt="Shows a tabs field used to separate Hero and Page layout in the Payload admin panel"
   caption="Tabs field type used to separate Hero fields from Page Layout"
 />
 
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/text.mdx

@@ -2,46 +2,45 @@
 title: Text Field
 label: Text
 order: 180
-desc: Text field types simply save a string to the database and provide the Admin Panel with a text input. Learn how to use Text fields, see examples and options.
-keywords: text, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+desc: Text field types simply save a string to the database and provide the Admin panel with a text input. Learn how to use Text fields, see examples and options.
+keywords: text, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
 <Banner>
   The Text field type is one of the most commonly used fields. It saves a string to the database and
-  provides the Admin Panel with a simple text input.
+  provides the Admin panel with a simple text input.
 </Banner>
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/text.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/text-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a text field and read-only text field in the Payload Admin Panel"
-  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Text field and read-only Text field"
+  alt="Shows a text field and read-only text field in the Payload admin panel"
+  caption="Admin panel screenshot of a Text field and read-only Text field"
 />
 
 ## Config
 
-| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
-| ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
-| **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
-| **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
-| **`minLength`**        | Used by the default validation function to ensure values are of a minimum character length.                                                                                 |
-| **`maxLength`**        | Used by the default validation function to ensure values are of a maximum character length.                                                                                 |
-| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
-| **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
-| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
-| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
-| **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                   |
-| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
-| **`hasMany`**          | Makes this field an ordered array of text instead of just a single text.                                                                                                    |
-| **`minRows`**          | Minimum number of texts in the array, if `hasMany` is set to true.                                                                                                          |
-| **`maxRows`**          | Maximum number of texts in the array, if `hasMany` is set to true.                                                                                                          |
-| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
+| Option             | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
+| ------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** \*      | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
+| **`label`**        | Text used as a field label in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
+| **`unique`**       | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
+| **`minLength`**    | Used by the default validation function to ensure values are of a minimum character length.                                                                                 |
+| **`maxLength`**    | Used by the default validation function to ensure values are of a maximum character length.                                                                                 |
+| **`validate`**     | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
+| **`index`**        | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
+| **`saveToJWT`**    | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
+| **`hooks`**        | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
+| **`access`**       | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
+| **`hidden`**       | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.                            |
+| **`defaultValue`** | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
+| **`localized`**    | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
+| **`required`**     | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`admin`**        | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                   |
+| **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
+| **`hasMany`**      | Makes this field an ordered array of text instead of just a single text.                                                                                                    |
+| **`minRows`**      | Minimum number of texts in the array, if `hasMany` is set to true.                                                                                                          |
+| **`maxRows`**      | Maximum number of texts in the array, if `hasMany` is set to true.                                                                                                          |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
@@ -59,14 +58,14 @@ Set this property to a string that will be used for browser autocomplete.
 
 **`rtl`**
 
-Override the default text direction of the Admin Panel for this field. Set to `true` to force right-to-left text direction.
+Override the default text direction of the Admin panel for this field. Set to `true` to force right-to-left text direction.
 
 ## Example
 
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/textarea.mdx

@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ title: Textarea Field
 label: Textarea
 order: 190
 desc: Textarea field types save a string to the database, similar to the Text field type but equipped for longer text. Learn how to use Textarea fields, see examples and options.
-keywords: textarea, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: textarea, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
 <Banner>
@@ -14,31 +14,30 @@ keywords: textarea, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Manage
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/textarea.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/textarea-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a textarea field and read-only textarea field in the Payload Admin Panel"
-  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Textarea field and read-only Textarea field"
+  alt="Shows a textarea field and read-only textarea field in the Payload admin panel"
+  caption="Admin panel screenshot of a Textarea field and read-only Textarea field"
 />
 
 ## Config
 
-| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
-| ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
-| **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
-| **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
-| **`minLength`**        | Used by the default validation function to ensure values are of a minimum character length.                                                                                 |
-| **`maxLength`**        | Used by the default validation function to ensure values are of a maximum character length.                                                                                 |
-| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
-| **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
-| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
-| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
-| **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                   |
-| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
-| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
+| Option             | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
+| ------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** \*      | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
+| **`label`**        | Text used as a field label in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
+| **`unique`**       | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
+| **`minLength`**    | Used by the default validation function to ensure values are of a minimum character length.                                                                                 |
+| **`maxLength`**    | Used by the default validation function to ensure values are of a maximum character length.                                                                                 |
+| **`validate`**     | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
+| **`index`**        | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
+| **`saveToJWT`**    | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
+| **`hooks`**        | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
+| **`access`**       | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
+| **`hidden`**       | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.                            |
+| **`defaultValue`** | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
+| **`localized`**    | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
+| **`required`**     | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`admin`**        | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                   |
+| **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
@@ -56,14 +55,14 @@ Set this property to a string that will be used for browser autocomplete.
 
 **`rtl`**
 
-Override the default text direction of the Admin Panel for this field. Set to `true` to force right-to-left text direction.
+Override the default text direction of the Admin panel for this field. Set to `true` to force right-to-left text direction.
 
 ## Example
 
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/ui.mdx

@@ -2,25 +2,25 @@
 title: UI Field
 label: UI
 order: 200
-desc: UI fields are purely presentational and allow developers to customize the Admin Panel to a very fine degree, including adding actions and other functions.
-keywords: custom field, react component, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+desc: UI fields are purely presentational and allow developers to customize the admin panel to a very fine degree, including adding actions and other functions.
+keywords: custom field, react component, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
 <Banner>
   The UI (user interface) field gives you a ton of power to add your own React components directly
-  into the Admin Panel, nested directly within your other fields. It has absolutely no effect on the
+  into the Admin panel, nested directly within your other fields. It has absolutely no effect on the
   data of your documents. It is presentational-only.
 </Banner>
 
-This field is helpful if you need to build in custom functionality via React components within the Admin Panel. Think of it as a way for you to "plug in" your own React components directly within your other fields, so you can provide your editors with new controls exactly where you want them to go.
+This field is helpful if you need to build in custom functionality via React components within the Admin panel. Think of it as a way for you to "plug in" your own React components directly within your other fields, so you can provide your editors with new controls exactly where you want them to go.
 
 With this field, you can also inject custom `Cell` components that appear as additional columns within collections' List views.
 
 **Example uses:**
 
-- Add a custom message or block of text within the body of an Edit View to describe the purpose of surrounding fields
-- Add a "Refund" button to an Order's Edit View sidebar, which might make a fetch call to a custom `refund` endpoint
-- Add a "view page" button into a Pages List View to give editors a shortcut to view a page on the frontend of the site
+- Add a custom message or block of text within the body of an Edit view to describe the purpose of surrounding fields
+- Add a "Refund" button to an Order's Edit view sidebar, which might make a fetch call to a custom `refund` endpoint
+- Add a "view page" button into a Pages List view to give editors a shortcut to view a page on the frontend of the site
 - Build a "clear cache" button or similar mechanism to manually clear caches of specific documents
 
 ## Config
@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ With this field, you can also inject custom `Cell` components that appear as add
 | ------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
 | **`name`** \*                   | A unique identifier for this field.                                                                                    |
 | **`label`**                     | Human-readable label for this UI field.                                                                                |
-| **`admin.components.Field`** \* | React component to be rendered for this field within the Edit View. [More](/docs/admin/components/#field-component)    |
+| **`admin.components.Field`** \* | React component to be rendered for this field within the Edit view. [More](/docs/admin/components/#field-component)    |
 | **`admin.components.Cell`**     | React component to be rendered as a Cell within collection List views. [More](/docs/admin/components/#field-component) |
 | **`admin.disableListColumn`**   | Set `disableListColumn` to `true` to prevent the UI field from appearing in the list view column selector.             |
 | **`custom`**                    | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                              |
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/upload.mdx

@@ -3,12 +3,12 @@ title: Upload Field
 label: Upload
 order: 210
 desc: Upload fields will allow a file to be uploaded, only from a collection supporting Uploads. Learn how to use Upload fields, see examples and options.
-keywords: upload, images media, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: upload, images media, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
 <Banner>
   The Upload field allows for the selection of a Document from a collection supporting Uploads, and
-  formats the selection as a thumbnail in the Admin Panel.
+  formats the selection as a thumbnail in the Admin panel.
 </Banner>
 
 <Banner type="warning">
@@ -22,8 +22,8 @@ keywords: upload, images media, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Co
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/upload.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/upload-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows an upload field in the Payload Admin Panel"
-  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of an Upload field"
+  alt="Shows an upload field in the Payload admin panel"
+  caption="Admin panel screenshot of an Upload field"
 />
 
 **Example uses:**
@@ -34,26 +34,25 @@ keywords: upload, images media, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Co
 
 ## Config
 
-| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
-| ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
-| **`*relationTo`** \*   | Provide a single collection `slug` to allow this field to accept a relation to. <strong>Note: the related collection must be configured to support Uploads.</strong>        |
-| **`filterOptions`**    | A query to filter which options appear in the UI and validate against. [More](#filtering-upload-options).                                                                   |
-| **`maxDepth`**         | Sets a number limit on iterations of related documents to populate when queried. [Depth](../queries/depth)                                              |
-| **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
-| **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
-| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
-| **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
-| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
-| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
-| **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See the [default field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config) for more details.                                                    |
-| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
-| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
+| Option               | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
+| -------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** \*        | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
+| **`*relationTo`** \* | Provide a single collection `slug` to allow this field to accept a relation to. <strong>Note: the related collection must be configured to support Uploads.</strong>        |
+| **`filterOptions`**  | A query to filter which options appear in the UI and validate against. [More](#filtering-upload-options).                                                                   |
+| **`maxDepth`**       | Sets a number limit on iterations of related documents to populate when queried. [Depth](/docs/getting-started/concepts#depth)                                              |
+| **`label`**          | Text used as a field label in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
+| **`unique`**         | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
+| **`validate`**       | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
+| **`index`**          | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
+| **`saveToJWT`**      | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
+| **`hooks`**          | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
+| **`access`**         | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
+| **`hidden`**         | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.                            |
+| **`defaultValue`**   | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
+| **`localized`**      | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
+| **`required`**       | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`admin`**          | Admin-specific configuration. See the [default field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config) for more details.                                                    |
+| **`custom`**         | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
@@ -62,7 +61,7 @@ _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/getting-started/concepts.mdx

@@ -3,181 +3,184 @@ title: Payload Concepts
 label: Concepts
 order: 20
 desc: Payload is based around a small and intuitive set of concepts. Key concepts include collections, globals, fields and more.
-keywords: documentation, getting started, guide, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: documentation, getting started, guide, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
-Payload is based around a small and intuitive set of high-level concepts. Before starting to work with Payload, it's a good idea to familiarize yourself with these concepts in order to establish a common language and understanding when discussing Payload.
+Payload is based around a small and intuitive set of concepts. Before starting to work with Payload, it's a good idea to familiarize yourself with the following:
 
 ## Config
 
-The Payload Config is central to everything that Payload does. It allows for the deep configuration of your application through a simple and intuitive API. The Payload Config is a fully-typed JavaScript object that can be infinitely extended upon. [More details](../configuration/overview).
+<Banner type="info">The Payload config is where you configure everything that Payload does.</Banner>
 
-## Database
-
-Payload is database agnostic, meaning you can use any type of database behind Payload's familiar APIs through what is known as a Database Adapter. [More details](../database/overview).
+By default, the Payload config lives in the root folder of your code and is named `payload.config.js` (`payload.config.ts` if you're using TypeScript), but you can customize its name and where you store it. You can write full functions and even full React components right into your config.
 
 ## Collections
 
-A Collection is a group of records, called Documents, that all share a common schema. Each Collection saves to the [Database](../database/overview) based on the [Fields](../fields/overview) that you define. [More details](../configuration/collections).
+<Banner type="info">
+  A Collection represents a type of content that Payload will store and can contain many documents.
+</Banner>
+
+Collections define the shape of your data as well as all functionalities attached to that data. They will contain one or many "documents", all corresponding with the same fields and functionalities that you define.
+
+They can represent anything you can store in a database - for example - pages, posts, users, people, orders, categories, events, customers, transactions, and anything else your app needs.
 
 ## Globals
 
-Globals are in many ways similar to [Collections](../configuration/collections), except they correspond to only a single Document. Each Global saves to the [Database](../database/overview) based on the [Fields](../fields/overview) that you define. [More details](../configuration/globals).
+<Banner type="info">
+  A Global is a "one-off" piece of content that is perfect for storing navigational structures,
+  themes, top-level meta data, and more.
+</Banner>
+
+Globals are in many ways similar to Collections, but there is only ever **one** instance of a Global, whereas Collections can contain many documents.
 
 ## Fields
 
-Fields are the building blocks of Payload. They define the schema of the Documents that will be stored in the [Database](../database/overview), as well as automatically generate the corresponding UI within the Admin Panel. [More details](../fields/overview).
+<Banner type="info">
+  Fields are the building blocks of Payload. Collections and Globals both use Fields to define the
+  shape of the data that they store.
+</Banner>
+
+Payload comes with [many different field types](../fields/overview) that give you a ton of flexibility while designing your API. Each Field type has its own potential properties that allow you to customize how they work.
 
 ## Hooks
 
-Hooks allow you to execute your own logic during specific events of the Document lifecycle, such as read or update. [More details](../hooks/overview).
+<Banner type="info">
+  Hooks are where you can "tie in" to existing Payload actions to perform your own additional logic
+  or modify how Payload operates altogether.
+</Banner>
+
+Hooks are an extremely powerful concept and are central to extending and customizing your app. Payload provides a wide variety of hooks which you can utilize. For example, imagine if you'd like to send an email every time a document is created in your Orders collection. To do so, you can add an `afterChange` hook function to your Orders collection that receives the Order data and allows you to send an email accordingly.
+
+There are many more potential reasons to use Hooks. For more, visit the [Hooks documentation](/docs/hooks/overview).
 
 ## Access Control
 
-Access Control determines what a user can and cannot do with any given Document. [More details](../access-control/overview).
-
-## Admin Panel
-
-Payload dynamically generates a beautiful, fully type-safe interface to manage your users and data. The Admin Panel is a React application built using the Next.js App Router. [More details](../admin/overview).
-
-## Plugins
-
-Plugins allow for developers to easily inject custom—sometimes complex—functionality into Payload apps from a very small touch-point. [More details](../plugins/overview).
-
-## Retrieving Data
-
-Everything Payload does (create, read, update, delete, login, logout, etc) is exposed to you via three APIs:
-
-- [Local API](#local-api) - Extremely fast, direct-to-database access
-- [REST API](#rest-api) - Standard HTTP endpoints for querying and mutating data
-- [GraphQL](#graphql) - A full GraphQL API with a GraphQL Playground
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Note:</strong>
-  All of these APIs share the exact same query language. [More details](../queries/overview).
+<Banner type="info">
+  Access Control refers to Payload's system of defining who can do what to your API.
 </Banner>
 
-### Local API
+Access Control is extremely powerful but easy and intuitive to manage. You can easily define your own full-blown RBAC (role-based access control) or any other access control pattern that your scenario requires. No conventions or structure is forced on you whatsoever.
 
-By far one of the most powerful aspects of Payload is the fact that it gives you direct-to-database access to your data through the [Local API](../local-api/overview). It's _extremely_ fast and does not incur any typical REST API / GraphQL / HTTP overhead—you query your database directly in Node.js.
+For more, visit the [Access Control documentation](/docs/access-control/overview).
 
-The Local API is written in TypeScript, and so it is strongly typed and extremely nice to use. It works anywhere on the server, including custom Next.js Routes, Payload Hooks, Payload Access Control, and React Server Components.
+## Depth
 
-Here's a quick example of a React Server Component fetching page data with Payload's Local API:
+<Banner type="info">
+  "Depth" gives you control over how many levels down related documents should be automatically
+  populated when retrieved.
+</Banner>
 
-```tsx
-import React from 'react'
-import config from '@payload-config'
-import { getPayloadHMR } from '@payloadcms/next'
+You can specify population `depth` via query parameter in the REST API and by an option in the local API. _Depth has no effect in the GraphQL API, because there, depth is based on the shape of your queries._
+It is also possible to limit the depth for specific `relation` and `upload` fields using the `maxDepth` property in your configuration.
+**For example, let's look at the following Collections:** `departments`, `users`, `posts`
 
-const MyServerComponent: React.FC = () => {
-  // If you're working in Next.js, and you want HMR,
-  // you should get Payload via the `getPayloadHMR` function.
-  const payload = await getPayloadHMR({ config })
+```
+// type: 'relationship' fields are equal to 1 depth level
 
-  // If you are writing a standalone script and do not need HMR,
-  // you can get Payload via import { getPayload } from 'payload' instead.
+{
+	slug: 'posts',
+	fields: [
+		{
+			name: 'title',
+			type: 'text',
+		},
+		{
+			name: 'author',
+			label: 'Post Author',
+			type: 'relationship',
+			relationTo: 'users',
+		}
+	]
+}
 
-  // The `findResult` here will be fully typed as `PaginatedDocs<Page>`,
-  // where you will have the `docs` that are returned as well as
-  // information about how many items are returned / are available in total / etc
-  const findResult = await payload.find({ collection: 'pages' })
+{
+	slug: 'users',
+	fields: [
+		{
+			name: 'email',
+			type: 'email',
+		},
+		{
+			name: 'department'
+			type: 'relationship',
+			relationTo: 'departments'
+		}
+	]
+}
 
-  return (
-    <ul>
-      {findResult.docs.map((page) => {
-        // Render whatever here!
-        // The `page` is fully typed as your Pages collection!
-      })}
-    </ul>
-  )
+{
+	slug: 'departments',
+	fields: [
+		{
+			name: 'name'
+			type: 'text',
+		}
+	]
 }
 ```
 
-<Banner type="info">
-  For more information about the Local API, [click here](../local-api/overview).
-</Banner>
+If you were to query the Posts endpoint at, say, `http://localhost:3000/api/posts?depth=1`, you will retrieve Posts with populations one level deep. This depth parameter can be thought of as N, where N is the number of levels you want to populate. To populate one level further, you would simply specify N+1 as the depth. A returned result may look like the following:
 
-### REST API
+```
+// ?depth=1
 
-By default, the Payload [REST API](../rest-api/overview) will be mounted automatically for you at the `/api` path of your app.
-
-For example, if you have a [Collection](../configuration/collections) called `pages`:
-
-```ts
-fetch('https://localhost:3000/api/pages') // highlight-line
-  .then((res) => res.json())
-  .then((data) => console.log(data))
+{
+  id: '5ae8f9bde69e394e717c8832',
+  title: 'This post sucks',
+  author: {
+    id: '5f7dd05cd50d4005f8bcab17',
+    email: 'spiderman@superheroes.gov',
+    department: '5e3ca05cd50d4005f8bdab15'
+  }
+}
 ```
 
-<Banner type="info">
-  For more information about the REST API, [click here](../rest-api/overview).
-</Banner>
+Notice how the `user.author` is fully populated, but `user.author.department` is left as a document ID? That's because the User collection counted as the first level of `depth` and got populated—but then prevented any further populations from taking place.
 
-### GraphQL API
+To populate `user.author.department` in it's entirety you could specify `?depth=2` or _higher_.
 
-Payload automatically exposes GraphQL queries and mutations for everything it does through a dedicated [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview).
+```
+// ?depth=2
 
-By default, you'll find the GraphQL route handler in your `/app/(payload)/api/graphql` folder, which makes the GraphQL endpoint available by default at `http://localhost:3000/api/graphql`.
+{
+  id: '5ae8f9bde69e394e717c8832',
+  title: 'This post sucks',
+  author: {
+    id: '5f7dd05cd50d4005f8bcab17',
+    email: 'spiderman@superheroes.gov',
+    department: {
+      id: '5e3ca05cd50d4005f8bdab15',
+      name: 'Marvel'
+    }
+  }
+}
+```
 
-You'll also find a full GraphQL Playground which can be accessible via `http://localhost:3000/api/graphql-playground`.
+### Field-level max depth
 
-You can use any GraphQL client with Payload's GraphQL endpoint. Here are a few packages:
+Fields like relationships or uploads can have a `maxDepth` property that limits the depth of the population for that field. Here are some examples:
 
-- [`graphql-request`](https://www.npmjs.com/package/graphql-request) - a very lightweight GraphQL client
-- [`@apollo/client`](https://www.apollographql.com/docs/react/api/core/ApolloClient/) - an industry-standard GraphQL client with lots of nice features
+Depth: 10
+Current depth when field is accessed: 1
+`maxDepth`: undefined
 
-If you don't use GraphQL, you can delete those files! But if you do, you'll find that GraphQL is a first-class API in Payload. Either way, the overhead of GraphQL is completely constrained to these endpoints, and will not slow down / affect Payload outside of those endpoints themselves.
+In this case, the field would be populated to 9 levels of population.
 
-<Banner type="info">
-  For more information about the GraphQL API, [click here](../graphql/overview).
-</Banner>
+Depth: 10
+Current depth when field is accessed: 0
+`maxDepth`: 2
 
-### Depth
+In this case, the field would be populated to 2 levels of population, despite there being a remaining depth of 8.
 
-Documents can be related to other Documents through a concept called "relationships". When you query a Document, you can specify these relationships are populated. [More details](../queries/depth).
+Depth: 10
+Current depth when field is accessed: 2
+`maxDepth`: 1
 
-## Package Structure
-
-Payload is abstracted into a set of dedicated packages to keep the core `payload` package as lightweight as possible. This allows you to only install the parts of Payload based on your unique project requirements.
+In this case, the field would not be populated, as the current depth (2) has exceeded the `maxDepth` for this field (1).
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Important:</strong>
-  Version numbers of all official Payload packages are always published in sync. You should make sure that you always use matching versions for all official Payload packages.
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  <br />
+  When access control on collections prevents relationship fields from populating, the API response
+  will contain the relationship id instead of the full document.
 </Banner>
-
-`payload`
-
-The `payload` package is where core business logic for Payload lives. You can think of Payload as an ORM with superpowers—it contains the logic for all Payload "operations" like `find`, `create`, `update`, and `delete` and exposes a [Local API](../local-api/overview). It executes [Access Control](../access-control/overview), [Hooks](../hooks/overview), [Validation](../fields/overview#validation), and more.
-
-Payload itself is extremely compact, and can be used in any Node environment. As long as you have `payload` installed and you have access to your Payload Config, you can query and mutate your database directly without going through an unnecessary HTTP layer.
-
-Payload also contains all TypeScript definitions, which can be imported from `payload` directly.
-
-Here's how to import some common Payload types:
-
-```ts
-import { Config, CollectionConfig, GlobalConfig, Field } from 'payload'
-```
-
-`@payloadcms/next`
-
-Whereas Payload itself is responsible for direct database access, and control over Payload business logic, the `@payloadcms/next` package is responsible for the Admin Panel and the entire HTTP layer that Payload exposes, including the [REST API](../rest-api/overview) and [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview).
-
-`@payloadcms/graphql`
-
-All of Payload's GraphQL functionality is abstracted into a separate package. Payload, its Admin UI, and REST API have absolutely no overlap with GraphQL, and you will incur no performance overhead from GraphQL if you are not using it. However, it's installed within in the `@payloadcms/next` package so you don't have to install it manually. You do, however, need to have GraphQL installed separately in your `package.json` if you are using GraphQL.
-
-`@payloadcms/ui`
-
-This is the UI library that Payload's Admin Panel uses. All components are exported from this package and can be re-used as you build extensions to the Payload admin UI, or want to use Payload components in your own React apps. Some exports are server components and some are client components.
-
-`@payloadcms/db-postgres`, `@payloadcms/db-mongodb`
-
-You can choose which Database Adapter you'd like to use for your project, and no matter which you choose, the entire data layer for Payload is contained within these packages. You can only use one at a time for any given project.
-
-`@payloadcms/richtext-lexical`, `@payloadcms/richtext-slate`
-
-Payload's Rich Text functionality is abstracted into separate packages and if you want to enable Rich Text in your project, you'll need to install one of these packages. We recommend Lexical for all new projects, and this is where Payload will focus its efforts on from this point, but Slate is still supported if you have already built with it.
-
-Rich Text is entirely optional and you may not need it for your project.

docs/getting-started/installation.mdx

@@ -3,19 +3,18 @@ title: Installation
 label: Installation
 order: 30
 desc: To quickly get started with Payload, simply run npx create-payload-app or install from scratch.
-keywords: documentation, getting started, guide, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: documentation, getting started, guide, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
 ## Software Requirements
 
 Payload requires the following software:
 
-- Any JavaScript package manager (Yarn, NPM, or pnpm - pnpm is preferred)
-- Node.js version 20.9.0+
+- Any JavaScript package manager (Yarn, NPM, or pnpm)
+- Node.js version 18+
 - Any [compatible database](/docs/database/overview) (MongoDB or Postgres)
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Important:</strong>
   Before proceeding any further, please ensure that you have the above requirements met.
 </Banner>
 
@@ -24,165 +23,131 @@ Payload requires the following software:
 To quickly scaffold a new Payload app in the fastest way possible, you can use [create-payload-app](https://npmjs.com/package/create-payload-app). To do so, run the following command:
 
 ```
-npx create-payload-app@beta
+npx create-payload-app@latest
 ```
 
-Then just follow the prompts! You'll get set up with a new folder and a functioning Payload app inside. You can then start [configuring your application](../configuration/overview).
+Then just follow the prompts! You'll get set up with a new folder and a functioning Payload app inside.
 
 ## Adding to an existing app
 
-Adding Payload to an existing Next.js app is super straightforward. You can either run the `npx create-payload-app@beta` command inside your Next.js project's folder, or manually install Payload by following the steps below.
+Adding Payload to either a new or existing TypeScript + Express app is super straightforward. To add to an existing app, just run `npm install --save --legacy-peer-deps payload`.
 
-If you don't have a Next.js app already, but you still want to start a project from a blank Next.js app, you can create a new Next.js app using `npx create-next-app` - and then just follow the steps below to install Payload.
-
-#### 1. Install the relevant packages
-
-First, you'll want to add the required Payload packages to your project and can do so by running the command below:
-
-```bash
-pnpm i payload@beta @payloadcms/next@beta @payloadcms/richtext-lexical@beta sharp graphql
-```
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Note:</strong>
-  Swap out `pnpm` for your package manager. If you are using NPM, you might need to install using legacy peer deps: `npm i --legacy-peer-deps`.
-</Banner>
-
-Next, install a [Database Adapter](/docs/database/overview). Payload requires a Database Adapter to establish a database connection. Payload works with all types of databases, but the most common are MongoDB and Postgres.
-
-To install a Database Adapter, you can run **one** of the following commands:
-
-- To install the [MongoDB Adapter](../database/mongodb), run:
-    ```bash
-    pnpm i @payloadcms/db-mongodb
-    ```
-
-- To install the [Postgres Adapter](../database/postgres), run:
-    ```bash
-    pnpm i @payloadcms/db-postgres
-    ```
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
-  New [Database Adapters](/docs/database/overview) are becoming available every day. Check the docs for the most up-to-date list of what's available.
-</Banner>
-
-#### 2. Copy Payload files into your Next.js app folder
-
-Payload installs directly in your Next.js `/app` folder, and you'll need to place some files into that folder for Payload to run.
-
-The files that Payload needs to have in your `/app` folder do not regenerate, and will never change. Once you slot them in, you never have to revisit them. They are not meant to be edited and simply import Payload dependencies from `@payloadcms/next` for the REST / GraphQL API and Admin Panel UI.
-
-You can copy the Payload `/app` folder files from the Payload blank template on GitHub:
-
-```
-https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/beta/templates/blank-3.0/src/app/(payload)
-```
-
-Once you have the required Payload files in place in your `/app` folder, you should have something like this:
-
-```plaintext
-app/
-├─ (payload)/
-├── // Payload files
-├─ (my-app)/
-├── // Your app files
-```
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  You may need to copy all of your existing frontend files, including your existing root layout, into its own newly created [Route Group](https://nextjs.org/docs/app/building-your-application/routing/route-groups), i.e. `(my-app)`.
-</Banner>
-
-You can name the `(my-app)` folder anything you want. The name does not matter and will just be used to clarify your directory structure for yourself. Common names might be `(frontend)`, `(app)`, or similar. [More details](../admin/overview).
-
-#### 3. Add the Payload Plugin to your Next.js config
-
-Payload has a Next.js plugin that it uses to ensure compatibility with some of the packages Payload relies on, like `mongodb` or `drizzle-kit`.
-
-To add the Payload Plugin, use `withPayload` in your `next.config.js`:
+From there, the first step is writing a baseline config. Create a new `payload.config.ts` in your project's `/src` directory (or whatever your root TS dir is). The simplest config contains the following:
 
 ```js
-import { withPayload } from '@payloadcms/next/withPayload'
-
-/** @type {import('next').NextConfig} */
-const nextConfig = {
-  // Your Next.js config here
-  experimental: {
-    reactCompiler: false
-  }
-}
-
-// Make sure you wrap your `nextConfig`
-// with the `withPayload` plugin
-export default withPayload(nextConfig) // highlight-line
-```
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Important:</strong>
-  Payload is a fully ESM project, and that means the `withPayload` function is an ECMAScript module.
-</Banner>
-
-To import the Payload Plugin, you need to make sure your `next.config` file is set up to use ESM.
-
-You can do this in one of two ways:
-
-1. Set your own project to use ESM, by adding `"type": "module"` to your `package.json` file
-2. Give your Next.js config the `.mjs` file extension
-
-In either case, all `require`s and `export`s in your `next.config` file will need to be converted to `import` / `export` if they are not set up that way already.
-
-#### 4. Create a Payload Config and add it to your TypeScript config
-
-Finally, you need to create a [Payload Config](../configuration/overview). Generally the Payload Config is located at the root of your repository, or next to your `/app` folder, and is named `payload.config.ts`.
-
-Here's what Payload needs at a bare minimum:
-
-```ts
-import sharp from 'sharp'
-import { lexicalEditor } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
-import { mongooseAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-mongodb'
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
 
 export default buildConfig({
-  // If you'd like to use Rich Text, pass your editor here
-  editor: lexicalEditor(),
-
-  // Define and configure your collections in this array
-  collections: [],
-
-  // Your Payload secret - should be a complex and secure string, unguessable
-  secret: process.env.PAYLOAD_SECRET || '',
-  // Whichever Database Adapter you're using should go here
-  // Mongoose is shown as an example, but you can also use Postgres
-  db: mongooseAdapter({
-    url: process.env.DATABASE_URI || '',
-  }),
-  // If you want to resize images, crop, set focal point, etc.
-  // make sure to install it and pass it to the config.
-  // This is optional - if you don't need to do these things,
-  // you don't need it!
-  sharp,
+  // By default, Payload will boot up normally
+  // and you will be provided with a base `User` collection.
+  // But, here is where you define how you'd like Payload to work!
 })
 ```
 
+Write the above code into your newly created config file. This baseline config will automatically provide you with a default `User` collection. For more information about users and authentication, including how to provide your own user config, jump to the [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config) section.
+
 Although this is just the bare minimum config, there are _many_ more options that you can control here. To reference the full config and all of its options, [click here](/docs/configuration/overview).
 
-Once you have a Payload Config, update your `tsconfig` to include a `path` that points to it:
+## Server
 
-```json
-{
-  "compilerOptions": {
-    "paths": {
-      "@payload-config": [
-        "./payload.config.ts"
-      ]
-    }
-  },
-}
+Now that you've got a baseline Payload config, it's time to initialize Payload. It requires an Express server that you provide, so if you're not familiar with how to set up a baseline Express server, please read up on exactly what Express is and why to use it. Express' own [Documentation](https://expressjs.com/en/starter/hello-world.html) is a good place to start. Otherwise, follow along below for how to build your own Express server to use with Payload.
+
+1. Run `npm install --save --legacy-peer-deps express` if you have not done so already
+1. Create a new `server.ts` file in the root directory of your app
+1. Add the following code to `server.ts`:
+
+```ts
+import express from 'express'
+
+const app = express()
+
+app.listen(3000, async () => {
+  console.log('Express is now listening for incoming connections on port 3000.')
+})
 ```
 
-#### 5. Fire it up!
+This server doesn't do anything just yet. But, after you have this in place, we can initialize Payload via its asynchronous `init()` method, which accepts a small set of arguments to tell it how to operate.
 
-After you've gotten this far, it's time to boot up Payload. Start your project in your application's folder to get going. By default, the Next.js dev script is `pnpm dev` (or `npm run dev` if using NPM).
+To initialize Payload, update your `server.ts` file to reflect the following code:
+
+```ts
+import express from 'express'
+import payload from 'payload'
+
+require('dotenv').config()
+const app = express()
+
+const start = async () => {
+  await payload.init({
+    secret: process.env.PAYLOAD_SECRET,
+    express: app,
+  })
+
+  app.listen(3000, async () => {
+    console.log('Express is now listening for incoming connections on port 3000.')
+  })
+}
+
+start()
+```
+
+A quick reminder: in this configuration, we're making use of environmental variables, `process.env.PAYLOAD_SECRET`. Often, it's smart to store these values in an `.env` file at the root of your directory and set different values for each of your environments (local, stage, prod, etc). The `dotenv` package is very handy and works well alongside of Payload. A typical `.env` file will look like this:
+
+```
+DATABASE_URI=mongodb://127.0.0.1/your-payload-app
+PAYLOAD_SECRET=your-payload-secret
+```
+
+Here is a list of all properties available to pass through `payload.init`:
+
+#### secret
+
+**Required**. This is a secure string that will be used to authenticate with Payload. It can be random but should be at least 14 characters and be very difficult to guess.
+
+Payload uses this secret key to generate secure user tokens (JWT). Behind the scenes, we do not use your secret key to encrypt directly - instead, we first take the secret key and create an encrypted string using the SHA-256 hash function. Then, we reduce the encrypted string to its first 32 characters. This final value is what Payload uses for encryption.
+
+#### config
+
+Allows you to pass your config directly to the onInit function. The config passed here should match the payload.config file.
+
+#### disableOnInit
+
+A boolean that disables running your `onInit` function when Payload starts up.
+
+#### disableDBConnect
+
+A boolean that disables the database connection when Payload starts up.
+
+#### email
+
+An object used to configure SMTP. [Read more](/docs/email/overview).
+
+#### express
+
+This is your Express app as shown above. Payload will tie into your existing `app` and scope all of its functionalities to sub-routers. By default, Payload will add an `/admin` router and an `/api` router, but you can customize these paths.
+
+#### local
+
+A boolean that when set to `true` tells Payload to start in local-only mode which will bypass setting up API routes. When set to `true`, `express` is not required. This is useful when running scripts that need to use Payload's [local-api](/docs/local-api/overview).
+
+#### loggerDestination
+
+Specify destination stream for the built-in Pino logger that Payload uses for internal logging. See [Pino Docs](https://getpino.io/#/docs/api?id=pino-destination) for more info on what is available.
+
+#### loggerOptions
+
+Specify options for the built-in Pino logger that Payload uses for internal logging. See [Pino Docs](https://getpino.io/#/docs/api?id=options) for more info on what is available.
+
+#### onInit
+
+A function that is called immediately following startup that receives the Payload instance as it's only argument.
+
+## Test it out
+
+After you've gotten this far, it's time to boot up Payload. Start your project in your application's folder to get going.
 
 After it starts, you can go to `http://localhost:3000/admin` to create your first Payload user!
+
+## Docker
+
+Looking to deploy Payload with Docker? New projects with `create-payload-app` come with a Dockerfile and docker-compose.yml file ready to go. Examples of these files can be seen in our [Deployment docs](/docs/production/deployment#docker).

docs/getting-started/what-is-payload.mdx

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 title: What is Payload?
 label: What is Payload?
 order: 10
-desc: Payload is a next-gen application framework that can be used as a Content Management System, enterprise tool framework, headless commerce platform, or digital asset management tool.
+desc: Payload is a next-gen headless Content Management System (CMS) and application framework.
 keywords: documentation, getting started, guide, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
@@ -11,121 +11,56 @@ keywords: documentation, getting started, guide, Content Management System, cms,
   title="Payload Introduction - Closing the Gap Between Headless CMS and Application Frameworks"
 />
 
-**Payload is the Next.js fullstack framework.** Write a Payload Config and instantly get:
-
-- A full Admin Panel using React server / client components, matching the shape of your data and completely extensible with your own React components
-- Automatic database schema, including direct DB access and ownership, with migrations, transactions, proper indexing, and more
-- Instant REST, GraphQL, and straight-to-DB Node APIs
-- Authentication which can be used in your own apps
-- A deeply customizable access control pattern
-- File storage and image management tools like cropping / focal point selection
-- Live preview - see your frontend render content changes in realtime as you update
-- Lots more
-
-### Instant backend superpowers
-
-No matter what you're building, Payload will give you backend superpowers. It can be installed in one line into any existing Next.js app, and is designed to catapult your development process. Payload takes the most complex and time-consuming parts of any modern web app and makes them simple.
-
-### Open source - deploy anywhere, including Vercel
-
-It's fully open source with an MIT license and you can self-host anywhere that you can run a Node app. You can also deploy serverless to hosts like Vercel, right inside your existing Next.js app folder.
-
-### Fully extensible
-
-Even in spite of how much you get out of the box, you still have full control over every aspect of your app - be it database, admin UI, or anything else. Every part of Payload has been designed to be extensible and customizable with modern TypeScript / React. And you'll fully understand the code that you write.
-
-In Payload, there are no "click ops" - as in clicking around in an Admin Panel to define your schema. In Payload, everything is done the right way—code-first and version controlled like a proper backend. But once developers define how Payload should work, non-technical users can independently make use of its Admin Panel to manage whatever they need to without having to know code whatsoever.
-
-## Use Cases
-
-Payload started as a headless Content Management System (CMS), but since, we've seen our community leverage Payload in ways far outside of simply managing pages and blog posts. It's grown into a full-stack TypeScript app framework.
-
-Large enterprises use Payload to power significant internal tools, retailers power their entire storefronts without the need for headless Shopify, and massive amounts of digital assets are stored + managed within Payload. Of course, websites large and small still use Payload for content management as well.
-
-### Headless CMS
-
-The biggest barrier in large web projects cited by marketers is engineering. On the flip side, engineers say the opposite. This is a big problem that has yet to be solved even though we have countless CMS options.
-
-Payload has restored a little love back into the dev / marketer equation with features like Live Preview, redirects, form builders, visual editing, static A/B testing, and more. But even with all this focus on marketing efficiency, we aren't compromising on the developer experience. That way engineers and marketers alike can be proud of the products they build.
-
-If you're building a website and your frontend is on Next.js, then Payload is a no-brainer.
+Payload is a headless CMS and application framework. It's meant to provide a massive boost to your
+development process, but importantly, stay out of your way as your apps get more complex.
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  Instead of going out and signing up for a SaaS vendor that makes it so you have to manage two completely separate concerns, with little to no native connection back and forth, just install Payload in your existing Next.js repo and instantly get a full CMS.
+  <strong>Payload 2.0 has been released!</strong>
+  <br />
+  Includes Postgres support, Live Preview, Lexical Editor, and more.{' '}
+  <a href="/blog/payload-2-0">Read the announcement</a>.
 </Banner>
 
-Get started with Payload as a CMS using our official Website template:
+Out of the box, Payload gives you a lot of the things that you often need when developing a new website, web app, or native app:
 
-```
-npx create-payload-app@latest -t website
-```
+- A database to store your data (Postgres and MongoDB supported)
+- A way to store, retrieve, and manipulate data of any shape via full REST and GraphQL APIs
+- Authentication—complete with commonly required functionality like registration, email verification, login, & password reset
+- Deep access control to your data, based on document or field-level functions
+- File storage and access control
+- A beautiful admin UI that's generated specifically to suit your data
 
-### Enterprise Tool
+## What does "headless" mean?
 
-When a large organization starts up a new software initiative, there's a lot of plumbing to take care of.
+A headless CMS is a system that sticks to what it's good at—managing content. It concentrates solely on granting administrators an effective way to author and maintain content, but doesn't control how and where that content is used.
 
-- Scaffold the data layer with an ORM or an app framework like Ruby on Rails or Laravel
-- Implement their SSO provider for authentication
-- Design an access control pattern for authorization
-- Open up any REST endpoints required or implement GraphQL queries / mutations
-- Implement a migrations workflow for the database as it changes over time
-- Integrate with other third party solutions by crafting a system of webhooks or similar
+In this way, the CMS can ensure that its content editing experience is highly polished and effective while avoiding placing creative constraints on designers or restricting development teams. In contrast, traditional content management systems bind the presentation of your content to the storage of your content and severely limit the creativity, development and usability of the content that they manage.
 
-And then there's the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview). Most enterprise tools require an admin UI, and building one from scratch can be the most time-consuming aspect of any new enterprise tool. There are off-the-shelf packages for app frameworks like Rails, but often the customization is so involved that using Material UI or similar from scratch might be better.
+At this point this concept is [widely](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Headless_content_management_system) [discussed](https://css-tricks.com/what-is-a-headless-cms/) online, and for good reason. The web has become more complicated and with complexity comes the demand for developers to better structure their code. The rise of interface libraries like React and Vue are now the de-facto standard for building modern applications and traditional content management systems are often not designed to make use of them.
 
-Then there are no-code admin builders that could be used. However, wiring up access control and the connection to the data layer, with proper version control, makes this a challenging task as well.
+## Why Payload?
 
-That's where Payload comes in. Payload instantly provides all of this out of the box, making complex internal tools extremely simple to both spin up and maintain over time. The only custom code that will need to be written is any custom business logic. That means Payload can expedite timelines, keep budgets low, and allow engineers to focus on their specific requirements rather than complex backend / admin UI plumbing.
+The team behind Payload has been building websites and apps with existing content management systems and application frameworks for over a decade. We know what works and what doesn't about each of the existing solutions, and to this day have found no silver bullet solution.
 
-Generally, the best place to start for a new enterprise tool is with a blank canvas, where you can define your own functionality:
+**We believe that a CMS should be:**
 
-```
-npx create-payload-app@latest -t blank
-```
+- Cost-effective and should save time and effort
+- Intuitive for developers and content authors alike
+- Self-hosted however and wherever the application specifies
+- Designed in code but used with no coding experience
+- Blazing fast
+- Secure
+- Fully flexible and extensible
 
-### Headless Commerce
+Payload is our silver bullet solution. We've blended the best parts of our experience with other CMS and app frameworks into Payload, and we finally have everything we need when we build new apps and websites:
 
-Companies who prioritize UX generally run into frontend constraints with traditional commerce vendors. These companies will then opt for frontend frameworks like Next.js which allow them to fine-tune their user experience as much as possible—promoting conversions, personalizing experiences, and optimizing for SEO.
-
-But the challenge with using something like Next.js for headless commerce is that in order for non-technical users to manage the storefront, you instantly need to pair a headless commerce product with a headless CMS. Then, your editors need to bounce back and forth between different admin UIs for different functionality. The code required to seamlessly glue them together on the frontend becomes overly complex.
-
-Payload can integrate with any payment processor like Stripe and its content authoring capabilities allow it to manage every aspect of a storefront—all in one place.
-
-If you can build your storefront with a single backend, and only offload things like payment processing, the code will be simpler and the editing experience will be significantly streamlined. Manage products, catalogs, page content, media, and more—all in one spot.
-
-Payload's official Ecommerce template gives you everything you need for a storefront out of the box, including a Next.js frontend, product variations, and a full Stripe implementation:
-
-```
-npx create-payload-app@latest -t ecommerce
-```
-
-### Digital Asset Management
-
-Payload's API-first tagging, sorting, and querying engine lends itself perfectly to all types of content that a CMS might ordinarily store, but these strong fundamentals also make it a formidable Digital Asset Management (DAM) tool as well.
-
-Similarly to the Ecommerce use case above, if an organization uses a CMS for its content but a separate DAM for its digital assets, administrators of both tools will need to juggle completely different services for tasks that are closely related. Two subscriptions will need to be managed, two sets of infrastructure will need to be provisioned, and two admin UIs need to be used / learned.
-
-Payload flattens CMS and DAM into a single tool that makes no compromises on either side. Powerful features like folder-based organization, file versioning, bulk upload, and media access control allow Payload to simultaneously function as a full Digital Asset Management platform as well as a Content Management System at the same time.
-
-[Click here](https://payloadcms.com/use-cases/digital-asset-management) for more information on how to get started with Payload as a DAM.
-
-## Choosing a Framework
-
-Payload is a great choice for applications of all sizes and types, but it might not be the right choice for every project. Here are some guidelines to help you decide if Payload is the right choice for your project.
-
-### When Payload might be for you
-
-- If data ownership and privacy are important to you, and you don't want to allow another proprietary SaaS vendor to host and own your data
-- If you're building a Next.js site that needs a CMS
-- If you need to re-use your data outside of a SaaS API
-- If what you're building has custom business logic requirements outside of a typical headless CMS
-- You want to deploy serverless on platforms like Vercel
-
-### When Payload might not be for you
-
-- If you can manage your project fully with code, and don't need an admin UI
-- If you are building a website that fits within the limits a tool like Webflow or Framer
-- If you already have a full database and just need to visualize the data somehow
-- If you are confident that you won't need code / data ownership at any point in the future
-
-Ready to get started? First, let's review some high-level concepts that are used in Payload.
+- A beautiful, dynamic, customizable admin UI
+- Extensible and reusable authentication
+- Content localization
+- Local file storage
+- Extremely flexible access control
+- Field conditional logic
+- Block-based layout building
+- Array field type(s)
+- Security
+- and much more

docs/graphql/extending.mdx

@@ -2,13 +2,13 @@
 title: Adding your own Queries and Mutations
 label: Custom Queries and Mutations
 order: 20
-desc: Payload allows you to add your own GraphQL queries and mutations, simply set up GraphQL in your main Payload Config by following these instructions.
-keywords: graphql, resolvers, mutations, custom, queries, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+desc: Payload allows you to add your own GraphQL queries and mutations, simply set up GraphQL in your main Payload config by following these instructions.
+keywords: graphql, resolvers, mutations, custom, queries, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
 You can add your own GraphQL queries and mutations to Payload, making use of all the types that Payload has defined for you.
 
-To do so, add your queries and mutations to the main Payload Config as follows:
+To do so, add your queries and mutations to the main Payload config as follows:
 
 | Config Path         | Description                                                                 |
 | ------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ Both `graphQL.queries` and `graphQL.mutations` functions should return an object
 `payload.config.js`:
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
 import myCustomQueryResolver from './graphQL/resolvers/myCustomQueryResolver'
 
 export default buildConfig({
@@ -100,24 +100,9 @@ Contextual information about the currently running GraphQL operation. You can ge
 
 We've exposed a few types and utilities to help you extend the API further. Payload uses the GraphQL.js package for which you can view the full list of available types in the [official documentation](https://graphql.org/graphql-js/type/).
 
-**`GraphQLJSON`** & **`GraphQLJSONObject`**
-
-```ts
-import { GraphQLJSON, GraphQLJSONObject } from '@payloadcms/graphql/types'
-```
-
 **`GraphQL`**
 
-You can directly import the GraphQL package used by Payload, most useful for typing.
-
-```ts
-import { GraphQL } from '@payloadcms/graphql/types'
-```
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  For queries, mutations and handlers make sure you use the `GraphQL` and `payload` instances provided via arguments.
-</Banner>
-
+You can directly import the GraphQL package used by Payload, most useful for typing. For queries, mutations and handlers make sure you use the `GraphQL` and `payload` instances provided via arguments.
 
 **`buildPaginatedListType`**
 
@@ -127,8 +112,6 @@ It takes in two arguments, the first for the name of this new schema type and th
 Example
 
 ```ts
-import { buildPaginatedListType } from '@payloadcms/graphql/types'
-
 export const getMyPosts = (GraphQL, payload) => {
   return {
     args: {},

docs/graphql/graphql-schema.mdx

@@ -3,23 +3,17 @@ title: GraphQL Schema
 label: GraphQL Schema
 order: 30
 desc: Output your own GraphQL schema based on your collections and globals to a file.
-keywords: headless cms, typescript, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: headless cms, typescript, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
-In Payload the schema is controlled by your collections and globals. All you need to do is run the generate command and the entire schema will be created for you.
+When working with GraphQL it is useful to have the schema for development of other projects that need to call on your GraphQL endpoint. In Payload the schema is controlled by your collections and globals and is made available to the developer or third parties, it is not necessary for developers using Payload to write schema types manually.
 
 ## Schema generation script
 
-Install `@payloadcms/graphql` as a dev dependency:
+Run the following command in a Payload project to generate your project's GraphQL schema from Payload:
 
-```bash
-pnpm add @payloadcms/graphql --save-dev
 ```
-
-Run the following command to generate the schema:
-
-```bash
-pnpm payload-graphql generate:schema
+payload generate:graphQLSchema
 ```
 
 ## Custom Field Schemas
@@ -30,7 +24,7 @@ For `array`, `block`, `group` and named `tab` fields, you can generate top level
 {
   type: 'group',
   name: 'meta',
-  interfaceName: 'SharedMeta', // highlight-line
+  interfaceName: 'SharedMeta', <-- here!!
   fields: [
     {
       name: 'title',
@@ -47,13 +41,13 @@ For `array`, `block`, `group` and named `tab` fields, you can generate top level
 will generate:
 
 ```ts
-// A top level reusable type will be generated
+// a top level reusable type!!
 type SharedMeta {
   title: String
   description: String
 }
 
-// And will be referenced inside the generated schema
+// example usage inside collection schema
 type Collection1 {
   // ...other fields
   meta: SharedMeta
@@ -70,18 +64,16 @@ The above example outputs all your definitions to a file relative from your payl
   Payload needs to be able to find your config to generate your GraphQL schema.
 </Banner>
 
-Payload will automatically try and locate your config, but might not always be able to find it. For example, if you are working in a `/src` directory or similar, you need to tell Payload where to find your config manually by using an environment variable.
+Payload will automatically try and locate your config, but might not always be able to find it. For example, if you are working in a `/src` directory or similar, you need to tell Payload where to find your config manually by using an environment variable. If this applies to you, you can create an NPM script to make generating your types easier.
 
-If this applies to you, create an NPM script to make generating types easier:
+To add an NPM script to generate your types and show Payload where to find your config, open your `package.json` and update the `scripts` property to the following:
 
 ```json
-// package.json
-
 {
   "scripts": {
-    "generate:graphQLSchema": "cross-env PAYLOAD_CONFIG_PATH=src/payload.config.ts payload-graphql generate:schema"
+    "generate:graphQLSchema": "cross-env PAYLOAD_CONFIG_PATH=src/payload.config.ts payload generate:graphQLSchema"
   }
 }
 ```
 
-Now you can run `pnpm generate:graphQLSchema` to easily generate your schema.
+Now you can run `yarn generate:graphQLSchema` to easily generate your schema.

docs/graphql/overview.mdx

@@ -3,18 +3,18 @@ title: GraphQL Overview
 label: Overview
 order: 10
 desc: Payload ships with a fully featured and extensible GraphQL API, which can be used in addition to the REST and Local APIs to give you more flexibility.
-keywords: graphql, resolvers, mutations, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: graphql, resolvers, mutations, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
 In addition to its REST and Local APIs, Payload ships with a fully featured and extensible GraphQL API.
 
-By default, the GraphQL API is exposed via `/api/graphql`, but you can customize this URL via specifying your `routes` within the main Payload Config.
+By default, the GraphQL API is exposed via `/api/graphql`, but you can customize this URL via specifying your `routes` within the main Payload config.
 
 The labels you provide for your Collections and Globals are used to name the GraphQL types that are created to correspond to your config. Special characters and spaces are removed.
 
 ## GraphQL Options
 
-At the top of your Payload Config you can define all the options to manage GraphQL.
+At the top of your Payload config you can define all the options to manage GraphQL.
 
 | Option                          | Description                                                                                                                     |
 | ------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ At the top of your Payload Config you can define all the options to manage Graph
 Everything that can be done to a Collection via the REST or Local API can be done with GraphQL (outside of uploading files, which is REST-only). If you have a collection as follows:
 
 ```ts
-import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types';
 
 export const PublicUser: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'public-users',
@@ -44,32 +44,32 @@ export const PublicUser: CollectionConfig = {
 
 | Query Name              | Operation           |
 | ------------------      | ------------------- |
-| `PublicUser`        | `findByID`          |
-| `PublicUsers`       | `find`              |
-| `countPublicUsers`  | `count`             |
-| `mePublicUser`      | `me` auth operation |
+| **`PublicUser`**        | `findByID`          |
+| **`PublicUsers`**       | `find`              |
+| **`countPublicUsers`**  | `count`             |
+| **`mePublicUser`**      | `me` auth operation |
 
 **And the following mutations:**
 
 | Query Name                     | Operation                       |
 | ------------------------------ | ------------------------------- |
-| `createPublicUser`         | `create`                        |
-| `updatePublicUser`         | `update`                        |
-| `deletePublicUser`         | `delete`                        |
-| `forgotPasswordPublicUser` | `forgotPassword` auth operation |
-| `resetPasswordPublicUser`  | `resetPassword` auth operation  |
-| `unlockPublicUser`         | `unlock` auth operation         |
-| `verifyPublicUser`         | `verify` auth operation         |
-| `loginPublicUser`          | `login` auth operation          |
-| `logoutPublicUser`         | `logout` auth operation         |
-| `refreshTokenPublicUser`   | `refresh` auth operation        |
+| **`createPublicUser`**         | `create`                        |
+| **`updatePublicUser`**         | `update`                        |
+| **`deletePublicUser`**         | `delete`                        |
+| **`forgotPasswordPublicUser`** | `forgotPassword` auth operation |
+| **`resetPasswordPublicUser`**  | `resetPassword` auth operation  |
+| **`unlockPublicUser`**         | `unlock` auth operation         |
+| **`verifyPublicUser`**         | `verify` auth operation         |
+| **`loginPublicUser`**          | `login` auth operation          |
+| **`logoutPublicUser`**         | `logout` auth operation         |
+| **`refreshTokenPublicUser`**   | `refresh` auth operation        |
 
 ## Globals
 
 Globals are also fully supported. For example:
 
 ```ts
-import type { GlobalConfig } from 'payload';
+import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload/types';
 
 const Header: GlobalConfig = {
   slug: 'header',
@@ -83,34 +83,34 @@ const Header: GlobalConfig = {
 
 | Query Name   | Operation |
 | ------------ | --------- |
-| `Header` | `findOne` |
+| **`Header`** | `findOne` |
 
 **And the following mutation:**
 
 | Query Name         | Operation |
 | ------------------ | --------- |
-| `updateHeader` | `update`  |
+| **`updateHeader`** | `update`  |
 
 ## Preferences
 
-User [preferences](/docs/admin/overview#preferences) for the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) are also available to GraphQL the same way as other collection schemas are generated. To query preferences you must supply an authorization token in the header and only the preferences of that user will be accessible.
+User [preferences](/docs/admin/overview#preferences) for the admin panel are also available to GraphQL the same way as other collection schemas are generated. To query preferences you must supply an authorization token in the header and only the preferences of that user will be accessible.
 
 **Payload will open the following query:**
 
 | Query Name       | Operation |
 | ---------------- | --------- |
-| `Preference` | `findOne` |
+| **`Preference`** | `findOne` |
 
 **And the following mutations:**
 
 | Query Name             | Operation |
 | ---------------------- | --------- |
-| `updatePreference` | `update`  |
-| `deletePreference` | `delete`  |
+| **`updatePreference`** | `update`  |
+| **`deletePreference`** | `delete`  |
 
 ## GraphQL Playground
 
-GraphQL Playground is enabled by default for development purposes, but disabled in production. You can enable it in production by passing `graphQL.disablePlaygroundInProduction` a `false` setting in the main Payload Config.
+GraphQL Playground is enabled by default for development purposes, but disabled in production. You can enable it in production by passing `graphQL.disablePlaygroundInProduction` a `false` setting in the main Payload config.
 
 You can even log in using the `login[collection-singular-label-here]` mutation to use the Playground as an authenticated user.
 
@@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ You can even log in using the `login[collection-singular-label-here]` mutation t
   <br />
   To see more regarding how the above queries and mutations are used, visit your GraphQL playground
   (by default at
-  [`${SERVER_URL}/api/graphql-playground`](http://localhost:3000/api/graphql-playground))
+  [http://localhost:3000/api/graphql-playground](http://localhost:3000/api/graphql-playground))
   while your server is running. There, you can use the "Schema" and "Docs" buttons on the right to
   see a ton of detail about how GraphQL operates within Payload.
 </Banner>

docs/hooks/collections.mdx

@@ -3,57 +3,44 @@ title: Collection Hooks
 label: Collections
 order: 20
 desc: You can add hooks to any Collection, several hook types are available including beforeChange, afterRead, afterDelete and more.
-keywords: hooks, collections, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: hooks, collections, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
-Collection Hooks are [Hooks](./overview) that run on Documents within a specific [Collection](../configuration/collections). They allow you to execute your own logic during specific events of the Document lifecycle.
+Collections feature the ability to define the following hooks:
 
-To add Hooks to a Collection, use the `hooks` property in your [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
+- [beforeOperation](#beforeoperation)
+- [beforeValidate](#beforevalidate)
+- [beforeChange](#beforechange)
+- [afterChange](#afterchange)
+- [beforeRead](#beforeread)
+- [afterRead](#afterread)
+- [beforeDelete](#beforedelete)
+- [afterDelete](#afterdelete)
+- [afterOperation](#afteroperation)
+
+Additionally, `auth`-enabled collections feature the following hooks:
+
+- [beforeLogin](#beforelogin)
+- [afterLogin](#afterlogin)
+- [afterLogout](#afterlogout)
+- [afterRefresh](#afterrefresh)
+- [afterMe](#afterme)
+- [afterForgotPassword](#afterforgotpassword)
+
+## Config
+
+All collection Hook properties accept arrays of synchronous or asynchronous functions. Each Hook type receives specific arguments and has the ability to modify specific outputs.
+
+`collections/exampleHooks.js`
 
 ```ts
-import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload';
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types';
 
-export const CollectionWithHooks: CollectionConfig = {
-  // ...
-  hooks: { // highlight-line
-    // ...
-  },
-}
-```
-
-The following Collection Hooks are available:
-
-- [`beforeOperation`](#beforeoperation)
-- [`beforeValidate`](#beforevalidate)
-- [`beforeChange`](#beforechange)
-- [`afterChange`](#afterchange)
-- [`beforeRead`](#beforeread)
-- [`afterRead`](#afterread)
-- [`beforeDelete`](#beforedelete)
-- [`afterDelete`](#afterdelete)
-- [`afterOperation`](#afteroperation)
-
-Additionally, all [Auth-enabled Collections](../authentication/overview) feature the following auth-related Hooks:
-
-- [`beforeLogin`](#beforelogin)
-- [`afterLogin`](#afterlogin)
-- [`afterLogout`](#afterlogout)
-- [`afterRefresh`](#afterrefresh)
-- [`afterMe`](#afterme)
-- [`afterForgotPassword`](#afterforgotpassword)
-- [`refresh`](#refresh)
-- [`me`](#me)
-
-## Config Options
-
-All Collection Hooks accept an array of [synchronous or asynchronous functions](./overview#async-vs-synchronous). Each Collection Hook receives specific arguments based on its own type, and has the ability to modify specific outputs.
-
-```ts
-import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload';
-
-export const CollectionWithHooks: CollectionConfig = {
-  // ...
-  // highlight-start
+export const ExampleHooks: CollectionConfig = {
+  slug: 'example-hooks',
+  fields: [
+    { name: 'name', type: 'text'},
+  ],
   hooks: {
     beforeOperation: [(args) => {...}],
     beforeValidate: [(args) => {...}],
@@ -65,17 +52,14 @@ export const CollectionWithHooks: CollectionConfig = {
     afterDelete: [(args) => {...}],
     afterOperation: [(args) => {...}],
 
-    // Auth-enabled Hooks
+    // Auth-enabled hooks
     beforeLogin: [(args) => {...}],
     afterLogin: [(args) => {...}],
     afterLogout: [(args) => {...}],
     afterRefresh: [(args) => {...}],
     afterMe: [(args) => {...}],
     afterForgotPassword: [(args) => {...}],
-    refresh: [(args) => {...}],
-    me: [(args) => {...}],
   },
-  // highlight-end
 }
 ```
 
@@ -86,26 +70,17 @@ The `beforeOperation` hook can be used to modify the arguments that operations a
 Available Collection operations include `create`, `read`, `update`, `delete`, `login`, `refresh`, and `forgotPassword`.
 
 ```ts
-import type { CollectionBeforeOperationHook } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionBeforeOperationHook } from 'payload/types'
 
 const beforeOperationHook: CollectionBeforeOperationHook = async ({
   args, // original arguments passed into the operation
   operation, // name of the operation
-  req, // full Request object
+  req, // full express request
 }) => {
   return args // return modified operation arguments as necessary
 }
 ```
 
-The following arguments are provided to the `beforeOperation` hook:
-
-| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
-| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
-| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between Hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
-| **`operation`**          | The name of the operation that this hook is running within. |
-| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
-
 ### beforeValidate
 
 Runs before the `create` and `update` operations. This hook allows you to add or format data before the incoming data is validated server-side.
@@ -117,170 +92,112 @@ Please do note that this does not run before the client-side validation. If you
 3. `validate` runs on the server
 
 ```ts
-import type { CollectionBeforeValidateHook } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionBeforeValidateHook } from 'payload/types'
 
 const beforeValidateHook: CollectionBeforeValidateHook = async ({
-  data,
+  data, // incoming data to update or create with
+  req, // full express request
+  operation, // name of the operation ie. 'create', 'update'
+  originalDoc, // original document
 }) => {
-  return data
+  return data // Return data to either create or update a document with
 }
 ```
 
-The following arguments are provided to the `beforeValidate` hook:
-
-| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
-| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
-| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between Hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
-| **`data`**               | The incoming data passed through the operation.                                                                                 |
-| **`operation`**          | The name of the operation that this hook is running within. |
-| **`originalDoc`**        | The Document before changes are applied.                                                                                        |
-| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
-
 ### beforeChange
 
 Immediately following validation, `beforeChange` hooks will run within `create` and `update` operations. At this stage, you can be confident that the data that will be saved to the document is valid in accordance to your field validations. You can optionally modify the shape of data to be saved.
 
 ```ts
-import type { CollectionBeforeChangeHook } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionBeforeChangeHook } from 'payload/types'
 
 const beforeChangeHook: CollectionBeforeChangeHook = async ({
-  data,
+  data, // incoming data to update or create with
+  req, // full express request
+  operation, // name of the operation ie. 'create', 'update'
+  originalDoc, // original document
 }) => {
-  return data
+  return data // Return data to either create or update a document with
 }
 ```
 
-The following arguments are provided to the `beforeChange` hook:
-
-| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
-| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
-| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
-| **`data`**               | The incoming data passed through the operation.                                                                                 |
-| **`operation`**          | The name of the operation that this hook is running within. |
-| **`originalDoc`**        | The Document before changes are applied.                                                                                        |
-| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
-
 ### afterChange
 
 After a document is created or updated, the `afterChange` hook runs. This hook is helpful to recalculate statistics such as total sales within a global, syncing user profile changes to a CRM, and more.
 
 ```ts
-import type { CollectionAfterChangeHook } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionAfterChangeHook } from 'payload/types'
 
 const afterChangeHook: CollectionAfterChangeHook = async ({
-  doc,
+  doc, // full document data
+  req, // full express request
+  previousDoc, // document data before updating the collection
+  operation, // name of the operation ie. 'create', 'update'
 }) => {
   return doc
 }
 ```
 
-The following arguments are provided to the `afterChange` hook:
-
-| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
-| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
-| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
-| **`doc`**               | The resulting Document after changes are applied. |
-| **`operation`**          | The name of the operation that this hook is running within. |
-| **`previousDoc`**        | The Document before changes were applied. |
-| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
-
 ### beforeRead
 
 Runs before `find` and `findByID` operations are transformed for output by `afterRead`. This hook fires before hidden fields are removed and before localized fields are flattened into the requested locale. Using this Hook will provide you with all locales and all hidden fields via the `doc` argument.
 
 ```ts
-import type { CollectionBeforeReadHook } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionBeforeReadHook } from 'payload/types'
 
 const beforeReadHook: CollectionBeforeReadHook = async ({
-  doc,
+  doc, // full document data
+  req, // full express request
+  query, // JSON formatted query
 }) => {
   return doc
 }
 ```
 
-The following arguments are provided to the `beforeRead` hook:
-
-| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
-| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
-| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
-| **`doc`**               | The resulting Document after changes are applied. |
-| **`query`**          | The [Query](../queries/overview) of the request.
-| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
-
 ### afterRead
 
 Runs as the last step before documents are returned. Flattens locales, hides protected fields, and removes fields that users do not have access to.
 
 ```ts
-import type { CollectionAfterReadHook } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionAfterReadHook } from 'payload/types'
 
 const afterReadHook: CollectionAfterReadHook = async ({
-  doc,
+  doc, // full document data
+  req, // full express request
+  query, // JSON formatted query
+  findMany, // boolean to denote if this hook is running against finding one, or finding many
 }) => {
   return doc
 }
 ```
 
-The following arguments are provided to the `afterRead` hook:
-
-| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
-| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
-| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
-| **`doc`**               | The resulting Document after changes are applied. |
-| **`query`**          | The [Query](../queries/overview) of the request.
-| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
-
 ### beforeDelete
 
 Runs before the `delete` operation. Returned values are discarded.
 
 ```ts
-import type { CollectionBeforeDeleteHook } from 'payload';
+import { CollectionBeforeDeleteHook } from 'payload/types';
 
 const beforeDeleteHook: CollectionBeforeDeleteHook = async ({
-  req,
-  id,
+  req, // full express request
+  id, // id of document to delete
 }) => {...}
 ```
 
-The following arguments are provided to the `beforeDelete` hook:
-
-| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
-| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
-| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
-| **`id`**               | The ID of the Document being deleted. |
-| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
-
 ### afterDelete
 
 Runs immediately after the `delete` operation removes records from the database. Returned values are discarded.
 
 ```ts
-import type { CollectionAfterDeleteHook } from 'payload';
+import { CollectionAfterDeleteHook } from 'payload/types';
 
 const afterDeleteHook: CollectionAfterDeleteHook = async ({
-  req,
-  id,
-  doc,
+  req, // full express request
+  id, // id of document to delete
+  doc, // deleted document
 }) => {...}
 ```
 
-The following arguments are provided to the `afterDelete` hook:
-
-| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
-| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
-| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
-| **`doc`**               | The resulting Document after changes are applied. |
-| **`id`**          | The ID of the Document that was deleted. |
-| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
-
 ### afterOperation
 
 The `afterOperation` hook can be used to modify the result of operations or execute side-effects that run after an operation has completed.
@@ -288,197 +205,100 @@ The `afterOperation` hook can be used to modify the result of operations or exec
 Available Collection operations include `create`, `find`, `findByID`, `update`, `updateByID`, `delete`, `deleteByID`, `login`, `refresh`, and `forgotPassword`.
 
 ```ts
-import type { CollectionAfterOperationHook } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionAfterOperationHook } from 'payload/types'
 
 const afterOperationHook: CollectionAfterOperationHook = async ({
-  result,
+  args, // arguments passed into the operation
+  operation, // name of the operation
+  req, // full express request
+  result, // the result of the operation, before modifications
 }) => {
-  return result
+  return result // return modified result as necessary
 }
 ```
 
-The following arguments are provided to the `afterOperation` hook:
-
-| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
-| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`args`**               | The arguments passed into the operation.                                                                                 |
-| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
-| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`operation`**          | The name of the operation that this hook is running within. |
-| **`result`**          |  The result of the operation, before modifications. |
-
 ### beforeLogin
 
-For [Auth-enabled Collections](../authentication/overview), this hook runs during `login` operations where a user with the provided credentials exist, but before a token is generated and added to the response. You can optionally modify the user that is returned, or throw an error in order to deny the login operation.
+For auth-enabled Collections, this hook runs during `login` operations where a user with the provided credentials exist, but before a token is generated and added to the response. You can optionally modify the user that is returned, or throw an error in order to deny the login operation.
 
 ```ts
-import type { CollectionBeforeLoginHook } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionBeforeLoginHook } from 'payload/types'
 
 const beforeLoginHook: CollectionBeforeLoginHook = async ({
-  user,
+  req, // full express request
+  user, // user being logged in
 }) => {
   return user
 }
 ```
 
-The following arguments are provided to the `beforeLogin` hook:
-
-| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
-| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
-| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
-| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`user`**               | The user being logged in. |
-
 ### afterLogin
 
-For [Auth-enabled Collections](../authentication/overview), this hook runs after successful `login` operations. You can optionally modify the user that is returned.
+For auth-enabled Collections, this hook runs after successful `login` operations. You can optionally modify the user that is returned.
 
 ```ts
-import type { CollectionAfterLoginHook } from 'payload';
+import { CollectionAfterLoginHook } from 'payload/types';
 
 const afterLoginHook: CollectionAfterLoginHook = async ({
-  user,
-  token,
+  req, // full express request
+  user, // user that was logged in
+  token, // user token
 }) => {...}
 ```
 
-The following arguments are provided to the `afterLogin` hook:
-
-| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
-| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
-| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
-| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`token`**              | The token generated for the user. |
-| **`user`**               | The user being logged in. |
-
 ### afterLogout
 
-For [Auth-enabled Collections](../authentication/overview), this hook runs after `logout` operations.
+For auth-enabled Collections, this hook runs after `logout` operations.
 
 ```ts
-import type { CollectionAfterLogoutHook } from 'payload';
+import { CollectionAfterLogoutHook } from 'payload/types';
 
 const afterLogoutHook: CollectionAfterLogoutHook = async ({
-  req,
+  req, // full express request
 }) => {...}
 ```
 
-The following arguments are provided to the `afterLogout` hook:
-
-| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
-| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
-| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
-| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
-
-### afterMe
-
-For [Auth-enabled Collections](../authentication/overview), this hook runs after `me` operations.
-
-```ts
-import type { CollectionAfterMeHook } from 'payload';
-
-const afterMeHook: CollectionAfterMeHook = async ({
-  req,
-  response,
-}) => {...}
-```
-
-The following arguments are provided to the `afterMe` hook:
-
-| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
-| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
-| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
-| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`response`**           | The response to return. |
-
 ### afterRefresh
 
-For [Auth-enabled Collections](../authentication/overview), this hook runs after `refresh` operations.
+For auth-enabled Collections, this hook runs after `refresh` operations.
 
 ```ts
-import type { CollectionAfterRefreshHook } from 'payload';
+import { CollectionAfterRefreshHook } from 'payload/types';
 
 const afterRefreshHook: CollectionAfterRefreshHook = async ({
-  token,
+  req, // full express request
+  res, // full express response
+  token, // newly refreshed user token
 }) => {...}
 ```
 
-The following arguments are provided to the `afterRefresh` hook:
+### afterMe
 
-| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
-| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
-| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
-| **`exp`**                | The expiration time of the token. |
-| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`token`**              | The newly refreshed user token. |
+For auth-enabled Collections, this hook runs after `me` operations.
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionAfterMeHook } from 'payload/types';
+
+const afterMeHook: CollectionAfterMeHook = async ({
+  req, // full express request
+  response, // response to return
+}) => {...}
+```
 
 ### afterForgotPassword
 
-For [Auth-enabled Collections](../authentication/overview), this hook runs after successful `forgotPassword` operations. Returned values are discarded.
+For auth-enabled Collections, this hook runs after successful `forgotPassword` operations. Returned values are discarded.
 
 ```ts
-import type { CollectionAfterForgotPasswordHook } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionAfterForgotPasswordHook } from 'payload/types'
 
 const afterForgotPasswordHook: CollectionAfterForgotPasswordHook = async ({
-  args,
+  args, // arguments passed into the operation
   context,
-  collection,
+  collection, // The collection which this hook is being run on
 }) => {...}
 ```
 
-The following arguments are provided to the `afterForgotPassword` hook:
-
-| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
-| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`args`**               | The arguments passed into the operation.                                                                                 |
-| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
-| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
-
-### refresh
-
-For [Auth-enabled Collections](../authentication/overview), this hook allows you to optionally replace the default behavior of the `refresh` operation with your own. If you optionally return a value from your hook, the operation will not perform its own logic and continue.
-
-```ts
-import type { CollectionRefreshHook } from 'payload'
-
-const myRefreshHook: CollectionRefreshHook = async ({
-  args,
-  user,
-}) => {...}
-```
-
-The following arguments are provided to the `afterRefresh` hook:
-
-| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
-| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`args`**               | The arguments passed into the operation.                                                                                 |
-| **`user`**               | The user being logged in. |
-
-### me
-
-For [Auth-enabled Collections](../authentication/overview), this hook allows you to optionally replace the default behavior of the `me` operation with your own. If you optionally return a value from your hook, the operation will not perform its own logic and continue.
-
-```ts
-import type { CollectionMeHook } from 'payload'
-
-const meHook: CollectionMeHook = async ({
-  args,
-  user,
-}) => {...}
-```
-
-The following arguments are provided to the `me` hook:
-
-| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
-| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`args`**               | The arguments passed into the operation.                                                                                 |
-| **`user`**               | The user being logged in. |
-
 ## TypeScript
 
 Payload exports a type for each Collection hook which can be accessed as follows:
@@ -499,7 +319,5 @@ import type {
   CollectionAfterRefreshHook,
   CollectionAfterMeHook,
   CollectionAfterForgotPasswordHook,
-  CollectionRefreshHook,
-  CollectionMeHook,
-} from 'payload'
+} from 'payload/types'
 ```

docs/hooks/context.mdx

@@ -6,13 +6,13 @@ desc: Context allows you to pass in extra data that can be shared between hooks
 keywords: hooks, context, payload context, payloadcontext, data, extra data, shared data, shared, extra
 ---
 
-The `context` object is used to share data across different Hooks. This persists throughout the entire lifecycle of a request and is available within every Hook. By setting properties to `req.context`, you can effectively logic across multiple Hooks.
+The `context` object in hooks is used to share data across different hooks. The persists throughout the entire lifecycle of a request and is available within every hook. This allows you to add logic to your hooks based on the request state by setting properties to `req.context` and using them elsewhere.
 
 ## When to use Context
 
 Context gives you a way forward on otherwise difficult problems such as:
 
-1. **Passing data between Hooks**: Needing data in multiple Hooks from a 3rd party API, it could be retrieved and used in `beforeChange` and later used again in an `afterChange` hook without having to fetch it twice.
+1. **Passing data between hooks**: Needing data in multiple hooks from a 3rd party API, it could be retrieved and used in `beforeChange` and later used again in an `afterChange` hook without having to fetch it twice.
 2. **Preventing infinite loops**: Calling `payload.update()` on the same document that triggered an `afterChange` hook will create an infinite loop, control the flow by assigning a no-op condition to context
 3. **Passing data to local API**: Setting values on the `req.context` and pass it to `payload.create()` you can provide additional data to hooks without adding extraneous fields.
 4. **Passing data between hooks and middleware or custom endpoints**: Hooks could set context across multiple collections and then be used in a final `postMiddleware`.
@@ -43,7 +43,6 @@ const Customer: CollectionConfig = {
       },
     ],
     afterChange: [
-
       async ({ context, doc, req }) => {
         // use context.customerData without needing to fetch it again
         if (context.customerData.contacted === false) {
@@ -121,11 +120,11 @@ const MyCollection: CollectionConfig = {
 }
 ```
 
-## TypeScript
+## Typing context
 
-The default TypeScript interface for `context` is `{ [key: string]: unknown }`. If you prefer a more strict typing in your project or when authoring plugins for others, you can override this using the `declare` syntax.
+The default typescript interface for `context` is `{ [key: string]: unknown }`. If you prefer a more strict typing in your project or when authoring plugins for others, you can override this using the `declare` syntax.
 
-This is known as "type augmentation", a TypeScript feature which allows us to add types to existing objects. Simply put this in any `.ts` or `.d.ts` file:
+This is known as "type augmentation" - a TypeScript feature which allows us to add types to existing objects. Simply put this in any .ts or .d.ts file:
 
 ```ts
 import { RequestContext as OriginalRequestContext } from 'payload'

docs/hooks/fields.mdx

@@ -1,49 +1,38 @@
 ---
 title: Field Hooks
 label: Fields
-order: 40
+order: 30
 desc: Hooks can be added to any fields, and optionally modify the return value of the field before the operation continues.
-keywords: hooks, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: hooks, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
-Field Hooks are [Hooks](./overview) that run on Documents on a per-field basis. They allow you to execute your own logic during specific events of the Document lifecycle. Field Hooks offer incredible potential for isolating your logic from the rest of your [Collection Hooks](./collections) and [Global Hooks](./globals).
+Field-level hooks offer incredible potential for encapsulating your logic. They help to isolate concerns and package up
+functionalities to be easily reusable across your projects.
 
-To add Hooks to a Field, use the `hooks` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
+**Example use cases include:**
+
+- Automatically add an `owner` relationship to a Document based on the `req.user.id`
+- Encrypt / decrypt a sensitive field using `beforeValidate` and `afterRead` hooks
+- Auto-generate field data using a `beforeValidate` hook
+- Format incoming data such as kebab-casing a document `slug` with `beforeValidate`
+- Restrict updating a document to only once every X hours using the `beforeChange` hook
+
+**All field types provide the following hooks:**
+
+- [beforeValidate](#beforevalidate)
+- [beforeChange](#beforechange)
+- beforeDuplicate(#beforeduplicate)
+- [afterChange](#afterchange)
+- [afterRead](#afterread)
+
+## Config
+
+Example field configuration:
 
 ```ts
-import type { Field } from 'payload';
+import { Field } from 'payload/types';
 
-export const FieldWithHooks: Field = {
-  // ...
-  hooks: { // highlight-line
-    // ...
-  },
-}
-```
-
-The following Field Hooks are available:
-
-- [`beforeValidate`](#beforevalidate)
-- [`beforeChange`](#beforechange)
-- [`beforeDuplicate`](#beforeduplicate)
-- [`afterChange`](#afterchange)
-- [`afterRead`](#afterread)
-
-## Config Options
-
-All Field Hooks accept an array of synchronous or asynchronous functions. These functions can optionally modify the return value of the field before the operation continues. All Field Hooks are formatted to accept the same arguments, although some arguments may be `undefined` based the specific hook type.
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Important:</strong>
-  Due to GraphQL's typed nature, changing the type of data that you return from a field will produce errors in the [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview). If you need to change the shape or type of data, consider [Collection Hooks](./collections) or [Global Hooks](./hooks) instead.
-</Banner>
-
-To add hooks to a Field, use the `hooks` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
-
-```ts
-import type { Field } from 'payload';
-
-const FieldWithHooks: Field = {
+const ExampleField: Field = {
   name: 'name',
   type: 'text',
   // highlight-start
@@ -58,40 +47,67 @@ const FieldWithHooks: Field = {
 }
 ```
 
-The following arguments are provided to all Field Hooks:
+## Arguments and return values
 
-| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
-| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against. If the field belongs to a Global, this will be `null`.                                                                                                                       |
-| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between Hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
-| **`data`**               | In the `afterRead` hook this is the full Document. In the `create` and `update` operations, this is the incoming data passed through the operation.                                                                                 |
-| **`field`**              | The [Field](../fields/overview) which the Hook is running against.                                                                                                                                                                          |
-| **`findMany`**           | Boolean to denote if this hook is running against finding one, or finding many within the `afterRead` hook.                                                                                                           |
-| **`global`**             | The [Global](../configuration/globals) in which this Hook is running against. If the field belongs to a Collection, this will be `null`.                                                                                                                       |
-| **`operation`**          | The name of the operation that this hook is running within. Useful within `beforeValidate`, `beforeChange`, and `afterChange` hooks to differentiate between `create` and `update` operations. |
-| **`originalDoc`**        | In the `update` operation, this is the Document before changes were applied. In the `afterChange` hook, this is the resulting Document.                                                                                        |
-| **`overrideAccess`**        | A boolean to denote if the current operation is overriding [Access Control](../access-control/overview).                                                                                                                                                                          |
-| **`path`**             | The path to the [Field](../fields/overview) in the schema.                                                                                                                                                                          |
-| **`previousDoc`**        | In the `afterChange` Hook, this is the Document before changes were applied.                                                                                                                                                |
-| **`previousSiblingDoc`** | The sibling data of the Document before changes being applied, only in `beforeChange` and `afterChange` hook.                                                                                                         |
-| **`previousValue`**      | The previous value of the field, before changes, only in `beforeChange` and `afterChange` hooks.                                                                                                                      |
-| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`schemaPath`**         | The path of the [Field](../fields/overview) in the schema.                                                                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`siblingData`**        | The data of sibling fields adjacent to the field that the Hook is running against.        |
-| **`siblingDocWithLocales`**      | The sibling data of the Document with all [Locales](../configuration/localization).        |
-| **`value`**              | The value of the [Field](../fields/overview).                                                                                                                                                                                               |
+All field-level hooks are formatted to accept the same arguments, although some arguments may be `undefined` based on
+which field hook you are utilizing.
 
 <Banner type="success">
   <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  It's a good idea to conditionally scope your logic based on which operation is executing. For example, if you are writing a `beforeChange` hook, you may want to perform different logic based on if the current `operation` is `create` or `update`.
+  <br />
+  It's a good idea to conditionally scope your logic based on which operation is executing. For
+  example, if you are writing a <strong>beforeChange</strong> hook, you may want to perform
+  different logic based on if the current <strong>operation</strong> is <strong>create</strong> or{' '}
+  <strong>update</strong>.
 </Banner>
 
+#### Arguments
+
+Field Hooks receive one `args` argument that contains the following properties:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`data`**               | The data passed to update the document within `create` and `update` operations, and the full document itself in the `afterRead` hook.                                                                                 |
+| **`siblingData`**        | The sibling data passed to a field that the hook is running against.                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`findMany`**           | Boolean to denote if this hook is running against finding one, or finding many within the `afterRead` hook.                                                                                                           |
+| **`operation`**          | A string relating to which operation the field type is currently executing within. Useful within `beforeValidate`, `beforeChange`, and `afterChange` hooks to differentiate between `create` and `update` operations. |
+| **`originalDoc`**        | The full original document in `update` operations. In the `afterChange` hook, this is the resulting document of the operation.                                                                                        |
+| **`previousDoc`**        | The document before changes were applied, only in `afterChange` hooks.                                                                                                                                                |
+| **`previousSiblingDoc`** | The sibling data of the document before changes being applied, only in `beforeChange` and `afterChange` hook.                                                                                                         |
+| **`req`**                | The Express `request` object. It is mocked for Local API operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`value`**              | The value of the field.                                                                                                                                                                                               |
+| **`previousValue`**      | The previous value of the field, before changes, only in `beforeChange` and `afterChange` hooks.                                                                                                                      |
+| **`context`**            | Context passed to this hook. More info can be found under [Context](/docs/hooks/context)                                                                                                                              |
+| **`field`**              | The field which the hook is running against.                                                                                                                                                                          |
+| **`collection`**         | The collection which the field belongs to. If the field belongs to a global, this will be null.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`global`**             | The global which the field belongs to. If the field belongs to a collection, this will be null.                                                                                                                       |
+
+#### Return value
+
+All field hooks can optionally modify the return value of the field before the operation continues. Field Hooks may
+optionally return the value that should be used within the field.
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Important</strong>
+  <br />
+  Due to GraphQL's typed nature, you should never change the type of data that you return from a
+  field, otherwise GraphQL will produce errors. If you need to change the shape or type of data,
+  reconsider Field Hooks and instead evaluate if Collection / Global hooks might suit you better.
+</Banner>
+
+## Examples of Field Hooks
+
+To better illustrate how field-level hooks can be applied, here are some specific examples. These demonstrate the
+flexibility and potential of field hooks in different contexts. Remember, these examples are just a starting point - the
+true potential of field-level hooks lies in their adaptability to a wide array of use cases.
+
 ### beforeValidate
 
-Runs before the `update` operation. This hook allows you to pre-process or format field data before it undergoes validation.
+Runs before the `update` operation. This hook allows you to pre-process or format field data before it undergoes
+validation.
 
 ```ts
-import type { Field } from 'payload'
+import { Field } from 'payload/types'
 
 const usernameField: Field = {
   name: 'username',
@@ -118,7 +134,7 @@ you can be confident that the field data that will be saved to the document is v
 validations.
 
 ```ts
-import type { Field } from 'payload'
+import { Field } from 'payload/types'
 
 const emailField: Field = {
   name: 'email',
@@ -146,7 +162,7 @@ The `afterChange` hook is executed after a field's value has been changed and sa
 for post-processing or triggering side effects based on the new value of the field.
 
 ```ts
-import type { Field } from 'payload'
+import { Field } from 'payload/types'
 
 const membershipStatusField: Field = {
   name: 'membershipStatus',
@@ -183,7 +199,7 @@ The `afterRead` hook is invoked after a field value is read from the database. T
 transforming the field data for output.
 
 ```ts
-import type { Field } from 'payload'
+import { Field } from 'payload/types'
 
 const dateField: Field = {
   name: 'createdAt',
@@ -214,7 +230,7 @@ By Default, unique and required text fields Payload will append "- Copy" to the
 Here is an example of a number field with a hook that increments the number to avoid unique constraint errors when duplicating a document:
 
 ```ts
-import type { Field } from 'payload'
+import { Field } from 'payload/types'
 
 const numberField: Field = {
   name: 'number',
@@ -233,7 +249,7 @@ const numberField: Field = {
 Payload exports a type for field hooks which can be accessed and used as follows:
 
 ```ts
-import type { FieldHook } from 'payload'
+import type { FieldHook } from 'payload/types'
 
 // Field hook type is a generic that takes three arguments:
 // 1: The document type

docs/hooks/globals.mdx

@@ -1,44 +1,33 @@
 ---
 title: Global Hooks
 label: Globals
-order: 30
+order: 40
 desc: Hooks can be added to any Global and allow you to validate data, flatten locales, hide protected fields, remove fields and more.
-keywords: hooks, globals, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: hooks, globals, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
-Global Hooks are [Hooks](./overview) that run on [Global](../configuration/globals) Documents. They allow you to execute your own logic during specific events of the Document lifecycle.
+Globals feature the ability to define the following hooks:
 
-To add Hooks to a Global, use the `hooks` property in your [Global Config](../configuration/globals):
+- [beforeValidate](#beforevalidate)
+- [beforeChange](#beforechange)
+- [afterChange](#afterchange)
+- [beforeRead](#beforeread)
+- [afterRead](#afterread)
+
+## Config
+
+All Global Hook properties accept arrays of synchronous or asynchronous functions. Each Hook type receives specific arguments and has the ability to modify specific outputs.
+
+`globals/example-hooks.js`
 
 ```ts
-import type { GlobalConfig } from 'payload';
+import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload/types';
 
-export const GlobalWithHooks: GlobalConfig = {
-  // ...
-  hooks: { // highlight-line
-    // ...
-  },
-}
-```
-
-The following Global Hooks are available:
-
-- [`beforeValidate`](#beforevalidate)
-- [`beforeChange`](#beforechange)
-- [`afterChange`](#afterchange)
-- [`beforeRead`](#beforeread)
-- [`afterRead`](#afterread)
-
-## Config Options
-
-All Global Hooks accept an array of [synchronous or asynchronous functions](./overview#async-vs-synchronous). Each Global Hook receives specific arguments based on its own type, and has the ability to modify specific outputs.
-
-```ts
-import type { GlobalConfig } from 'payload';
-
-const GlobalWithHooks: GlobalConfig = {
-  // ...
-  // highlight-start
+const ExampleHooks: GlobalConfig = {
+  slug: 'header',
+  fields: [
+    { name: 'title', type: 'text'},
+  ]
   hooks: {
     beforeValidate: [(args) => {...}],
     beforeChange: [(args) => {...}],
@@ -46,7 +35,6 @@ const GlobalWithHooks: GlobalConfig = {
     afterChange: [(args) => {...}],
     afterRead: [(args) => {...}],
   }
-  // highlight-end
 }
 ```
 
@@ -55,126 +43,76 @@ const GlobalWithHooks: GlobalConfig = {
 Runs before the `update` operation. This hook allows you to add or format data before the incoming data is validated.
 
 ```ts
-import type { GlobalBeforeValidateHook } from 'payload'
+import { GlobalBeforeValidateHook } from 'payload/types'
 
 const beforeValidateHook: GlobalBeforeValidateHook = async ({
   data, // incoming data to update or create with
-  req, // full Request object
+  req, // full express request
   originalDoc, // original document
 }) => {
   return data // Return data to update the document with
 }
 ```
 
-The following arguments are provided to the `beforeValidate` hook:
-
-| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
-| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`global`**         | The [Global](../configuration/globals) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
-| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between Hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
-| **`data`**               | The incoming data passed through the operation.                                                                                 |
-| **`originalDoc`**        | The Document before changes are applied.                                                                                        |
-| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
-
 ### beforeChange
 
 Immediately following validation, `beforeChange` hooks will run within the `update` operation. At this stage, you can be confident that the data that will be saved to the document is valid in accordance to your field validations. You can optionally modify the shape of data to be saved.
 
 ```ts
-import type { GlobalBeforeChangeHook } from 'payload'
+import { GlobalBeforeChangeHook } from 'payload/types'
 
 const beforeChangeHook: GlobalBeforeChangeHook = async ({
   data, // incoming data to update or create with
-  req, // full Request object
+  req, // full express request
   originalDoc, // original document
 }) => {
   return data // Return data to update the document with
 }
 ```
 
-The following arguments are provided to the `beforeChange` hook:
-
-| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
-| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`global`**         | The [Global](../configuration/globals) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
-| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
-| **`data`**               | The incoming data passed through the operation.                                                                                 |
-| **`originalDoc`**        | The Document before changes are applied.                                                                                        |
-| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
-
 ### afterChange
 
 After a global is updated, the `afterChange` hook runs. Use this hook to purge caches of your applications, sync site data to CRMs, and more.
 
 ```ts
-import type { GlobalAfterChangeHook } from 'payload'
+import { GlobalAfterChangeHook } from 'payload/types'
 
 const afterChangeHook: GlobalAfterChangeHook = async ({
   doc, // full document data
   previousDoc, // document data before updating the collection
-  req, // full Request object
+  req, // full express request
 }) => {
   return data
 }
 ```
 
-The following arguments are provided to the `afterChange` hook:
-
-| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
-| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`global`**         | The [Global](../configuration/globals) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
-| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
-| **`doc`**               | The resulting Document after changes are applied. |
-| **`previousDoc`**        | The Document before changes were applied. |
-| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
-
 ### beforeRead
 
 Runs before `findOne` global operation is transformed for output by `afterRead`. This hook fires before hidden fields are removed and before localized fields are flattened into the requested locale. Using this Hook will provide you with all locales and all hidden fields via the `doc` argument.
 
 ```ts
-import type { GlobalBeforeReadHook } from 'payload'
+import { GlobalBeforeReadHook } from 'payload/types'
 
 const beforeReadHook: GlobalBeforeReadHook = async ({
   doc, // full document data
-  req, // full Request object
+  req, // full express request
 }) => {...}
 ```
 
-The following arguments are provided to the `beforeRead` hook:
-
-| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
-| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`global`**         | The [Global](../configuration/globals) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
-| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
-| **`doc`**               | The resulting Document after changes are applied. |
-| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
-
 ### afterRead
 
 Runs as the last step before a global is returned. Flattens locales, hides protected fields, and removes fields that users do not have access to.
 
 ```ts
-import type { GlobalAfterReadHook } from 'payload'
+import { GlobalAfterReadHook } from 'payload/types'
 
 const afterReadHook: GlobalAfterReadHook = async ({
   doc, // full document data
-  req, // full Request object
+  req, // full express request
   findMany, // boolean to denote if this hook is running against finding one, or finding many (useful in versions)
 }) => {...}
 ```
 
-The following arguments are provided to the `beforeRead` hook:
-
-| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
-| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`global`**         | The [Global](../configuration/globals) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
-| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
-| **`findMany`**            | Boolean to denote if this hook is running against finding one, or finding many (useful in versions).                                                                                                                              |
-| **`doc`**               | The resulting Document after changes are applied. |
-| **`query`**          | The [Query](../queries/overview) of the request.
-| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
-
 ## TypeScript
 
 Payload exports a type for each Global hook which can be accessed as follows:
@@ -186,5 +124,5 @@ import type {
   GlobalAfterChangeHook,
   GlobalBeforeReadHook,
   GlobalAfterReadHook,
-} from 'payload'
+} from 'payload/types'
 ```

docs/hooks/overview.mdx

@@ -3,44 +3,45 @@ title: Hooks Overview
 label: Overview
 order: 10
 desc: Hooks allow you to add your own logic to Payload, including integrating with third-party APIs, adding auto-generated data, or modifing Payload's base functionality.
-keywords: hooks, overview, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: hooks, overview, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
-Hooks allow you to execute your own side effects during specific events of the Document lifecycle. With Hooks, you can transform Payload from a traditional CMS into a fully-fledged application framework. They allow you to perform business logic, third-party integrations, etc. during precise moments within the data lifecycle.
-
-There are many use cases for Hooks, including:
-
-- Modify data before it is read or updated
-- Encrypt and decrypt sensitive data
-- Integrate with a third-party CRM like HubSpot or Salesforce
-- Send a copy of uploaded files to Amazon S3 or similar
-- Process orders through a payment provider like Stripe
-- Send emails when contact forms are submitted
-- Track data ownership or changes over time
-
-There are three main types of Hooks in Payload:
-
-- [Collection Hooks](/docs/hooks/collections)
-- [Global Hooks](/docs/hooks/globals)
-- [Field Hooks](/docs/hooks/fields)
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
-  Payload also ships a set of _React_ hooks that you can use in your frontend application. Although they share a common name, these are very different things and should not be confused. [More details](../admin.hooks).
+<Banner type="info">
+  Hooks are powerful ways to tie into existing Payload actions in order to add your own logic like
+  integrating with third-party APIs, adding auto-generated data, or modifing Payload's base
+  functionality.
 </Banner>
 
-## Async vs. Synchronous
+**With Hooks, you can transform Payload from a traditional CMS into a fully-fledged application framework.**
 
-All Hooks can be written as either synchronous or asynchronous functions. Choosing the right type depends on your use case, but switching between the two is as simple as adding or removing the `async` keyword.
+Example uses:
 
-#### Asynchronous
+- Integrate user profiles with a third-party CRM such as Salesforce or Hubspot
+- Send a copy of uploaded files to Amazon S3 or similar
+- Automatically add `lastModifiedBy` data to a document to track who changed what over time
+- Encrypt a field's data when it's saved and decrypt it when it's read
+- Send emails when `ContactSubmission`s are created from a public website
+- Integrate with a payment provider like Stripe to automatically process payments when an `Order` is created
+- Securely recalculate order prices on the backend to ensure that the total price for `Order`s that users submit is accurate and valid
+- Generate and store a `lastLoggedIn` date on a user by adding an `afterLogin` hook
+- Add extra data to documents before they are read such as "average scores" or similar data that needs to be calculated on the fly
 
-If the Hook should modify data before a Document is updated or created, and it relies on asynchronous actions such as fetching data from a third party, it might make sense to define your Hook as an asynchronous function. This way you can be sure that your Hook completes before the operation's lifecycle continues. Async hooks are run in series - so if you have two async hooks defined, the second hook will wait for the first to complete before it starts.
+There are many more use cases for Hooks and the sky is the limit.
 
-#### Synchronous
+## Async vs. synchronous
+
+All hooks can be written as either synchronous or asynchronous functions. If the Hook should modify data before a document is updated or created, and it relies on asynchronous actions such as fetching data from a third party, it might make sense to define your Hook as an asynchronous function, so you can be sure that your Hook completes before the operation's lifecycle continues. Async hooks are run in series - so if you have two async hooks defined, the second hook will wait for the first to complete before it starts.
 
 If your Hook simply performs a side-effect, such as updating a CRM, it might be okay to define it synchronously, so the Payload operation does not have to wait for your hook to complete.
 
-## Server-only Execution
+## Server-only execution
 
-Hooks are only triggered on the server and are automatically excluded from the client-side bundle. This means that you can safely use sensitive business logic in your Hooks without worrying about exposing it to the client.
+Payload Hooks are only triggered on the server. You can safely [remove your hooks](/docs/admin/webpack#aliasing-server-only-modules) from your Admin panel's client-side code by customizing the Webpack config, which not only keeps your Admin bundles' filesize small but also ensures that any server-side only code does not cause problems within browser environments.
+
+## Hook Types
+
+You can specify hooks in the following contexts:
+
+- [Collection Hooks](/docs/hooks/collections)
+- [Field Hooks](/docs/hooks/fields)
+- [Global Hooks](/docs/hooks/globals)

docs/integrations/vercel-content-link.mdx

@@ -3,10 +3,10 @@ title: Vercel Content Link
 label: Vercel Content Link
 order: 10
 desc: Payload + Vercel Content Link allows yours editors to navigate directly from the content rendered on your front-end to the fields in Payload that control it.
-keywords: vercel, vercel content link, content link, visual editing, content source maps, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: vercel, vercel content link, visual editing, content source maps, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
-[Vercel Content Link](https://vercel.com/docs/workflow-collaboration/edit-mode#content-link) will allow your editors to navigate directly from the content rendered on your front-end to the fields in Payload that control it. This requires no changes to your front-end code and very few changes to your Payload Config.
+[Vercel Content Link](https://vercel.com/docs/workflow-collaboration/edit-mode#content-link) will allow your editors to navigate directly from the content rendered on your front-end to the fields in Payload that control it. This requires no changes to your front-end code and very few changes to your Payload config.
 
 ![Versions](/images/docs/vercel-visual-editing.jpg)
 
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ Setting up Payload with Vercel Content Link is easy. First, install the `@payloa
 npm i @payloadcms/plugin-csm
 ```
 
-Then in the `plugins` array of your Payload Config, call the plugin and enable any collections that require Content Source Maps.
+Then in the `plugins` array of your Payload config, call the plugin and enable any collections that require Content Source Maps.
 
 ```ts
 import { buildConfig } from "payload/config"
@@ -91,13 +91,13 @@ import { vercelStegaSplit } from '@vercel/stega'
 const { cleaned, encoded } = vercelStegaSplit(text)
 ```
 
-### Blocks and array fields
+### Block fields
 
-All `blocks` and `array` fields by definition do not have plain text strings to encode. For this reason, they are given an additional `_encodedSourceMap` property, which you can use to enable Content Link on entire _sections_ of your site. You can then specify the editing container by adding the `data-vercel-edit-target` HTML attribute to any top-level element of your block.
+All `blocks` fields by definition do not have plain text strings to encode. For this reason, blocks are given an additional `encodedSourceMap` key, which you can use to enable Content Link on entire sections of your site. You can then specify the editing container by adding the `data-vercel-edit-target` HTML attribute to any top-level element of your block.
 
 ```ts
 <div data-vercel-edit-target>
-  <span style={{ display: "none" }}>{_encodedSourceMap}</span>
+  <span style={{ display: "none" }}>{encodedSourceMap}</span>
   {children}
 </div>
 ```

docs/lexical/building-custom-features.mdx

@@ -1,839 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Lexical Building Custom Features
-label: Custom Features
-order: 40
-desc: Building custom lexical features
-keywords: lexical, rich text, editor, headless cms, feature, features
----
-
-Before you begin building custom features for Lexical, it is crucial to familiarize yourself with the [Lexical docs](https://lexical.dev/docs/intro), particularly the "Concepts" section. This foundation is necessary for understanding Lexical's core principles, such as nodes, editor state, and commands.
-
-Lexical features are designed to be modular, meaning each piece of functionality is encapsulated within just two specific interfaces: one for server-side code and one for client-side code.
-
-By convention, these are named feature.server.ts for server-side functionality and feature.client.ts for client-side functionality. The primary functionality is housed within feature.server.ts, which users will import into their projects. The client-side feature, although defined separately, is integrated and rendered server-side through the server feature. That way, we still maintain a clear boundary between server and client code, while also centralizing the code needed for a feature in basically one place. This approach is beneficial for managing all the bits and pieces which make up your feature as a whole, such as toolbar entries, buttons, or new nodes, allowing each feature to be neatly contained and managed independently.
-
-
-## Server Feature
-
-To start building new features, you should start with the server feature, which is the entry-point.
-
-**Example myFeature/feature.server.ts:**
-
-```ts
-import { createServerFeature } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical';
-
-export const MyFeature = createServerFeature({
-  feature: {
-  },
-  key: 'myFeature',
-})
-```
-
-`createServerFeature` is a helper function which lets you create new features without boilerplate code.
-
-Now, the feature is ready to be used in the editor:
-
-```ts
-import { MyFeature } from './myFeature/feature.server';
-import { lexicalEditor } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical';
-
-//...
- {
-    name: 'richText',
-    type: 'richText',
-    editor: lexicalEditor({
-      features: [
-        MyFeature(),
-      ],
-    }),
- },
-```
-
-By default, this server feature does nothing - you haven't added any functionality yet. Depending on what you want your
-feature to do, the ServerFeature type exposes various properties you can set to inject custom functionality into the lexical editor.
-
-### i18n
-
-Each feature can register their own translations, which are automatically scoped to the feature key:
-
-```ts
-import { createServerFeature } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical';
-
-
-export const MyFeature = createServerFeature({
-  feature: {
-    i18n: {
-      en: {
-        label: 'My Feature',
-      },
-      de: {
-        label: 'Mein Feature',
-      },
-    },
-  },
-  key: 'myFeature',
-})
-```
-
-This allows you to add i18n translations scoped to your feature. This specific example translation will be available under `lexical:myFeature:label` - `myFeature` being your feature key.
-
-### Markdown Transformers
-
-The Server Feature, just like the Client Feature, allows you to add markdown transformers. Markdown transformers on the server are used when [converting the editor from or to markdown](/docs/lexical/converters#markdown-lexical).
-
-```ts
-import { createServerFeature } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical';
-import type { ElementTransformer } from '@lexical/markdown'
-import {
-  $createMyNode,
-  $isMyNode,
-  MyNode
-} from './nodes/MyNode'
-
-const MyMarkdownTransformer: ElementTransformer = {
-  type: 'element',
-  dependencies: [MyNode],
-  export: (node, exportChildren) => {
-    if (!$isMyNode(node)) {
-      return null
-    }
-    return '+++'
-  },
-  // match ---
-  regExp: /^+++\s*$/,
-  replace: (parentNode) => {
-    const node = $createMyNode()
-    if (node) {
-      parentNode.replace(node)
-    }
-  },
-}
-
-
-export const MyFeature = createServerFeature({
-  feature: {
-    markdownTransformers: [MyMarkdownTransformer],
-  },
-  key: 'myFeature',
-})
-```
-
-In this example, the node will be outputted as `+++` in Markdown, and the markdown `+++` will be converted to a `MyNode` node in the editor.
-
-### Nodes
-
-While nodes added to the server feature do not control how the node is rendered in the editor, they control other aspects of the node:
-- HTML conversion
-- Node Hooks
-- Sub fields
-- Behavior in a headless editor
-
-The `createNode` helper function is used to create nodes with proper typing. It is recommended to use this function to create nodes.
-
-```ts
-import { createServerFeature, createNode } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical';
-import {
-  MyNode
-} from './nodes/MyNode'
-
-export const MyFeature = createServerFeature({
-  feature: {
-
-    nodes: [
-      // Use the createNode helper function to more easily create nodes with proper typing
-      createNode({
-        converters: {
-          html: {
-            converter: () => {
-              return `<hr/>`
-            },
-            nodeTypes: [MyNode.getType()],
-          },
-        },
-        // Here you can add your actual node. On the server, they will be
-        // used to initialize a headless editor which can be used to perform
-        // operations on the editor, like markdown / html conversion.
-        node: MyNode,
-      }),
-    ],
-  },
-  key: 'myFeature',
-})
-```
-
-While nodes in the client feature are added by themselves to the nodes array, nodes in the server feature can be added together with the following sibling options:
-
-| Option                          | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
-|---------------------------------|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| **`getSubFields`**              | If a node includes sub-fields (e.g. block and link nodes), passing the subFields schema here will make Payload automatically populate & run hooks for them.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
-| **`getSubFieldsData`**          | If a node includes sub-fields, the sub-fields data needs to be returned here, alongside `getSubFields` which returns their schema.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            |
-| **`graphQLPopulationPromises`** | Allows you to run population logic when a node's data was requested from GraphQL. While `getSubFields` and `getSubFieldsData` automatically handle populating sub-fields (since they run hooks on them), those are only populated in the Rest API. This is because the Rest API hooks do not have access to the 'depth' property provided by GraphQL. In order for them to be populated correctly in GraphQL, the population logic needs to be provided here. |
-| **`node`**                      | The actual lexical node needs to be provided here. This also supports [lexical node replacements](https://lexical.dev/docs/concepts/node-replacement).                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
-| **`validations`**               | This allows you to provide node validations, which are run when your document is being validated, alongside other Payload fields. You can use it to throw a validation error for a specific node in case its data is incorrect.                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
-| **`converters`**                | Allows you to define how a node can be serialized into different formats. Currently, only supports HTML. Markdown converters are defined in `markdownTransformers` and not here.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
-| **`hooks`**                     | Just like Payload fields, you can provide hooks which are run for this specific node. These are called Node Hooks.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            |
-
-### Feature load order
-
-Server features can also accept a function as the `feature` property (useful for sanitizing props, as mentioned below). This function will be called when the feature is loaded during the Payload sanitization process:
-
-```ts
-import { createServerFeature } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical';
-
-createServerFeature({
-  //...
-  feature: async ({ config, isRoot, props, resolvedFeatures, unSanitizedEditorConfig, featureProviderMap }) => {
-
-    return {
-      //Actual server feature here...
-    }
-  }
-})
-```
-
-"Loading" here means the process of calling this `feature` function. By default, features are called in the order in which they are added to the editor.
-However, sometimes you might want to load a feature after another feature has been loaded, or require a different feature to be loaded, throwing an error if this is not the case.
-
-Within lexical, one example where this is done are our list features. Both `UnorderedListFeature` and `OrderedListFeature` register the same `ListItem` node. Within `UnorderedListFeature` we register it normally, but within `OrderedListFeature` we want to only register the `ListItem` node if the `UnorderedListFeature` is not present - otherwise, we would have two features registering the same node.
-
-Here is how we do it:
-
-```ts
-import { createServerFeature, createNode } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical';
-
-export const OrderedListFeature = createServerFeature({
-  feature: ({ featureProviderMap }) => {
-    return {
-      // ...
-      nodes: featureProviderMap.has('unorderedList')
-        ? []
-        : [
-            createNode({
-              // ...
-            }),
-          ],
-    }
-  },
-  key: 'orderedList',
-})
-```
-
-`featureProviderMap` will always be available and contain all the features, even yet-to-be-loaded ones, so we can check if a feature is loaded by checking if its `key` present in the map.
-
-If you wanted to make sure a feature is loaded before another feature, you can use the `dependenciesPriority` property:
-
-```ts
-import { createServerFeature } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical';
-
-export const MyFeature = createServerFeature({
-  feature: ({ featureProviderMap }) => {
-    return {
-      // ...
-    }
-  },
-  key: 'myFeature',
-  dependenciesPriority: ['otherFeature'],
-})
-```
-
-| Option                     | Description                                                                                                                                                                                               |
-|----------------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| **`dependenciesSoft`**     | Keys of soft-dependencies needed for this feature. These are optional. Payload will attempt to load them before this feature, but doesn't throw an error if that's not possible.                          |
-| **`dependencies`**         | Keys of dependencies needed for this feature. These dependencies do not have to be loaded first, but they have to exist, otherwise an error will be thrown.                                               |
-| **`dependenciesPriority`** | Keys of priority dependencies needed for this feature. These dependencies have to be loaded first AND have to exist, otherwise an error will be thrown. They will be available in the `feature` property. |
-
-## Client Feature
-
-Most of the functionality which the user actually sees and interacts with, like toolbar items and React components for nodes, resides on the client-side.
-
-To set up your client-side feature, follow these three steps:
-
-1. **Create a Separate File**: Start by creating a new file specifically for your client feature, such as `myFeature/feature.client.ts`. It's important to keep client and server features in separate files to maintain a clean boundary between server and client code.
-2. **'use client'**: Mark that file with a 'use client' directive at the top of the file
-3. **Register the Client Feature**: Register the client feature within your server feature, by passing it to the `ClientFeature` prop. This is needed because the server feature is the sole entry-point of your feature. This also means you are not able to create a client feature without a server feature, as you will not be able to register it otherwise.
-
-**Example myFeature/feature.client.ts:**
-
-```ts
-'use client'
-
-import { createClientFeature } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical/client';
-
-export const MyClientFeature = createClientFeature({
-
-})
-```
-
-Explore the APIs available through ClientFeature to add the specific functionality you need. Remember, do not import directly from `'@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'` when working on the client-side, as it will cause errors with webpack or turbopack. Instead, use `'@payloadcms/richtext-lexical/client'` for all client-side imports. Type-imports are excluded from this rule and can always be imported.
-
-### Nodes
-
-Add nodes to the `nodes` array in **both** your client & server feature. On the server side, nodes are utilized for backend operations like HTML conversion in a headless editor. On the client side, these nodes are integral to how content is displayed and managed in the editor, influencing how they are rendered, behave, and saved in the database.
-
-Example:
-
-**myFeature/feature.client.ts:**
-
-```ts
-'use client'
-
-import { createClientFeature } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical/client';
-import { MyNode } from './nodes/MyNode';
-
-export const MyClientFeature = createClientFeature({
-  nodes: [MyNode]
-})
-```
-
-This also supports [lexical node replacements](https://lexical.dev/docs/concepts/node-replacement).
-
-**myFeature/nodes/MyNode.tsx:**
-
-Here is a basic DecoratorNode example:
-
-```ts
-import type {
-  DOMConversionMap,
-  DOMConversionOutput,
-  DOMExportOutput,
-  EditorConfig,
-  LexicalNode,
-  SerializedLexicalNode,
-} from 'lexical'
-
-import { $applyNodeReplacement, DecoratorNode } from 'lexical'
-
-// SerializedLexicalNode is the default lexical node.
-// By setting your SerializedMyNode type to SerializedLexicalNode,
-// you are basically saying that this node does not save any additional data.
-// If you want your node to save data, feel free to extend it
-export type SerializedMyNode = SerializedLexicalNode
-
-// Lazy-import the React component to your node here
-const MyNodeComponent = React.lazy(() =>
-  import('../component/index.js').then((module) => ({
-    default: module.MyNodeComponent,
-  })),
-)
-
-/**
- * This node is a DecoratorNode. DecoratorNodes allow you to render React components in the editor.
- *
- * They need both createDom and decorate functions. createDom => outside of the html. decorate => React Component inside of the html.
- *
- * If we used DecoratorBlockNode instead, we would only need a decorate method
- */
-export class MyNode extends DecoratorNode<React.ReactElement> {
-  static clone(node: MyNode): MyNode {
-    return new MyNode(node.__key)
-  }
-
-  static getType(): string {
-    return 'myNode'
-  }
-
-  /**
-   * Defines what happens if you copy a div element from another page and paste it into the lexical editor
-   *
-   * This also determines the behavior of lexical's internal HTML -> Lexical converter
-   */
-  static importDOM(): DOMConversionMap | null {
-    return {
-      div: () => ({
-        conversion: $yourConversionMethod,
-        priority: 0,
-      }),
-    }
-  }
-
-  /**
-   * The data for this node is stored serialized as JSON. This is the "load function" of that node: it takes the saved data and converts it into a node.
-   */
-  static importJSON(serializedNode: SerializedMyNode): MyNode {
-    return $createMyNode()
-  }
-
-  /**
-   * Determines how the hr element is rendered in the lexical editor. This is only the "initial" / "outer" HTML element.
-   */
-  createDOM(config: EditorConfig): HTMLElement {
-    const element = document.createElement('div')
-    return element
-  }
-
-  /**
-   * Allows you to render a React component within whatever createDOM returns.
-   */
-  decorate(): React.ReactElement {
-    return <MyNodeComponent nodeKey={this.__key} />
-  }
-
-  /**
-   * Opposite of importDOM, this function defines what happens when you copy a div element from the lexical editor and paste it into another page.
-   *
-   * This also determines the behavior of lexical's internal Lexical -> HTML converter
-   */
-  exportDOM(): DOMExportOutput {
-    return { element: document.createElement('div') }
-  }
-  /**
-   * Opposite of importJSON. This determines what data is saved in the database / in the lexical editor state.
-   */
-  exportJSON(): SerializedLexicalNode {
-    return {
-      type: 'myNode',
-      version: 1,
-    }
-  }
-
-  getTextContent(): string {
-    return '\n'
-  }
-
-  isInline(): false {
-    return false
-  }
-
-  updateDOM(): boolean {
-    return false
-  }
-}
-
-// This is used in the importDOM method. Totally optional if you do not want your node to be created automatically when copy & pasting certain dom elements
-// into your editor.
-function $yourConversionMethod(): DOMConversionOutput {
-  return { node: $createMyNode() }
-}
-
-// This is a utility method to create a new MyNode. Utility methods prefixed with $ make it explicit that this should only be used within lexical
-export function $createMyNode(): MyNode {
-  return $applyNodeReplacement(new MyNode())
-}
-
-// This is just a utility method you can use to check if a node is a MyNode. This also ensures correct typing.
-export function $isMyNode(
-  node: LexicalNode | null | undefined,
-): node is MyNode {
-  return node instanceof MyNode
-}
-```
-
-Please do not add any 'use client' directives to your nodes, as the node class can be used on the server.
-
-### Plugins
-
-One small part of a feature are plugins. The name stems from the lexical playground plugins and is just a small part of a lexical feature.
-Plugins are simply React components which are added to the editor, within all the lexical context providers. They can be used to add any functionality
-to the editor, by utilizing the lexical API.
-
-Most commonly, they are used to register [lexical listeners](https://lexical.dev/docs/concepts/listeners), [node transforms](https://lexical.dev/docs/concepts/transforms) or [commands](https://lexical.dev/docs/concepts/commands).
-For example, you could add a drawer to your plugin and register a command which opens it. That command can then be called from anywhere within lexical, e.g. from within your custom lexical node.
-
-To add a plugin, simply add it to the `plugins` array in your client feature:
-
-```ts
-'use client'
-
-import { createClientFeature } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical/client';
-import { MyPlugin } from './plugin';
-
-export const MyClientFeature = createClientFeature({
-  plugins: [MyPlugin]
-})
-```
-
-Example plugin.tsx:
-
-```ts
-'use client'
-import type {
-  LexicalCommand,
-} from 'lexical'
-
-import {
-  createCommand,
-  $getSelection,
-  $isRangeSelection,
-  COMMAND_PRIORITY_EDITOR
-} from 'lexical'
-
-import { useLexicalComposerContext } from '@lexical/react/LexicalComposerContext.js'
-import { $insertNodeToNearestRoot } from '@lexical/utils'
-import { useEffect } from 'react'
-
-import type { PluginComponent } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical' // type imports can be imported from @payloadcms/richtext-lexical - even on the client
-
-import {
-  $createMyNode,
-} from '../nodes/MyNode'
-import './index.scss'
-
-export const INSERT_MYNODE_COMMAND: LexicalCommand<void> = createCommand(
-  'INSERT_MYNODE_COMMAND',
-)
-
-/**
- * Plugin which registers a lexical command to insert a new MyNode into the editor
- */
-export const MyNodePlugin: PluginComponent= () => {
-  // The useLexicalComposerContext hook can be used to access the lexical editor instance
-  const [editor] = useLexicalComposerContext()
-
-  useEffect(() => {
-    return editor.registerCommand(
-      INSERT_MYNODE_COMMAND,
-      (type) => {
-        const selection = $getSelection()
-
-        if (!$isRangeSelection(selection)) {
-          return false
-        }
-
-        const focusNode = selection.focus.getNode()
-
-        if (focusNode !== null) {
-          const newMyNode = $createMyNode()
-          $insertNodeToNearestRoot(newMyNode)
-        }
-
-        return true
-      },
-      COMMAND_PRIORITY_EDITOR,
-    )
-  }, [editor])
-
-  return null
-}
-```
-
-In this example, we register a lexical command, which simply inserts a new MyNode into the editor. This command can be called from anywhere within lexical, e.g. from within a custom node.
-
-### Toolbar groups
-
-Toolbar groups are visual containers which hold toolbar items. There are different toolbar group types which determine *how* a toolbar item is displayed: `dropdown` and `buttons`.
-
-All the default toolbar groups are exported from `@payloadcms/richtext-lexical/client`. You can use them to add your own toolbar items to the editor:
-- Dropdown: `toolbarAddDropdownGroupWithItems`
-- Dropdown: `toolbarTextDropdownGroupWithItems`
-- Buttons: `toolbarFormatGroupWithItems`
-- Buttons: `toolbarFeatureButtonsGroupWithItems`
-
-Within dropdown groups, items are positioned vertically when the dropdown is opened and include the icon & label. Within button groups, items are positioned horizontally and only include the icon. If a toolbar group with the same key is declared twice, all its items will be merged into one group.
-
-#### Custom buttons toolbar group
-
-| Option      | Description                                                                                                                                            |
-|-------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| **`items`** | All toolbar items part of this toolbar group need to be added here.                                                                                    |
-| **`key`**   | Each toolbar group needs to have a unique key. Groups with the same keys will have their items merged together.                                        |
-| **`order`** | Determines where the toolbar group will be.                                                                                                            |
-| **`type`**  | Controls the toolbar group type. Set to `buttons` to create a buttons toolbar group, which displays toolbar items horizontally using only their icons. |
-
-Example:
-```ts
-import type { ToolbarGroup, ToolbarGroupItem } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
-
-export const toolbarFormatGroupWithItems = (items: ToolbarGroupItem[]): ToolbarGroup => {
-  return {
-    type: 'buttons',
-    items,
-    key: 'myButtonsToolbar',
-    order: 10,
-  }
-}
-```
-
-#### Custom dropdown toolbar group
-
-| Option               | Description                                                                                                                                                                          |
-|----------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| **`items`**          | All toolbar items part of this toolbar group need to be added here.                                                                                                                  |
-| **`key`**            | Each toolbar group needs to have a unique key. Groups with the same keys will have their items merged together.                                                                      |
-| **`order`**          | Determines where the toolbar group will be.                                                                                                                                          |
-| **`type`**           | Controls the toolbar group type. Set to `dropdown` to create a buttons toolbar group, which displays toolbar items vertically using their icons and labels, if the dropdown is open. |
-| **`ChildComponent`** | The dropdown toolbar ChildComponent allows you to pass in a React Component which will be displayed within the dropdown button.                                                      |
-
-Example:
-```ts
-import type { ToolbarGroup, ToolbarGroupItem } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
-
-import { MyIcon } from './icons/MyIcon'
-
-export const toolbarAddDropdownGroupWithItems = (items: ToolbarGroupItem[]): ToolbarGroup => {
-  return {
-    type: 'dropdown',
-    ChildComponent: MyIcon,
-    items,
-    key: 'myDropdownToolbar',
-    order: 10,
-  }
-}
-```
-
-### Toolbar items
-
-Custom nodes and features on its own are pointless, if they can't be added to the editor. You will need to hook in one of our interfaces which allow the user to interact with the editor:
-
-- Fixed toolbar which stays fixed at the top of the editor
-- Inline, floating toolbar which appears when selecting text
-- Slash menu which appears when typing `/` in the editor
-- Markdown transformers, which are triggered when a certain text pattern is typed in the editor
-- Or any other interfaces which can be added via your own plugins. Our toolbars are a prime example of this - they are just plugins.
-
-To add a toolbar item to either the floating or the inline toolbar, you can add a ToolbarGroup with a ToolbarItem to the `toolbarFixed` or `toolbarInline` props of your client feature:
-
-```ts
-'use client'
-
-import { createClientFeature, toolbarAddDropdownGroupWithItems } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical/client';
-import { IconComponent } from './icon';
-import { $isHorizontalRuleNode } from './nodes/MyNode';
-import { INSERT_MYNODE_COMMAND } from './plugin';
-import { $isNodeSelection } from 'lexical'
-
-export const MyClientFeature = createClientFeature({
-   toolbarFixed: {
-    groups: [
-      toolbarAddDropdownGroupWithItems([
-        {
-          ChildComponent: IconComponent,
-          isActive: ({ selection }) => {
-            if (!$isNodeSelection(selection) || !selection.getNodes().length) {
-              return false
-            }
-
-            const firstNode = selection.getNodes()[0]
-            return $isHorizontalRuleNode(firstNode)
-          },
-          key: 'myNode',
-          label: ({ i18n }) => {
-            return i18n.t('lexical:myFeature:label')
-          },
-          onSelect: ({ editor }) => {
-            editor.dispatchCommand(INSERT_MYNODE_COMMAND, undefined)
-          },
-        },
-      ]),
-    ],
-  },
-})
-```
-
-You will have to provide a toolbar group first, and then the items for that toolbar group (more on that above).
-
-A `ToolbarItem` various props you can use to customize its behavior:
-
-| Option               | Description                                                                                                                                                                                |
-|----------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| **`ChildComponent`** | A React component which is rendered within your toolbar item's default button component. Usually, you want this to be an icon.                                                             |
-| **`Component`**      | A React component which is rendered in place of the toolbar item's default button component, thus completely replacing it. The `ChildComponent` and `onSelect` properties will be ignored. |
-| **`label`**          | The label will be displayed in your toolbar item, if it's within a dropdown group. To make use of i18n, this can be a function.                                                            |
-| **`key`**            | Each toolbar item needs to have a unique key.                                                                                                                                              |
-| **`onSelect`**       | A function which is called when the toolbar item is clicked.                                                                                                                               |
-| **`isEnabled`**      | This is optional and controls if the toolbar item is clickable or not. If `false` is returned here, it will be grayed out and unclickable.                                                 |
-| **`isActive`**       | This is optional and controls if the toolbar item is highlighted or not                                                                                                                    |
-
-The API for adding an item to the floating inline toolbar (`toolbarInline`) is identical. If you wanted to add an item to both the fixed and inline toolbar, you can extract it into its own variable
-(typed as `ToolbarGroup[]`) and add it to both the `toolbarFixed` and `toolbarInline` props.
-
-### Slash Menu groups
-
-We're exporting `slashMenuBasicGroupWithItems` from `@payloadcms/richtext-lexical/client` which you can use to add items to the slash menu labelled "Basic". If you want to create your own slash menu group, here is an example:
-
-```ts
-import type {
-  SlashMenuGroup,
-  SlashMenuItem,
-} from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
-
-export function mwnSlashMenuGroupWithItems(items: SlashMenuItem[]): SlashMenuGroup {
-  return {
-    items,
-    key: 'myGroup',
-    label: 'My Group' // <= This can be a function to make use of i18n
-  }
-}
-```
-
-By creating a helper function like this, you can easily re-use it and add items to it. All Slash Menu groups with the same keys will have their items merged together.
-
-| Option      | Description                                                                                                                           |
-|-------------|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| **`items`** | An array of `SlashMenuItem`'s which will be displayed in the slash menu.                                                              |
-| **`label`** | The label will be displayed before your Slash Menu group. In order to make use of i18n, this can be a function.                       |
-| **`key`**   | Used for class names and, if label is not provided, for display. Slash menus with the same key will have their items merged together. |
-
-
-### Slash Menu items
-
-The API for adding items to the slash menu is similar. There are slash menu groups, and each slash menu groups has items. Here is an example:
-
-```ts
-'use client'
-
-import { createClientFeature, slashMenuBasicGroupWithItems } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical/client';
-import { INSERT_MYNODE_COMMAND } from './plugin';
-import { IconComponent } from './icon';
-
-export const MyClientFeature = createClientFeature({
-  slashMenu: {
-    groups: [
-      slashMenuBasicGroupWithItems([
-        {
-          Icon: IconComponent,
-          key: 'myNode',
-          keywords: ['myNode', 'myFeature', 'someOtherKeyword'],
-          label: ({ i18n }) => {
-            return i18n.t('lexical:myFeature:label')
-          },
-          onSelect: ({ editor }) => {
-            editor.dispatchCommand(INSERT_MYNODE_COMMAND, undefined)
-          },
-        },
-      ]),
-    ],
-  },
-})
-```
-
-| Option         | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
-|----------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| **`Icon`**     | The icon which is rendered in your slash menu item.                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
-| **`label`**    | The label will be displayed in your slash menu item. In order to make use of i18n, this can be a function.                                                                                                                                                                        |
-| **`key`**      | Each slash menu item needs to have a unique key. The key will be matched when typing, displayed if no `label` property is set, and used for classNames.                                                                                                                           |
-| **`onSelect`** | A function which is called when the slash menu item is selected.                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`keywords`** | Keywords are used to match the item for different texts typed after the '/'. E.g. you might want to show a horizontal rule item if you type both /hr, /separator, /horizontal etc. In addition to the keywords, the label and key will be used to find the right slash menu item. |
-
-
-### Markdown Transformers
-
-The Client Feature, just like the Server Feature, allows you to add markdown transformers. Markdown transformers on the client are used to create new nodes when a certain markdown pattern is typed in the editor.
-
-```ts
-import { createClientFeature } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical/client';
-import type { ElementTransformer } from '@lexical/markdown'
-import {
-  $createMyNode,
-  $isMyNode,
-  MyNode
-} from './nodes/MyNode'
-
-const MyMarkdownTransformer: ElementTransformer = {
-  type: 'element',
-  dependencies: [MyNode],
-  export: (node, exportChildren) => {
-    if (!$isMyNode(node)) {
-      return null
-    }
-    return '+++'
-  },
-  // match ---
-  regExp: /^+++\s*$/,
-  replace: (parentNode) => {
-    const node = $createMyNode()
-    if (node) {
-      parentNode.replace(node)
-    }
-  },
-}
-
-
-export const MyFeature = createClientFeature({
-  markdownTransformers: [MyMarkdownTransformer],
-})
-```
-
-In this example, a new `MyNode` will be inserted into the editor when `+++ ` is typed.
-
-### Providers
-
-You can add providers to your client feature, which will be nested below the `EditorConfigProvider`. This can be useful if you want to provide some context to your nodes or other parts of your feature.
-
-```ts
-'use client'
-
-import { createClientFeature } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical/client';
-import { TableContext } from './context';
-
-export const MyClientFeature = createClientFeature({
-    providers: [TableContext],
-})
-```
-
-## Props
-
-To accept props in your feature, type them as a generic.
-
-Server Feature:
-
-```ts
-createServerFeature<UnSanitizedProps, SanitizedProps, UnSanitizedClientProps>({
-  //...
-})
-```
-
-Client Feature:
-
-```ts
-createClientFeature<UnSanitizedClientProps, SanitizedClientProps>({
-  //...
-})
-```
-
-The unSanitized props are what the user will pass to the feature when they call its provider function and add it to their editor config. You then have an option to sanitize those props.
-To sanitize those in the server feature, you can pass a function to `feature` instead of an object:
-
-```ts
-createServerFeature<UnSanitizedProps, SanitizedProps, UnSanitizedClientProps>({
-  //...
-  feature: async ({ config, isRoot, props, resolvedFeatures, unSanitizedEditorConfig, featureProviderMap }) => {
-    const sanitizedProps = doSomethingWithProps(props)
-
-    return {
-      sanitizedServerFeatureProps: sanitizedProps,
-      //Actual server feature here...
-    }
-  }
-})
-```
-
-Keep in mind that any sanitized props then have to be returned in the `sanitizedServerFeatureProps` property.
-
-In the client feature, it works similarly:
-
-```ts
-createClientFeature<UnSanitizedClientProps, SanitizedClientProps>(
-  ({ clientFunctions, featureProviderMap, props, resolvedFeatures, unSanitizedEditorConfig }) => {
-    const sanitizedProps = doSomethingWithProps(props)
-    return {
-      sanitizedClientFeatureProps:  sanitizedProps,
-      //Actual client feature here...
-    }
-  },
-)
-```
-
-### Bringing props from the server to the client
-
-By default, the client feature will never receive any props from the server feature. In order to pass props from the server to the client, you can need to return those props in the server feature:
-
-```ts
-type UnSanitizedClientProps = {
-  test: string
-}
-
-createServerFeature<UnSanitizedProps, SanitizedProps, UnSanitizedClientProps>({
-  //...
-  feature: {
-    clientFeatureProps: {
-      test: 'myValue'
-    }
-  }
-})
-```
-
-The reason the client feature does not have the same props available as the server by default is because all client props need to be serializable. You can totally accept things like functions or Maps as props in your server feature, but you will not be able to send those to the client. In the end, those props are sent from the server to the client over the network, so they need to be serializable.
-
-## More information
-
-Have a look at the [features we've already built](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/beta/packages/richtext-lexical/src/features) - understanding how they work will help you understand how to create your own. There is no difference between the features included by default and the ones you create yourself - since those features are all isolated from the "core", you have access to the same APIs, whether the feature is part of Payload or not!

docs/lexical/converters.mdx

@@ -6,6 +6,7 @@ desc: Conversion between lexical, markdown and html
 keywords: lexical, rich text, editor, headless cms, convert, html, mdx, markdown, md, conversion, export
 ---
 
+
 ## Lexical => HTML
 
 Lexical saves data in JSON, but can also generate its HTML representation via two main methods:
@@ -20,7 +21,7 @@ The editor comes with built-in HTML serializers, simplifying the process of conv
 To add HTML generation directly within the collection, follow the example below:
 
 ```ts
-import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
 import { HTMLConverterFeature, lexicalEditor, lexicalHTML } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
 
@@ -46,55 +47,33 @@ const Pages: CollectionConfig = {
 
 The `lexicalHTML()` function creates a new field that automatically converts the referenced lexical richText field into HTML through an afterRead hook.
 
-### Generating HTML anywhere on the server
+### Generating HTML anywhere on the server:
 
-If you wish to convert JSON to HTML ad-hoc, use the `convertLexicalToHTML` function:
+If you wish to convert JSON to HTML ad-hoc, use this code snippet:
 
 ```ts
-import { consolidateHTMLConverters, convertLexicalToHTML } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
+import type { SerializedEditorState } from 'lexical'
+import {
+  type SanitizedEditorConfig,
+  convertLexicalToHTML,
+  consolidateHTMLConverters,
+} from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
 
-
-await convertLexicalToHTML({
-  converters: consolidateHTMLConverters({ editorConfig }),
-  data: editorData,
-  payload, // if you have Payload but no req available, pass it in here to enable server-only functionality (e.g. proper conversion of upload nodes)
-  req, // if you have req available, pass it in here to enable server-only functionality (e.g. proper conversion of upload nodes). No need to pass in Payload if req is passed in.
-})
+async function lexicalToHTML(
+  editorData: SerializedEditorState,
+  editorConfig: SanitizedEditorConfig,
+) {
+  return await convertLexicalToHTML({
+    converters: consolidateHTMLConverters({ editorConfig }),
+    data: editorData,
+  })
+}
 ```
+
 This method employs `convertLexicalToHTML` from `@payloadcms/richtext-lexical`, which converts the serialized editor state into HTML.
 
 Because every `Feature` is able to provide html converters, and because the `htmlFeature` can modify those or provide their own, we need to consolidate them with the default html Converters using the `consolidateHTMLConverters` function.
 
-#### Example: Generating HTML within an afterRead hook
-
-```ts
-import type { FieldHook } from 'payload'
-
-import {
-  HTMLConverterFeature,
-  consolidateHTMLConverters,
-  convertLexicalToHTML,
-  defaultEditorConfig,
-  defaultEditorFeatures,
-  sanitizeServerEditorConfig,
-} from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
-
-const hook: FieldHook = async ({ req, siblingData }) => {
-  const editorConfig = defaultEditorConfig
-
-  editorConfig.features = [...defaultEditorFeatures, HTMLConverterFeature({})]
-
-  const sanitizedEditorConfig = await sanitizeServerEditorConfig(editorConfig, req.payload.config)
-
-  const html = await convertLexicalToHTML({
-    converters: consolidateHTMLConverters({ editorConfig: sanitizedEditorConfig }),
-    data: siblingData.lexicalSimple,
-    req,
-  })
-  return html
-}
-```
-
 ### CSS
 
 Payload's lexical HTML converter does not generate CSS for you, but it does add classes to the generated HTML. You can use these classes to style the HTML in your frontend.
@@ -116,33 +95,19 @@ HTML Converters are typed as `HTMLConverter`, which contains the node type it sh
 import type { HTMLConverter } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
 
 const UploadHTMLConverter: HTMLConverter<SerializedUploadNode> = {
-  converter: async ({ node, req }) => {
-    const uploadDocument: {
-      value?: any
-      } = {}
-    if(req) {
-      await populate({
-        id,
-        collectionSlug: node.relationTo,
-        currentDepth: 0,
-        data: uploadDocument,
-        depth: 1,
-        draft: false,
-        key: 'value',
-        overrideAccess: false,
-        req,
-        showHiddenFields: false,
-      })
-    }
+  converter: async ({ node, payload }) => {
+    const uploadDocument = await payload.findByID({
+      id: node.value.id,
+      collection: node.relationTo,
+    })
+    const url = (payload?.config?.serverURL || '') + uploadDocument?.url
 
-    const url = (req?.payload?.config?.serverURL || '') + uploadDocument?.value?.url
-
-    if (!(uploadDocument?.value?.mimeType as string)?.startsWith('image')) {
+    if (!(uploadDocument?.mimeType as string)?.startsWith('image')) {
       // Only images can be serialized as HTML
       return ``
     }
 
-    return `<img src="${url}" alt="${uploadDocument?.value?.filename}" width="${uploadDocument?.value?.width}"  height="${uploadDocument?.value?.height}"/>`
+    return `<img src="${url}" alt="${uploadDocument?.filename}" width="${uploadDocument?.width}"  height="${uploadDocument?.height}"/>`
   },
   nodeTypes: [UploadNode.getType()], // This is the type of the lexical node that this converter can handle. Instead of hardcoding 'upload' we can get the node type directly from the UploadNode, since it's static.
 }
@@ -204,11 +169,10 @@ import { createHeadlessEditor } from '@lexical/headless' // <= make sure this pa
 import { getEnabledNodes, sanitizeServerEditorConfig } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
 
 const yourEditorConfig // <= your editor config here
-const payloadConfig // <= your Payload Config here
 
 const headlessEditor = createHeadlessEditor({
   nodes: getEnabledNodes({
-    editorConfig: sanitizeServerEditorConfig(yourEditorConfig, payloadConfig),
+    editorConfig: sanitizeServerEditorConfig(yourEditorConfig),
   }),
 })
 ```
@@ -236,7 +200,7 @@ yourEditorConfig.features = [
 If you have access to the sanitized collection config, you can get access to the lexical sanitized editor config & features, as every lexical richText field returns it. Here is an example how you can get it from another field's afterRead hook:
 
 ```ts
-import type { CollectionConfig, RichTextField } from 'payload'
+import type { CollectionConfig, RichTextField } from 'payload/types'
 import { createHeadlessEditor } from '@lexical/headless'
 import type { LexicalRichTextAdapter, SanitizedServerEditorConfig } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
 import {
@@ -337,7 +301,7 @@ Convert markdown content to the Lexical editor format with the following:
 import { $convertFromMarkdownString } from '@lexical/markdown'
 import { sanitizeServerEditorConfig } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
 
-const yourSanitizedEditorConfig = sanitizeServerEditorConfig(yourEditorConfig, payloadConfig) // <= your editor config & Payload Config here
+const yourSanitizedEditorConfig = sanitizeServerEditorConfig(yourEditorConfig) // <= your editor config here
 const markdown = `# Hello World`
 
 headlessEditor.update(
@@ -365,7 +329,7 @@ import { $convertToMarkdownString } from '@lexical/markdown'
 import { sanitizeServerEditorConfig } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
 import type { SerializedEditorState } from 'lexical'
 
-const yourSanitizedEditorConfig = sanitizeServerEditorConfig(yourEditorConfig, payloadConfig) // <= your editor config & Payload Config here
+const yourSanitizedEditorConfig = sanitizeServerEditorConfig(yourEditorConfig) // <= your editor config here
 const yourEditorState: SerializedEditorState // <= your current editor state here
 
 // Import editor state into your headless editor

docs/lexical/migration.mdx

@@ -10,21 +10,6 @@ keywords: lexical, rich text, editor, headless cms, migrate, migration
 
 While both Slate and Lexical save the editor state in JSON, the structure of the JSON is different.
 
-### Migration via Migration Script (Recommended)
-
-Just import the `migrateSlateToLexical` function we provide, pass it the `payload` object and run it. Depending on the amount of collections, this might take a while.
-
-IMPORTANT: This will overwrite all slate data. We recommend doing the following first:
-1. Take a backup of your entire database. If anything goes wrong and you do not have a backup, you are on your own and will not receive any support.
-2. Make every richText field a lexical editor. This script will only convert lexical richText fields with old Slate data
-3. Add the SlateToLexicalFeature (as seen below) first, and test it out by loading up the Admin Panel, to see if the migrator works as expected. You might have to build some custom converters for some fields first in order to convert custom Slate nodes. The SlateToLexicalFeature is where the converters are stored. Only fields with this feature added will be migrated.
-
-```ts
-import { migrateSlateToLexical } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
-
-await migrateSlateToLexical({ payload })
-```
-
 ### Migration via SlateToLexicalFeature
 
 One way to handle this is to just give your lexical editor the ability to read the slate JSON.
@@ -32,7 +17,7 @@ One way to handle this is to just give your lexical editor the ability to read t
 Simply add the `SlateToLexicalFeature` to your editor:
 
 ```ts
-import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
 import { SlateToLexicalFeature, lexicalEditor } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
 
@@ -55,9 +40,77 @@ and done! Now, everytime this lexical editor is initialized, it converts the sla
 This is by far the easiest way to migrate from Slate to Lexical, although it does come with a few caveats:
 
 - There is a performance hit when initializing the lexical editor
-- The editor will still output the Slate data in the output JSON, as the on-the-fly converter only runs for the Admin Panel
+- The editor will still output the Slate data in the output JSON, as the on-the-fly converter only runs for the admin panel
 
-The easy way to solve this: Edit the richText field and save the document! This overrides the slate data with the lexical data, and the next time the document is loaded, the lexical data will be used. This solves both the performance and the output issue for that specific document. This, however, is a slow and gradual migration process, thus you will have to support both API formats. Especially for a large number of documents, we recommend running the migration script, as explained above.
+The easy way to solve this: Just save the document! This overrides the slate data with the lexical data, and the next time the document is loaded, the lexical data will be used. This solves both the performance and the output issue for that specific document.
+
+### Migration via migration script
+
+The method described above does not solve the issue for all documents, though. If you want to convert all your documents to lexical, you can use a migration script. Here's a simple example:
+
+```ts
+import type { Payload } from 'payload'
+import type { YourDocumentType } from 'payload/generated-types'
+
+import {
+  cloneDeep,
+  convertSlateToLexical,
+  defaultSlateConverters,
+} from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
+
+import { AnotherCustomConverter } from './lexicalFeatures/converters/AnotherCustomConverter'
+
+export async function convertAll(payload: Payload, collectionName: string, fieldName: string) {
+  const docs: YourDocumentType[] = await payload.db.collections[collectionName].find({}).exec() // Use MongoDB models directly to query all documents at once
+  console.log(`Found ${docs.length} ${collectionName} docs`)
+
+  const converters = cloneDeep([...defaultSlateConverters, AnotherCustomConverter])
+
+  // Split docs into batches of 20.
+  const batchSize = 20
+  const batches = []
+  for (let i = 0; i < docs.length; i += batchSize) {
+    batches.push(docs.slice(i, i + batchSize))
+  }
+
+  let processed = 0 // Number of processed docs
+
+  for (const batch of batches) {
+    // Process each batch asynchronously
+    const promises = batch.map(async (doc: YourDocumentType) => {
+      const richText = doc[fieldName]
+
+      if (richText && Array.isArray(richText) && !('root' in richText)) {
+        // It's Slate data - skip already-converted data
+        const converted = convertSlateToLexical({
+          converters: converters,
+          slateData: richText,
+        })
+
+        await payload.update({
+          id: doc.id,
+          collection: collectionName as any,
+          depth: 0, // performance optimization. No need to run population.
+          data: {
+            [fieldName]: converted,
+          },
+        })
+      }
+    })
+
+    // Wait for all promises in the batch to complete. Resolving batches of 20 asynchronously is faster than waiting for each doc to update individually
+    await Promise.all(promises)
+
+    // Update the count of processed docs
+    processed += batch.length
+    console.log(`Converted ${processed} of ${docs.length}`)
+  }
+}
+```
+
+The `convertSlateToLexical` is the same method used in the `SlateToLexicalFeature` - it handles traversing the Slate JSON for you.
+
+Do note that this script might require adjustment depending on your document structure, especially if you have nested richText fields or localization enabled.
 
 ### Converting custom Slate nodes
 
@@ -93,7 +146,7 @@ When using a migration script, you can add your custom converters to the `conver
 When using the `SlateToLexicalFeature`, you can add your custom converters to the `converters` property of the `SlateToLexicalFeature` props:
 
 ```ts
-import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 
 import {
   SlateToLexicalFeature,
@@ -127,19 +180,3 @@ const Pages: CollectionConfig = {
 Migrating from [payload-plugin-lexical](https://github.com/AlessioGr/payload-plugin-lexical) works similar to migrating from Slate.
 
 Instead of a `SlateToLexicalFeature` there is a `LexicalPluginToLexicalFeature` you can use. And instead of `convertSlateToLexical` you can use `convertLexicalPluginToLexical`.
-
-## Migrating lexical data from old version to new version
-
-Each lexical node has a `version` property which is saved in the database. Every time we make a breaking change to the node's data, we increment the version. This way, we can detect an old version and automatically convert old data to the new format once you open up the editor.
-
-The problem is, this migration only happens when you open the editor, modify the richText field (so that the field's `setValue` function is called) and save the document. Until you do that for all documents, some documents will still have the old data.
-
-To solve this, we export an `upgradeLexicalData` function which goes through every single document in your Payload app and re-saves it, if it has a lexical editor. This way, the data is automatically converted to the new format, and that automatic conversion gets applied to every single document in your app.
-
-IMPORTANT: Take a backup of your entire database. If anything goes wrong and you do not have a backup, you are on your own and will not receive any support.
-
-```ts
-import { upgradeLexicalData } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
-
-await upgradeLexicalData({ payload })
-```

docs/lexical/overview.mdx

@@ -29,10 +29,10 @@ To use the Lexical editor, first you need to install it:
 npm install @payloadcms/richtext-lexical
 ```
 
-Once you have it installed, you can pass it to your top-level Payload Config as follows:
+Once you have it installed, you can pass it to your top-level Payload config as follows:
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
 import { lexicalEditor } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
 
 export default buildConfig({
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ export default buildConfig({
 You can also override Lexical settings on a field-by-field basis as follows:
 
 ```ts
-import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 import { lexicalEditor } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
 
 export const Pages: CollectionConfig = {
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ import { CallToAction } from '../blocks/CallToAction'
 
 {
   editor: lexicalEditor({
-    features: ({ defaultFeatures, rootFeatures }) => [
+    features: ({ defaultFeatures }) => [
       ...defaultFeatures,
       LinkFeature({
         // Example showing how to customize the built-in fields
@@ -134,165 +134,46 @@ import { CallToAction } from '../blocks/CallToAction'
 }
 ```
 
-`features` can be both an array of features, or a function returning an array of features. The function provides the following props:
-
-
-| Prop                  | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            |
-|-----------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| **`defaultFeatures`** | This opinionated array contains all "recommended" default features. You can see which features are included in the default features in the table below.                                                                                                |
-| **`rootFeatures`**    | This array contains all features that are enabled in the root richText editor (the one defined in the payload.config.ts). If this field is the root richText editor, or if the root richText editor is not a lexical editor, this array will be empty. |
-
-
 ## Features overview
 
 Here's an overview of all the included features:
 
-| Feature Name                    | Included by default | Description                                                                                                                                                                            |
-|---------------------------------|---------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| **`BoldTextFeature`**           | Yes                 | Handles the bold text format                                                                                                                                                           |
-| **`ItalicTextFeature`**         | Yes                 | Handles the italic text format                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`UnderlineTextFeature`**      | Yes                 | Handles the underline text format                                                                                                                                                      |
-| **`StrikethroughTextFeature`**  | Yes                 | Handles the strikethrough text format                                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`SubscriptTextFeature`**      | Yes                 | Handles the subscript text format                                                                                                                                                      |
-| **`SuperscriptTextFeature`**    | Yes                 | Handles the superscript text format                                                                                                                                                    |
-| **`InlineCodeTextFeature`**     | Yes                 | Handles the inline-code text format                                                                                                                                                    |
-| **`ParagraphFeature`**          | Yes                 | Handles paragraphs. Since they are already a key feature of lexical itself, this Feature mainly handles the Slash and Add-Block menu entries for paragraphs                            |
-| **`HeadingFeature`**            | Yes                 | Adds Heading Nodes (by default, H1 - H6, but that can be customized)                                                                                                                   |
-| **`AlignFeature`**              | Yes                 | Allows you to align text left, centered and right                                                                                                                                      |
-| **`IndentFeature`**             | Yes                 | Allows you to indent text with the tab key                                                                                                                                             |
-| **`UnorderedListFeature`**      | Yes                 | Adds unordered lists (ul)                                                                                                                                                              |
-| **`OrderedListFeature`**        | Yes                 | Adds ordered lists (ol)                                                                                                                                                                |
-| **`CheckListFeature`**          | Yes                 | Adds checklists                                                                                                                                                                        |
-| **`LinkFeature`**               | Yes                 | Allows you to create internal and external links                                                                                                                                       |
-| **`RelationshipFeature`**       | Yes                 | Allows you to create block-level (not inline) relationships to other documents                                                                                                         |
-| **`BlockQuoteFeature`**         | Yes                 | Allows you to create block-level quotes                                                                                                                                                |
-| **`UploadFeature`**             | Yes                 | Allows you to create block-level upload nodes - this supports all kinds of uploads, not just images                                                                                    |
-| **`HorizontalRuleFeature`**     | Yes                 | Horizontal rules / separators. Basically displays an `<hr>` element                                                                                                                    |
-| **`InlineToolbarFeature`**      | Yes                 | The inline toolbar is the floating toolbar which appears when you select text. This toolbar only contains actions relevant for selected text                                           |
-| **`FixedToolbarFeature`**       | No                  | This classic toolbar is pinned to the top and always visible. Both inline and fixed toolbars can be enabled at the same time.                                                          |
-| **`BlocksFeature`**             | No                  | Allows you to use Payload's [Blocks Field](/docs/fields/blocks) directly inside your editor. In the feature props, you can specify the allowed blocks - just like in the Blocks field. |
-| **`TreeViewFeature`**           | No                  | Adds a debug box under the editor, which allows you to see the current editor state live, the dom, as well as time travel. Very useful for debugging                                   |
-| **`EXPERIMENTAL_TableFeature`** | No                  | Adds support for tables. This feature may be removed or receive breaking changes in the future - even within a stable lexical release, without needing a major release.                |
+| Feature Name                   | Included by default | Description                                                                                                                                                                            |
+|--------------------------------|---------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| **`BoldTextFeature`**          | Yes                 | Handles the bold text format                                                                                                                                                           |
+| **`ItalicTextFeature`**        | Yes                 | Handles the italic text format                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`UnderlineTextFeature`**     | Yes                 | Handles the underline text format                                                                                                                                                      |
+| **`StrikethroughTextFeature`** | Yes                 | Handles the strikethrough text format                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`SubscriptTextFeature`**     | Yes                 | Handles the subscript text format                                                                                                                                                      |
+| **`SuperscriptTextFeature`**   | Yes                 | Handles the superscript text format                                                                                                                                                    |
+| **`InlineCodeTextFeature`**    | Yes                 | Handles the inline-code text format                                                                                                                                                    |
+| **`ParagraphFeature`**         | Yes                 | Handles paragraphs. Since they are already a key feature of lexical itself, this Feature mainly handles the Slash and Add-Block menu entries for paragraphs                            |
+| **`HeadingFeature`**           | Yes                 | Adds Heading Nodes (by default, H1 - H6, but that can be customized)                                                                                                                   |
+| **`AlignFeature`**             | Yes                 | Allows you to align text left, centered and right                                                                                                                                      |
+| **`IndentFeature`**            | Yes                 | Allows you to indent text with the tab key                                                                                                                                             |
+| **`UnorderedListFeature`**     | Yes                 | Adds unordered lists (ul)                                                                                                                                                              |
+| **`OrderedListFeature`**       | Yes                 | Adds ordered lists (ol)                                                                                                                                                                |
+| **`CheckListFeature`**         | Yes                 | Adds checklists                                                                                                                                                                        |
+| **`LinkFeature`**              | Yes                 | Allows you to create internal and external links                                                                                                                                       |
+| **`RelationshipFeature`**      | Yes                 | Allows you to create block-level (not inline) relationships to other documents                                                                                                         |
+| **`BlockQuoteFeature`**        | Yes                 | Allows you to create block-level quotes                                                                                                                                                |
+| **`UploadFeature`**            | Yes                 | Allows you to create block-level upload nodes - this supports all kinds of uploads, not just images                                                                                    |
+| **`HorizontalRuleFeature`**    | Yes                 | Horizontal rules / separators. Basically displays an `<hr>` element                                                                                                                    |
+| **`InlineToolbarFeature`**     | Yes                 | The inline toolbar is the floating toolbar which appears when you select text. This toolbar only contains actions relevant for selected text                                           |
+| **`FixedToolbarFeature`**      | No                  | This classic toolbar is pinned to the top and always visible. Both inline and fixed toolbars can be enabled at the same time.                                                          |
+| **`BlocksFeature`**            | No                  | Allows you to use Payload's [Blocks Field](/docs/fields/blocks) directly inside your editor. In the feature props, you can specify the allowed blocks - just like in the Blocks field. |
+| **`TreeViewFeature`**          | No                  | Adds a debug box under the editor, which allows you to see the current editor state live, the dom, as well as time travel. Very useful for debugging                                   |
 
 Notice how even the toolbars are features? That's how extensible our lexical editor is - you could theoretically create your own toolbar if you wanted to!
 
 ## Creating your own, custom Feature
 
-You can find more information about creating your own feature in our [building custom feature docs](lexical/building-custom-features).
+Creating your own custom feature requires deep knowledge of the Lexical editor. We recommend you take a look at the [Lexical documentation](https://lexical.dev/docs/intro) first - especially the "concepts" section.
 
-## TypeScript
+Next, take a look at the [features we've already built](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/packages/richtext-lexical/src/field/features) - understanding how they work will help you understand how to create your own. There is no difference between the features included by default and the ones you create yourself - since those features are all isolated from the "core", you have access to the same APIs, whether the feature is part of payload or not!
 
-Every single piece of saved data is 100% fully-typed within lexical. It provides a type for every single node, which can be imported from `@payloadcms/richtext-lexical` - each type is prefixed with `Serialized`, e.g. `SerializedUploadNode`.
+## Coming Soon
 
-In order to fully type the entire editor JSON, you can use our `TypedEditorState` helper type, which accepts a union of all possible node types as a generic. The reason we do not provide a type which already contains all possible node types is because the possible node types depend on which features you have enabled in your editor. Here is an example:
+Lots more documentation will be coming soon, which will show in detail how to create your own custom features within Lexical.
 
-```ts
-import type {
-  SerializedAutoLinkNode,
-  SerializedBlockNode,
-  SerializedHorizontalRuleNode,
-  SerializedLinkNode,
-  SerializedListItemNode,
-  SerializedListNode,
-  SerializedParagraphNode,
-  SerializedQuoteNode,
-  SerializedRelationshipNode,
-  SerializedTextNode,
-  SerializedUploadNode,
-  TypedEditorState,
-  SerializedHeadingNode,
-} from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
-
-const editorState: TypedEditorState<
-  | SerializedAutoLinkNode
-  | SerializedBlockNode
-  | SerializedHorizontalRuleNode
-  | SerializedLinkNode
-  | SerializedListItemNode
-  | SerializedListNode
-  | SerializedParagraphNode
-  | SerializedQuoteNode
-  | SerializedRelationshipNode
-  | SerializedTextNode
-  | SerializedUploadNode
-  | SerializedHeadingNode
-> = {
-  root: {
-    type: 'root',
-    direction: 'ltr',
-    format: '',
-    indent: 0,
-    version: 1,
-    children: [
-      {
-        children: [
-          {
-            detail: 0,
-            format: 0,
-            mode: 'normal',
-            style: '',
-            text: 'Some text. Every property here is fully-typed',
-            type: 'text',
-            version: 1,
-          },
-        ],
-        direction: 'ltr',
-        format: '',
-        indent: 0,
-        type: 'paragraph',
-        textFormat: 0,
-        version: 1,
-      },
-    ],
-  },
-}
-```
-
-Alternatively, you can use the `DefaultTypedEditorState` type, which includes all types for all nodes included in the `defaultFeatures`:
-
-```ts
-import type {
-  DefaultTypedEditorState
-} from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
-
-const editorState: DefaultTypedEditorState = {
-  root: {
-    type: 'root',
-    direction: 'ltr',
-    format: '',
-    indent: 0,
-    version: 1,
-    children: [
-      {
-        children: [
-          {
-            detail: 0,
-            format: 0,
-            mode: 'normal',
-            style: '',
-            text: 'Some text. Every property here is fully-typed',
-            type: 'text',
-            version: 1,
-          },
-        ],
-        direction: 'ltr',
-        format: '',
-        indent: 0,
-        type: 'paragraph',
-        textFormat: 0,
-        version: 1,
-      },
-    ],
-  },
-}
-```
-
-Just like `TypedEditorState`, the `DefaultTypedEditorState` also accepts an optional node type union as a generic. Here, this would **add** the specified node types to the default ones. Example: `DefaultTypedEditorState<SerializedBlockNode | YourCustomSerializedNode>`.
-
-This is a type-safe representation of the editor state. Looking at the auto-suggestions of `type` it will show you all the possible node types you can use.
-
-Make sure to only use types exported from `@payloadcms/richtext-lexical`, not from the lexical core packages. We only have control over types we export and can guarantee that those are correct, even though lexical core may export types with identical names.
-
-### Automatic type generation
-
-Lexical does not generate the accurate type definitions for your richText fields for you yet - this will be improved in the future. Currently, it only outputs the rough shape of the editor JSON which you can enhance using type assertions.
+For now, take a look at the TypeScript interfaces and let us know if you need a hand. Much more will be coming from the Payload team on this topic soon.

docs/live-preview/client.mdx

@@ -7,10 +7,10 @@ keywords: live preview, frontend, react, next.js, vue, nuxt.js, svelte, hook, us
 ---
 
 <Banner type="info">
-  If your front-end application supports Server Components like the [Next.js App Router](https://nextjs.org/docs/app), etc., we suggest setting up [server-side Live Preview](./server) instead.
+  If your front-end application supports Server Components like the [Next.js App Router](https://nextjs.org/docs/app), etc., we suggest setting up [server-side Live Preview](./server).
 </Banner>
 
-While using Live Preview, the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) emits a new `window.postMessage` event every time your document has changed. Your front-end application can listen for these events and re-render accordingly.
+While using Live Preview, the Admin panel emits a new `window.postMessage` event every time your document has changed. Your front-end application can listen for these events and re-render accordingly.
 
 If your front-end application is built with [React](#react) or [Vue](#vue), use the `useLivePreview` hooks that Payload provides. In the future, all other major frameworks like Svelte will be officially supported. If you are using any of these frameworks today, you can still integrate with Live Preview yourself using the underlying tooling that Payload provides. See [building your own hook](#building-your-own-hook) for more information.
 
@@ -41,19 +41,10 @@ And return the following values:
 </Banner>
 
 <Banner type="info">
-  It is important that the `depth` argument matches exactly with the depth of your initial page request. The depth property is used to populated relationships and uploads beyond their IDs. See [Depth](../queries/depth) for more information.
+  It is important that the `depth` argument matches exactly with the depth of your initial page request. The depth property is used to populated relationships and uploads beyond their IDs. See [Depth](../getting-started/concepts#depth) for more information.
 </Banner>
 
-## Frameworks
-
-Live Preview will work with any front-end framework that supports the native [`window.postMessage`](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Window/postMessage) API. By default, Payload officially supports the most popular frameworks, including:
-
-- [React](#react)
-- [Vue](#vue)
-
-If your framework is not listed, you can still integrate with Live Preview using the underlying tooling that Payload provides. [More details](#building-your-own-hook).
-
-### React
+## React
 
 If your front-end application is built with client-side [React](https://react.dev) like [Next.js Pages Router](https://nextjs.org/docs/pages), you can use the `useLivePreview` hook that Payload provides.
 
@@ -88,12 +79,7 @@ export const PageClient: React.FC<{
 }
 ```
 
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
-  If you are using [React Server Components](https://react.dev/reference/rsc/server-components), we strongly suggest setting up [server-side Live Preview](./server) instead.
-</Banner>
-
-### Vue
+## Vue
 
 If your front-end application is built with [Vue 3](https://vuejs.org) or [Nuxt 3](https://nuxt.js), you can use the `useLivePreview` composable that Payload provides.
 
@@ -105,7 +91,7 @@ npm install @payloadcms/live-preview-vue
 
 Then, use the `useLivePreview` hook in your Vue component:
 
-```ts
+```vue
 <script setup lang="ts">
 import type { PageData } from '~/types';
 import { defineProps } from 'vue';
@@ -142,10 +128,10 @@ This package provides the following functions:
 
 | Path                     | Description                                                                                                                |
 | ------------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`subscribe`**          | Subscribes to the Admin Panel's `window.postMessage` events and calls the provided callback function.                      |
-| **`unsubscribe`**        | Unsubscribes from the Admin Panel's `window.postMessage` events.                                                           |
-| **`ready`**              | Sends a `window.postMessage` event to the Admin Panel to indicate that the front-end is ready to receive messages.         |
-| **`isLivePreviewEvent`** | Checks if a `MessageEvent` originates from the Admin Panel and is a Live Preview event, i.e. debounced form state.         |
+| **`subscribe`**          | Subscribes to the Admin panel's `window.postMessage` events and calls the provided callback function.                      |
+| **`unsubscribe`**        | Unsubscribes from the Admin panel's `window.postMessage` events.                                                           |
+| **`ready`**              | Sends a `window.postMessage` event to the Admin panel to indicate that the front-end is ready to receive messages.         |
+| **`isLivePreviewEvent`** | Checks if a `MessageEvent` originates from the Admin panel and is a Live Preview event, i.e. debounced form state.         |
 
 The `subscribe` function takes the following args:
 
@@ -168,7 +154,7 @@ import { subscribe, unsubscribe } from '@payloadcms/live-preview'
 // 3. Populating relationships and uploads
 // 4. Calling the `onChange` callback with the result
 // Your hook should also:
-// 1. Tell the Admin Panel when it is ready to receive messages
+// 1. Tell the Admin panel when it is ready to receive messages
 // 2. Handle the results of the `onChange` callback to update the UI
 // 3. Unsubscribe from the `window.postMessage` events when it unmounts
 ```
@@ -200,7 +186,7 @@ export const useLivePreview = <T extends any>(props: {
   }, [])
 
   useEffect(() => {
-    // Listen for `window.postMessage` events from the Admin Panel
+    // Listen for `window.postMessage` events from the Admin panel
     // When a change is made, the `onChange` callback will be called with the merged data
     const subscription = subscribe({
       callback: onChange,
@@ -209,7 +195,7 @@ export const useLivePreview = <T extends any>(props: {
       serverURL,
     })
 
-    // Once subscribed, send a `ready` message back up to the Admin Panel
+    // Once subscribed, send a `ready` message back up to the Admin panel
     // This will indicate that the front-end is ready to receive messages
     if (!hasSentReadyMessage.current) {
       hasSentReadyMessage.current = true
@@ -246,7 +232,7 @@ For a working demonstration of this, check out the official [Live Preview Exampl
 
 ## Troubleshooting
 
-#### Relationships and/or uploads are not populating
+### Relationships and/or uploads are not populating
 
 If you are using relationships or uploads in your front-end application, and your front-end application runs on a different domain than your Payload server, you may need to configure [CORS](../configuration/overview) to allow requests to be made between the two domains. This includes sites that are running on a different port or subdomain. Similarly, if you are protecting resources behind user authentication, you may also need to configure [CSRF](../authentication/overview#csrf-protection) to allow cookies to be sent between the two domains. For example:
 
@@ -271,9 +257,9 @@ If you are using relationships or uploads in your front-end application, and you
 }
 ```
 
-#### Relationships and/or uploads disappear after editing a document
+### Relationships and/or uploads disappear after editing a document
 
-It is possible that either you are setting an improper [`depth`](../queries/depth) in your initial request and/or your `useLivePreview` hook, or they're mismatched. Ensure that the `depth` parameter is set to the correct value, and that it matches exactly in both places. For example:
+It is possible that either you are setting an improper [`depth`](../getting-started/concepts#depth) in your initial request and/or your `useLivePreview` hook, or they're mismatched. Ensure that the `depth` parameter is set to the correct value, and that it matches exactly in both places. For example:
 
 ```tsx
 // Your initial request
@@ -297,7 +283,7 @@ const { data } = useLivePreview<PageType>({
 })
 ```
 
-#### Iframe refuses to connect
+### Iframe refuses to connect
 
 If your front-end application has set a [Content Security Policy](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/CSP) (CSP) that blocks the Admin Panel from loading your front-end application, the iframe will not be able to load your site. To resolve this, you can whitelist the Admin Panel's domain in your CSP by setting the `frame-ancestors` directive:
 

docs/live-preview/frontend.mdx

@@ -6,11 +6,11 @@ desc: Learn how to implement Live Preview in your front-end application.
 keywords: live preview, frontend, react, next.js, vue, nuxt.js, svelte, hook, useLivePreview
 ---
 
-There are two ways to use Live Preview in your own application depending on whether your front-end framework supports Server Components:
+There are two ways to use Live Preview in your own application depending on whether your front-end framework supports server components:
 
 - [Server-side Live Preview (suggested)](./server)
 - [Client-side Live Preview](./client)
 
 <Banner type="info">
-  We suggest using server-side Live Preview if your framework supports Server Components, it is both simpler to setup and more performant to run than the client-side alternative.
+  We suggest using server-side Live Preview if your framework supports it, it is both simpler to setup and more performant to run than the client-side alternative.
 </Banner>

docs/live-preview/overview.mdx

@@ -2,40 +2,27 @@
 title: Live Preview
 label: Overview
 order: 10
-desc: With Live Preview you can render your front-end application directly within the Admin Panel. Your changes take effect as you type. No save needed.
+desc: With Live Preview you can render your front-end application directly within the Admin panel. Your changes take effect as you type. No save needed.
 keywords: live preview, preview, live, iframe, iframe preview, visual editing, design
 ---
 
-With Live Preview you can render your front-end application directly within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview). As you type, your changes take effect in real-time. No need to save a draft or publish your changes. This works in both [Server-side](./server) as well as [Client-side](./client) environments.
+**With Live Preview you can render your front-end application directly within the Admin panel. As you type, your changes take effect in real-time. No need to save a draft or publish your changes.**
 
-Live Preview works by rendering an iframe on the page that loads your front-end application. The Admin Panel communicates with your app through [`window.postMessage`](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Window/postMessage) events. These events are emitted every time a change is made to the document. Your app then listens for these events and re-renders itself with the data it receives.
-
-To add Live Preview, use the `admin.livePreview` property in your [Payload Config](../configuration/overview):
-
-```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
-
-const config = buildConfig({
-  // ...
-  admin: {
-    // ...
-    // highlight-start
-    livePreview: {
-      url: 'http://localhost:3000',
-      collections: ['pages']
-    },
-    // highlight-end
-  }
-})
-```
+Live Preview works by rendering an iframe on the page that loads your front-end application. The Admin panel communicates with your app through [`window.postMessage`](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Window/postMessage) events. These events are emitted every time a change is made to the document. Your app then listens for these events and re-renders itself with the data it receives. Live Preview works in both server-side as well as client-side environments. See [Front-End](./frontend) for more details.
 
 {/* IMAGE OF LIVE PREVIEW HERE */}
 
-## Options
+<Banner type="warning">
+  Live Preview is currently in beta. You may use this feature in production, but please be aware
+  that it is subject to change and may not be fully stable for all use cases. If you encounter any
+  issues, please [report
+  them](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/issues/new?assignees=jacobsfletch&labels=possible-bug&projects=&title=Live%20Preview&template=1.bug_report.yml)
+  with as much detail as possible.
+</Banner>
 
-Setting up Live Preview is easy. This can be done either globally through the [Root Config](../configuration/overview), or on individual [Collection](../configuration/collections) and [Global](../configuration/globals) configs. Once configured, a new "Live Preview" tab will appear at the top of enabled documents. Navigating to this tab opens the preview window and loads your front-end application.
+## Setup
 
-The following options are available:
+Setting up Live Preview is easy. You first need to enable it through the `admin.livePreview` property of your Payload config. It takes the following options:
 
 | Path              | Description                                                                                                                                           |
 | ----------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
@@ -46,47 +33,60 @@ The following options are available:
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
-  Alternatively, you can define the <code>admin.livePreview</code> property on individual [Collection](../configuration/collections) and [Global](../configuration/globals) configs. Settings defined here will be merged into the top-level as overrides.
-</Banner>
+Here is a basic example of enabling Live Preview on a `pages` collection:
+
+```ts
+// payload.config.ts
+{
+  // ...
+  admin: {
+    // ...
+    livePreview: {
+      url: 'http://localhost:3000', // The URL to your front-end, this can also be a function (see below)
+      collections: ['pages'], // The collections to enable Live Preview on (globals are also possible)
+    },
+  }
+}
+```
+
+Alternatively, you can define the <code>admin.livePreview</code> property on individual collection and global configs. Settings defined here will be merged into the top-level as overrides (if applicable).
+
+```ts
+// Collection.ts
+{
+  // ...
+  admin: {
+    // ...
+    livePreview: {
+      url: 'http://localhost:3000',
+    },
+  }
+}
+```
+
+Once configured, a new "Live Preview" tab will appear at the top of enabled documents. Navigating to this tab opens the preview window and loads your front-end application.
 
 ### URL
 
-The `url` property is a string that points to your front-end application. This value is used as the `src` attribute of the iframe rendering your front-end. Once loaded, the Admin Panel will communicate directly with your app through `window.postMessage` events.
+The `url` property is a string that points to your front-end application. This value is used as the `src` attribute of the iframe rendering your front-end.
 
-To set the URL, use the `admin.livePreview.url` property in your [Payload Config](../configuration/overview):
+You can also pass a function in order to dynamically format URLs. This function is called with the following arguments:
+
+| Path               | Description                                                                                                       |
+| ------------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`data`**         | The data of the document being edited. This includes changes that have not yet been saved.                        |
+| **`documentInfo`** | Information about the document being edited like collection slug. [More details](../admin/hooks#usedocumentinfo). |
+| **`locale`**       | The locale currently being edited (if applicable). [More details](../configuration/localization).                 |
+
+Here is an example of using a function that returns a dynamic URL:
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
-
-const config = buildConfig({
+// payload.config.ts
+{
   // ...
   admin: {
     // ...
     livePreview: {
-      url: 'http://localhost:3000', // highlight-line
-      collections: ['pages'],
-    },
-  }
-})
-```
-
-#### Dynamic URLs
-
-You can also pass a function in order to dynamically format URLs. This is useful for multi-tenant applications, localization, or any other scenario where the URL needs to be generated based on the document being edited.
-
-To set dynamic URLs, set the `admin.livePreview.url` property in your [Payload Config](../configuration/overview) to a function:
-
-```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
-
-const config = buildConfig({
-  // ...
-  admin: {
-    // ...
-    livePreview: {
-      // highlight-start
       url: ({
         data,
         documentInfo,
@@ -96,50 +96,13 @@ const config = buildConfig({
       }${locale ? `?locale=${locale?.code}` : ''}`, // Localization query param
       collections: ['pages'],
     },
-    // highlight-end
   }
-})
+}
 ```
 
-The following arguments are provided to the `url` function:
-
-| Path               | Description                                                                                                       |
-| ------------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`data`**         | The data of the document being edited. This includes changes that have not yet been saved.                        |
-| **`documentInfo`** | Information about the document being edited like collection slug. [More details](../admin/hooks#usedocumentinfo). |
-| **`locale`**       | The locale currently being edited (if applicable). [More details](../configuration/localization).                 |
-
 ### Breakpoints
 
-The breakpoints property is an array of objects which are used as “device sizes” in the preview window. Each item will render as an option in the toolbar. When selected, the preview window will resize to the exact dimensions specified in that breakpoint.
-
-To set breakpoints, use the `admin.livePreview.breakpoints` property in your [Payload Config](../configuration/overview):
-
-```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
-
-const config = buildConfig({
-  // ...
-  admin: {
-    // ...
-    livePreview: {
-      url: 'http://localhost:3000',
-      // highlight-start
-      breakpoints: [
-        {
-          label: 'Mobile',
-          name: 'mobile',
-          width: 375,
-          height: 667,
-        },
-      ],
-      // highlight-end
-    },
-  }
-})
-```
-
-The following options are available for each breakpoint:
+The breakpoints property is an array of objects which are used as “device sizes” in the preview window. Each item will render as an option in the toolbar. When selected, the preview window will resize to the exact dimensions specified in that breakpoint. Each breakpoint takes the following properties:
 
 | Path            | Description                                                                 |
 | --------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
@@ -150,6 +113,41 @@ The following options are available for each breakpoint:
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
+Here is an example of defining breakpoints:
+
+```ts
+// payload.config.ts
+{
+  // ...
+  admin: {
+    // ...
+    livePreview: {
+      url: 'http://localhost:3000',
+      breakpoints: [
+        {
+          label: 'Mobile',
+          name: 'mobile',
+          width: 375,
+          height: 667,
+        },
+        {
+          label: 'Tablet',
+          name: 'tablet',
+          width: 768,
+          height: 1024,
+        },
+        {
+          label: 'Desktop',
+          name: 'desktop',
+          width: 1440,
+          height: 900,
+        },
+      ],
+    },
+  }
+}
+```
+
 {/* IMAGE OF TOOLBAR HERE */}
 
 The "Responsive" option is always available in the drop-down and requires no additional configuration. This is the default breakpoint that will be used on initial load. This option styles the iframe with a width and height of `100%` so that it fills the screen at its maximum size and automatically resizes as the window changes size.

docs/live-preview/server.mdx

@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ keywords: live preview, frontend, react, next.js, vue, nuxt.js, svelte, hook, us
   Server-side Live Preview is only for front-end frameworks that support the concept of Server Components, i.e. [React Server Components](https://react.dev/reference/rsc/server-components). If your front-end application is built with a client-side framework like the [Next.js Pages Router](https://nextjs.org/docs/pages), [React Router](https://reactrouter.com), [Vue 3](https://vuejs.org), etc., see [client-side Live Preview](./client).
 </Banner>
 
-Server-side Live Preview works by making a roundtrip to the server every time your document is saved, i.e. draft save, autosave, or publish. While using Live Preview, the Admin Panel emits a new `window.postMessage` event which your front-end application can use to invoke this process. In Next.js, this means simply calling `router.refresh()` which will hydrate the HTML using new data straight from the [Local API](../local-api/overview).
+Server-side Live Preview works by making a roundtrip to the server every time your document is saved, i.e. draft save, autosave, or publish. While using Live Preview, the Admin panel emits a new `window.postMessage` event which your front-end application can use to invoke this process. In Next.js, this means simply calling `router.refresh()` which will hydrate the HTML using new data straight from the [Local API](../local-api/overview).
 
 <Banner type="warning">
   It is recommended that you enable [Autosave](../versions/autosave) alongside Live Preview to make the experience feel more responsive.
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ If your front-end application is built with [React](#react), you can use the `Re
 
 ## React
 
-If your front-end application is built with server-side [React](https://react.dev) like [Next.js App Router](https://nextjs.org/docs/app), you can use the `RefreshRouteOnSave` component that Payload provides.
+If your front-end application is built with [React](https://react.dev) or [Next.js](https://nextjs.org), you can use the `RefreshRouteOnSave` component that Payload provides.
 
 First, install the `@payloadcms/live-preview-react` package:
 
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ First, install the `@payloadcms/live-preview-react` package:
 npm install @payloadcms/live-preview-react
 ```
 
-Then, render the `RefreshRouteOnSave` component anywhere in your `page.tsx`. Here's an example:
+Then, render `RefreshRouteOnSave` anywhere in your `page.tsx`. Here's an example:
 
 `page.tsx`:
 
@@ -40,9 +40,8 @@ import config from '../payload.config'
 export default async function Page() {
   const payload = await getPayloadHMR({ config })
 
-  const page = await payload.findByID({
+  const page = await payload.find({
     collection: 'pages',
-    id: '123',
     draft: true
   })
 
@@ -65,13 +64,7 @@ import React from 'react'
 
 export const RefreshRouteOnSave: React.FC = () => {
   const router = useRouter()
-
-  return (
-    <PayloadLivePreview
-      refresh={() => router.refresh()}
-      serverURL={process.env.NEXT_PUBLIC_PAYLOAD_URL}
-    />
-  )
+  return <PayloadLivePreview refresh={router.refresh} serverURL={process.env.PAYLOAD_SERVER_URL} />
 }
 ```
 
@@ -89,8 +82,8 @@ This package provides the following functions:
 
 | Path                  | Description                                                                                                                                |
 | --------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
-| **`ready`**           | Sends a `window.postMessage` event to the Admin Panel to indicate that the front-end is ready to receive messages.                         |
-| **`isDocumentEvent`** | Checks if a `MessageEvent` originates from the Admin Panel and is a document-level event, i.e. draft save, autosave, publish, etc.         |
+| **`ready`**           | Sends a `window.postMessage` event to the Admin panel to indicate that the front-end is ready to receive messages.                         |
+| **`isDocumentEvent`** | Checks if a `MessageEvent` originates from the Admin panel and is a document-level event, i.e. draft save, autosave, publish, etc.         |
 
 With these functions, you can build your own hook using your front-end framework of choice:
 
@@ -98,8 +91,8 @@ With these functions, you can build your own hook using your front-end framework
 import { ready, isDocumentEvent } from '@payloadcms/live-preview'
 
 // To build your own component:
-// 1. Listen for document-level `window.postMessage` events sent from the Admin Panel
-// 2. Tell the Admin Panel when it is ready to receive messages
+// 1. Listen for document-level `window.postMessage` events sent from the Admin panel
+// 2. Tell the Admin panel when it is ready to receive messages
 // 3. Refresh the route every time a new document-level event is received
 // 4. Unsubscribe from the `window.postMessage` events when it unmounts
 ```
@@ -160,15 +153,13 @@ export const RefreshRouteOnSave: React.FC<{
 
 ## Example
 
-For a working demonstration of this, check out the official [Live Preview Example](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/live-preview/payload). There you will find a fully working example of how to implement Live Preview in your Next.js App Router application.
+{/* TODO: add example once beta has been release and an example can be created */}
 
 ## Troubleshooting
 
-#### Updates do not appear as fast as client-side Live Preview
+### Updates do not appear as fast as client-side Live Preview
 
-If you are noticing that updates feel less snappy than client-side Live Preview (i.e. the `useLivePreview` hook), this is because of how the two differ in how they work—instead of emitting events against _form state_, server-side Live Preview refreshes the route after a new document is _saved_.
-
-Use [Autosave](../versions/autosave) to mimic this effect server-side. Try decreasing the value of `versions.autoSave.interval` to make the experience feel more responsive:
+If you are noticing that updates feel less snappy than client-side Live Preview (i.e. the `useLivePreview` hook), this is because of how the two differ in how they work—instead of emitting events against form state as you type, server-side Live Preview refreshes the route after a new document is saved. You can use autosave to mimic this effect. Try decreasing the value of `versions.autoSave.interval` to make the experience feel more responsive:
 
 ```ts
 // collection.ts
@@ -183,7 +174,7 @@ Use [Autosave](../versions/autosave) to mimic this effect server-side. Try decre
 }
 ```
 
-#### Iframe refuses to connect
+### Iframe refuses to connect
 
 If your front-end application has set a [Content Security Policy](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/CSP) (CSP) that blocks the Admin Panel from loading your front-end application, the iframe will not be able to load your site. To resolve this, you can whitelist the Admin Panel's domain in your CSP by setting the `frame-ancestors` directive:
 

docs/local-api/outside-nextjs.mdx

@@ -1,76 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Using Payload outside Next.js
-label: Outside Next.js
-order: 20
-desc: Payload can be used outside of Next.js within standalone scripts or in other frameworks like Remix, Sveltekit, Nuxt, and similar.
-keywords: local api, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
----
-
-Payload can be used completely outside of Next.js which is helpful in cases like running scripts, using Payload in a separate backend service, or using Payload's Local API to fetch your data directly from your database in other frontend frameworks like Sveltekit, Remix, Nuxt, and similar.
-
-<Banner>
-  <strong>Note:</strong>
-  <br/>
-  Payload and all of its official packages are fully ESM. If you want to use Payload within your own projects, make sure you are writing your scripts in ESM format or dynamically importing the Payload Config.
-</Banner>
-
-## Importing the Payload Config outside of Next.js
-
-Your Payload Config likely has imports which need to be handled properly, such as CSS imports and similar. If you were to try and import your config without any Node support for SCSS / CSS files, you'll see errors that arise accordingly.
-
-This is especially relevant if you are importing your Payload Config outside of a bundler context, such as in standalone Node scripts.
-
-For these cases, you can use Payload's `importConfig` function to handle importing your config safely. It will handle everything you need to be able to load and use your Payload Config, without any client-side files present.
-
-Here's an example of a seed script that creates a few documents for local development / testing purposes, using Payload's `importConfig` function to safely import Payload, and the `getPayload` function to retrieve an initialized copy of Payload.
-
-```ts
-// We are importing `getPayload` because we don't need HMR
-// for a standalone script. For usage of Payload inside Next.js,
-// you should always use `import { getPayloadHMR } from '@payloadcms/next/utilities'` instead.
-import { getPayload } from 'payload'
-
-// This is a helper function that will make sure we can safely load the Payload Config
-// and all of its client-side files, such as CSS, SCSS, etc.
-import { importConfig } from 'payload/node'
-
-import path from 'path'
-import { fileURLToPath } from 'node:url'
-import dotenv from 'dotenv'
-
-// In ESM, you can create the "dirname" variable
-// like this. We'll use this with `dotenv` to load our `.env` file, if necessary.
-const filename = fileURLToPath(import.meta.url)
-const dirname = path.dirname(filename)
-
-// If you don't need to load your .env file,
-// then you can skip this part!
-dotenv.config({
-  path: path.resolve(dirname, '../.env'),
-})
-
-const seed = async () => {
-  // Get a local copy of Payload by passing your config
-  const payload = await getPayload({ config })
-
-  const user = await payload.create({
-    collection: 'users',
-    data: {
-      email: 'dev@payloadcms.com',
-      password: 'some-password'
-    }
-  })
-
-  const page = await payload.create({
-    collection: 'pages',
-    data: {
-      title: 'My Homepage',
-      // other data to seed here
-    }
-  })
-}
-
-// Call the function here to run your seed script
-seed()
-
-```

docs/local-api/overview.mdx

@@ -3,31 +3,56 @@ title: Local API
 label: Overview
 order: 10
 desc: The Payload Local API allows you to interact with your database and execute the same operations that are available through REST and GraphQL within Node, directly on your server.
-keywords: local api, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: local api, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
-The Payload Local API gives you the ability to execute the same operations that are available through REST and GraphQL within Node, directly on your server. Here, you don't need to deal with server latency or network speed whatsoever and can interact directly with your database.
+The Payload Local API gives you the ability to execute the same operations that are available through REST and GraphQL
+within Node, directly on your server. Here, you don't need to deal with server latency or network speed whatsoever and
+can interact directly with your database.
 
 <Banner type="success">
   <strong>Tip:</strong>
   <br />
-  The Local API is incredibly powerful when used in React Server Components and other similar server-side contexts. With other headless CMS, you need to request your data from third-party servers via an HTTP layer, which can add significant loading time to your server-rendered pages. With Payload, you don't have to leave your server to gather the data you need. It can be incredibly fast and is definitely a game changer.
+  The Local API is incredibly powerful when used with server-side rendering app frameworks like
+  NextJS. With other headless CMS, you need to request your data from third-party servers which can
+  add significant loading time to your server-rendered pages. With Payload, you don't have to leave
+  your server to gather the data you need. It can be incredibly fast and is definitely a game
+  changer.
 </Banner>
 
 Here are some common examples of how you can use the Local API:
 
-- Fetching Payload data within React Server Components
 - Seeding data via Node seed scripts that you write and maintain
-- Opening custom Next.js route handlers which feature additional functionality but still rely on Payload
-- Within [Access Control](../access-control) and [Hooks](../hooks/overview)
+- Opening custom Express routes which feature additional functionality but still rely on Payload
+- Within access control and hook functions
 
-## Accessing Payload
+## Accessing payload
 
 You can gain access to the currently running `payload` object via two ways:
 
-#### Accessing from args or `req`
+#### Importing it
 
-In most places within Payload itself, you can access `payload` directly from the arguments of [Hooks](../hooks/overview), [Access Control](../access-control/overview), [Validation](../fields/overview#validations) functions, and similar. This is the simplest way to access Payload in most cases. Most config functions take the `req` (Request) object, which has Payload bound to it (`req.payload`).
+You can import or require `payload` into your own files after it's been initialized, but you need to make sure that
+your `import` / `require` statements come **after** you call `payload.init()`—otherwise Payload won't have been
+initialized yet. That might be obvious. To us, it's usually not.
+
+Example:
+
+```ts
+import payload from 'payload'
+import { CollectionAfterChangeHook } from 'payload/types'
+
+const afterChangeHook: CollectionAfterChangeHook = async () => {
+  const posts = await payload.find({
+    collection: 'posts',
+  })
+}
+```
+
+#### Accessing from the `req`
+
+Payload is available anywhere you have access to the Express `req` - including within your access control and hook
+functions.
 
 Example:
 
@@ -39,58 +64,22 @@ const afterChangeHook: CollectionAfterChangeHook = async ({ req: { payload } })
 }
 ```
 
-#### Importing it
-
-If you want to import Payload in places where you don't have the option to access it from function arguments or `req`, you can import it and initialize it.
-
-There are two places to import Payload:
-
-**Option 1 - using HMR, within Next.js**
-
-```ts
-import { getPayloadHMR } from '@payloadcms/next/utilities'
-import config from '@payload-config'
-
-const payload = await getPayloadHMR({ config })
-```
-
-You should import Payload using the first option (`getPayloadHMR`) if you are using Payload inside of Next.js (like route handlers, server components, and similar.)
-
-This way, in Next.js development mode, Payload will work with Hot Module Replacement (HMR), and as you make changes to your Payload Config, your usage of Payload will always be in sync with your changes. In production, `getPayloadHMR` simply disables all HMR functionality so you don't need to write your code any differently. We handle optimization for you in production mode.
-
-If you are accessing Payload via function arguments or `req.payload`, HMR is automatically supported if you are using it within Next.js.
-
-**Option 2 - outside of Next.js**
-
-If you are using Payload outside of Next.js, for example in standalone scripts or in other frameworks, you can import Payload with no HMR functionality.
-
-```ts
-import { getPayload } from 'payload'
-import { importConfig } from 'payload/node'
-
-const config = await importConfig('./payload.config.ts')
-const payload = await getPayload({ config })
-```
-
-Both options function in exactly the same way outside of one having HMR support and the other not. However, when you import your Payload Config, you need to make sure that you can import it safely.
-
-For more information about using Payload outside of Next.js, [click here](/docs/beta/local-api/outside-nextjs).
-
 ## Local options available
 
-You can specify more options within the Local API vs. REST or GraphQL due to the server-only context that they are executed in.
+You can specify more options within the Local API vs. REST or GraphQL due to the server-only context that they are
+executed in.
 
-| Local Option       | Description  |
-| ------------------ | ------------ |
-| `collection`       | Required for Collection operations. Specifies the Collection slug to operate against. |
-| `data`             | The data to use within the operation. Required for `create`, `update`. |
-| `depth`            | [Control auto-population](../queries/depth) of nested relationship and upload fields. |
-| `locale`           | Specify [locale](/docs/configuration/localization) for any returned documents. |
-| `fallbackLocale`   | Specify a [fallback locale](/docs/configuration/localization) to use for any returned documents. |
-| `overrideAccess`   | Skip access control. By default, this property is set to true within all Local API operations. |
-| `user`             | If you set `overrideAccess` to `false`, you can pass a user to use against the access control checks. |
-| `showHiddenFields` | Opt-in to receiving hidden fields. By default, they are hidden from returned documents in accordance to your config. |
-| `pagination`       | Set to false to return all documents and avoid querying for document counts. |
+| Local Option       | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| `collection`       | Required for Collection operations. Specifies the Collection slug to operate against.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
+| `data`             | The data to use within the operation. Required for `create`, `update`.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
+| `depth`            | [Control auto-population](/docs/getting-started/concepts#depth) of nested relationship and upload fields.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             |
+| `locale`           | Specify [locale](/docs/configuration/localization) for any returned documents.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
+| `fallbackLocale`   | Specify a [fallback locale](/docs/configuration/localization) to use for any returned documents.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
+| `overrideAccess`   | Skip access control. By default, this property is set to true within all Local API operations.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
+| `user`             | If you set `overrideAccess` to `false`, you can pass a user to use against the access control checks.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
+| `showHiddenFields` | Opt-in to receiving hidden fields. By default, they are hidden from returned documents in accordance to your config.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
+| `pagination`       | Set to false to return all documents and avoid querying for document counts.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
 | `context`          | [Context](/docs/hooks/context), which will then be passed to `context` and `req.context`, which can be read by hooks. Useful if you want to pass additional information to the hooks which shouldn't be necessarily part of the document, for example a `triggerBeforeChange` option which can be read by the BeforeChange hook to determine if it should run or not. |
 
 _There are more options available on an operation by operation basis outlined below._
@@ -321,7 +310,7 @@ const result = await payload.login({
     email: 'dev@payloadcms.com',
     password: 'rip',
   },
-  req: req, // pass a Request object to be provided to all hooks
+  req: req, // pass an Express `req` which will be provided to all hooks
   res: res, // used to automatically set an HTTP-only auth cookie
   depth: 2,
   locale: 'en',
@@ -341,7 +330,7 @@ const token = await payload.forgotPassword({
     // required
     email: 'dev@payloadcms.com',
   },
-  req: req, // pass a Request object to be provided to all hooks
+  req: req, // pass an Express `req` which will be provided to all hooks
 })
 ```
 
@@ -360,7 +349,7 @@ const result = await payload.resetPassword({
     password: req.body.password, // the new password to set
     token: 'afh3o2jf2p3f...', // the token generated from the forgotPassword operation
   },
-  req: req, // pass a Request object to be provided to all hooks
+  req: req, // pass an Express `req` which will be provided to all hooks
   res: res, // used to automatically set an HTTP-only auth cookie
 })
 ```
@@ -375,7 +364,7 @@ const result = await payload.unlock({
     // required
     email: 'dev@payloadcms.com',
   },
-  req: req, // pass a Request object to be provided to all hooks
+  req: req, // pass an Express `req` which will be provided to all hooks
   overrideAccess: true,
 })
 ```
@@ -435,6 +424,109 @@ const result = await payload.updateGlobal({
 })
 ```
 
+## Next.js Conflict with Local API
+
+There is a known issue when using the Local API with Next.js version `13.4.13` and higher. Next.js executes within a
+separate child process, and Payload has not been initalized yet in these instances. That means that unless you
+explicitly initialize Payload within your operation, it will not be running and return no data / an empty object.
+
+As a workaround, we recommend leveraging the following pattern to determine and ensure Payload is initalized:
+
+```
+import dotenv from 'dotenv'
+import path from 'path'
+import type { Payload } from 'payload'
+import payload from 'payload'
+import type { InitOptions } from 'payload/config'
+import { seed as seedData } from './seed'
+
+dotenv.config({
+  path: path.resolve(__dirname, '../.env'),
+})
+
+let cached = (global as any).payload
+
+if (!cached) {
+  cached = (global as any).payload = { client: null, promise: null }
+}
+
+interface Args {
+  initOptions?: Partial<InitOptions>
+  seed?: boolean
+}
+
+export const getPayloadClient = async ({ initOptions, seed }: Args = {}): Promise<Payload> => {
+  if (!process.env.DATABASE_URI) {
+    throw new Error('DATABASE_URI environment variable is missing')
+  }
+  if (!process.env.PAYLOAD_SECRET) {
+    throw new Error('PAYLOAD_SECRET environment variable is missing')
+  }
+  if (cached.client) {
+    return cached.client
+  }
+  if (!cached.promise) {
+    cached.promise = payload.init({
+      mongoURL: process.env.DATABASE_URI,
+      secret: process.env.PAYLOAD_SECRET,
+      local: initOptions?.express ? false : true,
+      ...(initOptions || {}),
+    })
+  }
+  try {
+    process.env.PAYLOAD_DROP_DATABASE = seed ? 'true' : 'false'
+    cached.client = await cached.promise
+    if (seed) {
+      payload.logger.info('---- SEEDING DATABASE ----')
+      await seedData(payload)
+    }
+  } catch (e: unknown) {
+    cached.promise = null
+    throw e
+  }
+  return cached.client
+}
+```
+
+To checkout how this works in a project, take a look at
+our [custom server example](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/master/examples/custom-server/src/getPayload.ts).
+
+## Example Script using Local API
+
+The Local API is especially useful for running scripts
+
+```ts
+import payload from 'payload'
+import path from 'path'
+import dotenv from 'dotenv'
+
+dotenv.config({
+  path: path.resolve(__dirname, '../.env'),
+})
+
+const { PAYLOAD_SECRET } = process.env
+
+const doAction = async (): Promise<void> => {
+  await payload.init({
+    secret: PAYLOAD_SECRET,
+    local: true, // Enables local mode, doesn't spin up a server or frontend
+  })
+
+  // Perform any Local API operations here
+  await payload.find({
+    collection: 'posts',
+    // where: {} // optional
+  })
+
+  await payload.create({
+    collection: 'posts',
+    data: {},
+  })
+}
+
+doAction()
+```
+
 ## TypeScript
 
 Local API calls will automatically infer your [generated types](/docs/typescript/generating-types).

docs/plugins/build-your-own.mdx

@@ -3,10 +3,10 @@ title: Building Your Own Plugin
 label: Build Your Own
 order: 50
 desc: Starting to build your own plugin? Find everything you need and learn best practices with the Payload plugin template.
-keywords: plugins, template, config, configuration, extensions, custom, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: plugins, template, config, configuration, extensions, custom, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
-Building your own [Payload Plugin](./overview) is easy, and if you're already familiar with Payload then you'll have everything you need to get started. You can either start from scratch or use the [Plugin Template](#plugin-template) to get up and running quickly.
+Building your own plugin is easy, and if you're already familiar with Payload then you'll have everything you need to get started. You can either start from scratch or use the Payload plugin template to get up and running quickly.
 
 <Banner type="success">
   To use the template, run `npx create-payload-app@latest -t plugin -n my-new-plugin` directly in
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ Building your own [Payload Plugin](./overview) is easy, and if you&apos;re alrea
 
 Our plugin template includes everything you need to build a full life-cycle plugin:
 
-- Example files and functions for extending the Payload Config
+- Example files and functions for extending the payload config
 - A local dev environment to develop the plugin
 - Test suite with integrated GitHub workflow
 
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ Here is a brief recap of how to integrate plugins with Payload, to learn more he
 
 ### How to install a plugin
 
-To install any plugin, simply add it to your Payload Config in the plugins array.
+To install any plugin, simply add it to your Payload config in the plugins array.
 
 ```
 import samplePlugin from 'sample-plugin';
@@ -57,11 +57,11 @@ The initialization process goes in the following order:
 
 ## Plugin Template
 
-In the [Payload Plugin Template](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload-plugin-template), you will see a common file structure that is used across plugins:
+In the [Payload plugin template](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload-plugin-template), you will see a common file structure that is used across plugins:
 
-1. `/` root folder - general configuration
-2. `/src` folder - everything related to the plugin
-3. `/dev` folder - sanitized test project for development
+1. root folder - general configuration
+2. /src folder - everything related to the plugin
+3. /dev folder - sanitized test project for development
 
 ### The root folder
 
@@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ First up, the `src/index.ts` file - this is where the plugin should be imported
 
 **Plugin.ts**
 
-To reiterate, the essence of a [Payload Plugin](./overview) is simply to extend the [Payload Config](../configuration/overview) - and that is exactly what we are doing in this file.
+To reiterate, the essence of a payload plugin is simply to extend the Payload config - and that is exactly what we are doing in this file.
 
 ```
 export const samplePlugin =
@@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ export const samplePlugin =
  }
 ```
 
-1. First, you need to receive the existing Payload Config along with any plugin options.
+1. First, you need to receive the existing Payload config along with any plugin options.
 2. Then set the variable `config` to be equal to a copy of the existing config.
 3. From here, you can extend the config however you like!
 4. Finally, return the config and you&apos;re all set.
@@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ export const samplePlugin =
 
 [Spread syntax](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/JavaScript/Reference/Operators/Spread_syntax) (or the spread operator) is a feature in JavaScript that uses the dot notation **(...)** to spread elements from arrays, strings, or objects into various contexts.
 
-We are going to use spread syntax to allow us to add data to existing arrays without losing the existing data. It is crucial to spread the existing data correctly, else this can cause adverse behavior and conflicts with Payload Config and other plugins.
+We are going to use spread syntax to allow us to add data to existing arrays without losing the existing data. It is crucial to spread the existing data correctly, else this can cause adverse behavior and conflicts with Payload config and other plugins.
 
 Let&apos;s say you want to build a plugin that adds a new collection:
 
@@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ config.collections = [
 ]
 ```
 
-First, you need to spread the `config.collections` to ensure that we don&apos;t lose the existing collections. Then you can add any additional collections, just as you would in a regular Payload Config.
+First, you need to spread the `config.collections` to ensure that we don&apos;t lose the existing collections. Then you can add any additional collections, just as you would in a regular payload config.
 
 This same logic is applied to other properties like admin, globals, hooks:
 
@@ -235,6 +235,22 @@ If you wish to add to the `onInit`, you must include the async/await. We don&apo
 
 In the template, we have stubbed out a basic `onInitExtension` file that you can use, if not needed feel free to delete it.
 
+## Webpack
+
+If any of your files use server only packages such as fs, stripe, nodemailer, etc, they will need to be removed from the browser bundle. To do that, you can [alias the file imports with webpack](https://payloadcms.com/docs/admin/webpack#aliasing-server-only-modules).
+
+When files are bundled for the browser, the import paths are essentially crawled to determine what files to include in the bundle. To prevent the server only files from making it into the bundle, we can alias their import paths to a file that can be included in the browser. This will short-circuit the import path crawling and ensure browser only code is bundled.
+
+Webpack is another part of the Payload config that can be a little more tricky to extend. To help here, the template includes a helper function `extendWebpackConfig()` which takes care of spreading the existing webpack, so you can just add your new stuff:
+
+```
+config.admin = {
+  ...(config.admin || {}),
+  // Add your aliases to the helper function below
+  webpack: extendWebpackConfig(incomingConfig)
+}
+```
+
 ## Types
 
 If your plugin has options, you should define and provide types for these options in a separate file which gets exported from the main `index.ts`.
@@ -258,7 +274,7 @@ In addition to the setup covered above, here are other best practices to follow:
 
 ### Providing an enable / disable option
 
-For a better user experience, provide a way to disable the plugin without uninstalling it.
+For a better user experience, provide a way to disable the plugin without uninstalling it. This is especially important if your plugin adds additional webpack aliases, this will allow you to still let the webpack run to prevent errors.
 
 ### Include tests in your GitHub CI workflow
 
@@ -270,7 +286,7 @@ The best way to share and allow others to use your plugin once it is complete is
 
 ### Add payload-plugin topic tag
 
-Apply the tag **payload-plugin** to your GitHub repository. This will boost the visibility of your plugin and ensure it gets listed with [existing Payload plugins](https://github.com/topics/payload-plugin).
+Apply the tag **payload-plugin** to your GitHub repository. This will boost the visibility of your plugin and ensure it gets listed with [existing payload plugins](https://github.com/topics/payload-plugin).
 
 ### Use Semantic Versioning (SemVer)
 

docs/plugins/form-builder.mdx

@@ -2,15 +2,15 @@
 title: Form Builder Plugin
 label: Form Builder
 order: 20
-desc: Easily build and manage forms from the Admin Panel. Send dynamic, personalized emails and even accept and process payments.
+desc: Easily build and manage forms from the admin panel. Send dynamic, personalized emails and even accept and process payments.
 keywords: plugins, plugin, form, forms, form builder
 ---
 
 [![NPM](https://img.shields.io/npm/v/@payloadcms/plugin-form-builder)](https://www.npmjs.com/package/@payloadcms/plugin-form-builder)
 
-This plugin allows you to build and manage custom forms directly within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview). Instead of hard-coding a new form into your website or application every time you need one, admins can simply define the schema for each form they need on-the-fly, and your front-end can map over this schema, render its own UI components, and match your brand's design system.
+This plugin allows you to build and manage custom forms directly within the admin panel. Instead of hard-coding a new form into your website or application every time you need one, admins can simply define the schema for each form they need on-the-fly, and your front-end can map over this schema, render its own UI components, and match your brand's design system.
 
-All form submissions are stored directly in your database and are managed directly from the Admin Panel. When forms are submitted, you can display a custom on-screen confirmation message to the user or redirect them to a dedicated confirmation page. You can even send dynamic, personalized emails derived from the form's data. For example, you may want to send a confirmation email to the user who submitted the form, and also send a notification email to your team.
+All form submissions are stored directly in your database and are managed directly from the admin panel. When forms are submitted, you can display a custom on-screen confirmation message to the user or redirect them to a dedicated confirmation page. You can even send dynamic, personalized emails derived from the form's data. For example, you may want to send a confirmation email to the user who submitted the form, and also send a notification email to your team.
 
 Forms can be as simple or complex as you need, from a basic contact form, to a multi-step lead generation engine, or even a donation form that processes payment. You may not need to reach for third-party services like HubSpot or Mailchimp for this, but instead use your own first-party tooling, built directly into your own application.
 
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ Forms can be as simple or complex as you need, from a basic contact form, to a m
 
 ## Core Features
 
-- Build completely dynamic forms directly from the Admin Panel for a variety of use cases
+- Build completely dynamic forms directly from the admin panel for a variety of use cases
 - Render forms on your front-end using your own UI components and match your brand's design system
 - Send dynamic, personalized emails upon form submission to multiple recipients, derived from the form's data
 - Display a custom confirmation message or automatically redirect upon form submission
@@ -36,16 +36,16 @@ Forms can be as simple or complex as you need, from a basic contact form, to a m
 Install the plugin using any JavaScript package manager like [Yarn](https://yarnpkg.com), [NPM](https://npmjs.com), or [PNPM](https://pnpm.io):
 
 ```bash
-pnpm add @payloadcms/plugin-form-builder
+yarn add @payloadcms/plugin-form-builder
 ```
 
 ## Basic Usage
 
-In the `plugins` array of your [Payload Config](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/overview), call the plugin with [options](#options):
+In the `plugins` array of your [Payload config](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/overview), call the plugin with [options](#options):
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
-import { formBuilderPlugin } from '@payloadcms/plugin-form-builder'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import formBuilder from '@payloadcms/plugin-form-builder'
 
 const config = buildConfig({
   collections: [
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ const config = buildConfig({
     },
   ],
   plugins: [
-    formBuilderPlugin({
+    formBuilder({
       // see below for a list of available options
     }),
   ],
@@ -123,8 +123,6 @@ formBuilder({
 
 Override anything on the `forms` collection by sending a [Payload Collection Config](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/collections) to the `formOverrides` property.
 
-Note that the `fields` property is a function that receives the default fields and returns an array of fields. This is because the `fields` property is a special case that is merged with the default fields, rather than replacing them. This allows you to map over default fields and modify them as needed.
-
 ```ts
 // payload.config.ts
 formBuilder({
@@ -135,15 +133,12 @@ formBuilder({
       read: () => true,
       update: () => false,
     },
-    fields: ({ defaultFields }) => {
-      return [
-        ...defaultFields,
-        {
-          name: 'custom',
-          type: 'text',
-        },
-      ]
-    },
+    fields: [
+      {
+        name: 'custom-field',
+        type: 'text',
+      },
+    ],
   },
 })
 ```
@@ -167,15 +162,6 @@ formBuilder({
   // ...
   formSubmissionOverrides: {
     slug: 'leads',
-    fields: ({ defaultFields }) => {
-      return [
-        ...defaultFields,
-        {
-          name: 'custom',
-          type: 'text',
-        },
-      ]
-    },
   },
 })
 ```
@@ -385,12 +371,13 @@ This plugin relies on the [email configuration](https://payloadcms.com/docs/emai
 
 All types can be directly imported:
 
-```ts
-import type {
+```js
+import {
   PluginConfig,
   Form,
   FormSubmission,
   FieldsConfig,
+  BeforePayment,
   BeforeEmail,
   HandlePayment,
   ...

docs/plugins/nested-docs.mdx

@@ -48,17 +48,17 @@ Install the plugin using any JavaScript package manager like [Yarn](https://yarn
 or [PNPM](https://pnpm.io):
 
 ```bash
-  pnpm add @payloadcms/plugin-nested-docs
+  yarn add @payloadcms/plugin-nested-docs
 ```
 
 ## Basic Usage
 
-In the `plugins` array of your [Payload Config](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/overview), call the plugin
+In the `plugins` array of your [Payload config](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/overview), call the plugin
 with [options](#options):
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
-import { nestedDocsPlugin } from '@payloadcms/plugin-nested-docs'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import nestedDocs from '@payloadcms/plugin-nested-docs'
 
 const config = buildConfig({
   collections: [
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ const config = buildConfig({
     },
   ],
   plugins: [
-    nestedDocsPlugin({
+    nestedDocs({
       collections: ['pages'],
       generateLabel: (_, doc) => doc.title,
       generateURL: (docs) => docs.reduce((url, doc) => `${url}/${doc.slug}`, ''),
@@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ You can also extend the built-in `parent` and `breadcrumbs` fields per collectio
 and `createBreadcrumbField` methods. They will merge your customizations overtop the plugin's base field configurations.
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
 import { createParentField } from '@payloadcms/plugin-nested-docs/fields'
 import { createBreadcrumbsField } from '@payloadcms/plugin-nested-docs/fields'
 
@@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ const examplePageConfig: CollectionConfig = {
 
 ## Localization
 
-This plugin supports localization by default. If the `localization` property is set in your Payload Config,
+This plugin supports localization by default. If the `localization` property is set in your Payload config,
 the `breadcrumbs` field is automatically localized. For more details on how localization works in Payload, see
 the [Localization](https://payloadcms.com/docs/localization/overview) docs.
 

docs/plugins/overview.mdx

@@ -3,105 +3,99 @@ title: Plugins
 label: Overview
 order: 10
 desc: Plugins provide a great way to modularize Payload functionalities into easy-to-use enhancements and extensions of your Payload apps.
-keywords: plugins, config, configuration, extensions, custom, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+keywords: plugins, config, configuration, extensions, custom, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
-Payload Plugins take full advantage of the modularity of the [Payload Config](../configuration/overview), allowing developers to extend Payload's core functionality in a precise and granular way. This pattern allows developers to easily inject custom—sometimes complex—functionality into Payload apps from a very small touch-point.
-
-There are many [Official Plugins](#official-plugins) available that solve for some of the most common uses cases, such as the [Form Builder Plugin](./seo) or [SEO Plugin](./seo). There are also [Community Plugins](#community-plugins) available, maintained entirely by contributing members. To extend Payload's functionality in some other way, you can easily [build your own plugin](./build-your-own).
-
-To configure Plugins, use the `plugins` property in your [Payload Config](../configuration/overview):
-
-```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
-
-const config = buildConfig({
-  // ...
-  // highlight-start
-  plugins: [
-    // Add Plugins here
-  ],
-  // highlight-end
-})
-```
-
-Writing Plugins is no more complex than writing regular JavaScript. If you know the basic concept of [callback functions](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Glossary/Callback_function) or how [spread syntax](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/JavaScript/Reference/Operators/Spread_syntax) works, and are up to speed with Payload concepts, then writing a plugin will be a breeze.
+Payload comes with a built-in Plugins infrastructure that allows developers to build their own modular and easily reusable sets of functionality.
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  Because we rely on a simple config-based structure, Payload Plugins simply take in an
-  existing config and returns a _modified_ config with new fields, hooks, collections, admin views, or
+  Because we rely on a simple config-based structure, Payload plugins simply take in a user's
+  existing config and return a modified config with new fields, hooks, collections, admin views, or
   anything else you can think of.
 </Banner>
 
+Writing plugins is no more complex than writing regular JavaScript. If you know how [spread syntax](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/JavaScript/Reference/Operators/Spread_syntax) works and are up to speed with Payload concepts, writing a plugin will be a breeze.
+
 **Example use cases:**
 
 - Automatically sync data from a specific collection to HubSpot or a similar CRM when data is added or changes
 - Add password-protection functionality to certain documents
 - Add a full e-commerce backend to any Payload app
-- Add custom reporting views to Payload's Admin Panel
+- Add custom reporting views to Payload's admin panel
 - Encrypt specific collections' data
 - Add a full form builder implementation
 - Integrate all `upload`-enabled collections with a third-party file host like S3 or Cloudinary
 - Add custom endpoints or GraphQL queries / mutations with any type of custom functionality that you can think of
 
-## Official Plugins
+## How to install plugins
 
-Payload maintains a set of Official Plugins that solve for some of the common use cases. These plugins are maintained by the Payload team and its contributors and are guaranteed to be stable and up-to-date.
+The base Payload config allows for a `plugins` property which takes an `array` of [`Plugins`](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/main/packages/payload/src/config/types.ts).
 
-- [Form Builder](./form-builder)
-- [Nested Docs](./nested-docs)
-- [Redirects](./redirects)
-- [Search](./search)
-- [Sentry](./sentry)
-- [SEO](./seo)
-- [Stripe](./stripe)
+```js
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+// note: these plugins are not real (yet?)
+import addLastModified from 'payload-add-last-modified'
+import passwordProtect from 'payload-password-protect'
+import { mongooseAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-mongodb'
+import { postgresAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-postgres'
 
-You can also [build your own plugin](./build-your-own) to easily extend Payload's functionality in some other way. Once your plugin is ready, consider [sharing it with the community](#community-plugins).
+import { viteBundler } from '@payloadcms/bundler-vite'
+import { webpackBundler } from '@payloadcms/bundler-webpack'
 
-Plugins are changing every day, so be sure to check back often to see what new plugins may have been added. If you have a specific plugin you would like to see, please feel free to start a new [Discussion](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/discussions).
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  For a complete list of Official Plugins, visit the [Packages Directory](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/packages) of the [Payload Monorepo](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload).
-</Banner>
-
-## Community Plugins
-
-Community Plugins are those that are maintained entirely by outside contributors. They are a great way to share your work across the ecosystem for others to use. You can discover Community Plugins by browsing the `payload-plugin` topic on [GitHub](https://github.com/topics/payload-plugin).
-
-Some plugins have become so widely used that they are adopted as an [Official Plugin](#official-plugin), such as the [Lexical Plugin](https://github.com/AlessioGr/payload-plugin-lexical). If you have a plugin that you think should be an Official Plugin, please feel free to start a new [Discussion](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/discussions).
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  For maintainers building plugins for others to use, please add the `payload-plugin` topic on [GitHub](https://github.com/topics/payload-plugin) to help others find it.
-</Banner>
-
-## Example
-
-The base [Payload Config](../configuration/overview) allows for a `plugins` property which takes an `array` of [Plugin Configs](./build-your-own).
-
-```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
-import { addLastModified } from './addLastModified.ts'
 
 const config = buildConfig({
-  // ...
-  // highlight-start
-  plugins: [
-    addLastModified,
+  bundler: webpackBundler() // or viteBundler(),
+  collections: [
+    {
+      slug: 'pages',
+      fields: [
+        {
+          name: 'title',
+          type: 'text',
+          required: true,
+        },
+        {
+          name: 'content',
+          type: 'richText',
+          required: true,
+        },
+      ],
+    },
+  ],
+  db: mongooseAdapter({}) // or postgresAdapter({})
+  plugins: [
+    // Many plugins require options to be passed.
+    // In the following example, we call the function
+    // and pass it options accordingly
+    passwordProtect(['pages']),
+
+    // This plugin takes no options and just
+    // needs to be passed directly
+    addLastModified,
+
+    // ..
+    // To understand how to use the plugins you're interested in,
+    // consult their corresponding documentation
   ],
-  // highlight-end
 })
+
+export default config
 ```
 
-<Banner type="warning">
-  Payload Plugins are executed _after_ the incoming config is validated, but before it is sanitized and has had default options merged in. After all plugins are executed, the full config with all plugins will be sanitized.
-</Banner>
+### When Plugins are initialized
 
-Here is an example what the `addLastModified` plugin from above might look like. It adds a `lastModifiedBy` field to all Payload collections. For full details, see [how to build your own plugin](./build-your-own).
+Payload Plugins are executed _after_ the incoming config is validated, but before it is sanitized and had default options merged in.
+
+After all plugins are executed, the full config with all plugins will be sanitized.
+
+## Simple example
+
+Here is an example for how to automatically add a `lastModifiedBy` field to all Payload collections using a Plugin written in TypeScript.
 
 ```ts
-import { Config, Plugin } from 'payload'
+import { Config, Plugin } from 'payload/config'
 
-export const addLastModified: Plugin = (incomingConfig: Config): Config => {
+const addLastModified: Plugin = (incomingConfig: Config): Config => {
   // Find all incoming auth-enabled collections
   // so we can create a lastModifiedBy relationship field
   // to all auth collections
@@ -144,9 +138,12 @@ export const addLastModified: Plugin = (incomingConfig: Config): Config => {
 
   return config
 }
+
+export default addLastModified
 ```
 
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
-  See [how to build your own plugin](./build-your-own) for a more in-depth explication on how create your own Payload Plugin.
-</Banner>
+## Available Plugins
+
+You can discover existing plugins by browsing the `payload-plugin` topic on [GitHub](https://github.com/topics/payload-plugin).
+
+For maintainers building plugins for others to use, please add the topic to help others find it. If you would like one to be built by the core Payload team, [open a Feature Request](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/discussions) in our GitHub Discussions board. We would be happy to review your code and maybe feature you and your plugin where appropriate.

docs/plugins/redirects.mdx

@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ keywords: plugins, redirects, redirect, plugin, payload, cms, seo, indexing, sea
 
 [![NPM](https://img.shields.io/npm/v/@payloadcms/plugin-redirects)](https://www.npmjs.com/package/@payloadcms/plugin-redirects)
 
-This plugin allows you to easily manage redirects for your application from within your [Admin Panel](../admin/overview). It does so by adding a `redirects` collection to your config that allows you specify a redirect from one URL to another. Your front-end application can use this data to automatically redirect users to the correct page using proper HTTP status codes. This is useful for SEO, indexing, and search engine ranking when re-platforming or when changing your URL structure.
+This plugin allows you to easily manage redirects for your application from within your admin panel. It does so by adding a `redirects` collection to your config that allows you specify a redirect from one URL to another. Your front-end application can use this data to automatically redirect users to the correct page using proper HTTP status codes. This is useful for SEO, indexing, and search engine ranking when re-platforming or when changing your URL structure.
 
 For example, if you have a page at `/about` and you want to change it to `/about-us`, you can create a redirect from the old page to the new one, then you can use this data to write HTTP redirects into your front-end application. This will ensure that users are redirected to the correct page without penalty because search engines are notified of the change at the request level. This is a very lightweight plugin that will allow you to integrate managed redirects for any front-end framework.
 
@@ -32,16 +32,16 @@ For example, if you have a page at `/about` and you want to change it to `/about
 Install the plugin using any JavaScript package manager like [Yarn](https://yarnpkg.com), [NPM](https://npmjs.com), or [PNPM](https://pnpm.io):
 
 ```bash
-  pnpm add @payloadcms/plugin-redirects
+  yarn add @payloadcms/plugin-redirects
 ```
 
 ## Basic Usage
 
-In the `plugins` array of your [Payload Config](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/overview), call the plugin with [options](#options):
+In the `plugins` array of your [Payload config](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/overview), call the plugin with [options](#options):
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
-import { redirectsPlugin } from '@payloadcms/plugin-redirects'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import redirects from '@payloadcms/plugin-redirects'
 
 const config = buildConfig({
   collections: [
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ const config = buildConfig({
     },
   ],
   plugins: [
-    redirectsPlugin({
+    redirects({
       collections: ['pages'],
     }),
   ],
@@ -67,25 +67,6 @@ export default config
 | `collections` | `string[]` | An array of collection slugs to populate in the `to` field of each redirect.                    |
 | `overrides`   | `object`   | A partial collection config that allows you to override anything on the `redirects` collection. |
 
-Note that the fields in overrides take a function that receives the default fields and returns an array of fields. This allows you to add fields to the collection.
-
-```ts
-redirectsPlugin({
-  collections: ['pages'],
-  overrides: {
-    fields: ({ defaultFields }) => {
-      return [
-        ...defaultFields,
-        {
-          type: 'text',
-          name: 'customField',
-        },
-      ]
-    },
-  },
-})
-```
-
 ## TypeScript
 
 All types can be directly imported:

docs/plugins/search.mdx

@@ -39,16 +39,16 @@ This plugin is a great way to implement a fast, immersive search experience such
 Install the plugin using any JavaScript package manager like [Yarn](https://yarnpkg.com), [NPM](https://npmjs.com), or [PNPM](https://pnpm.io):
 
 ```bash
-  pnpm add @payloadcms/plugin-search
+  yarn add @payloadcms/plugin-search
 ```
 
 ## Basic Usage
 
-In the `plugins` array of your [Payload Config](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/overview), call the plugin with [options](#options):
+In the `plugins` array of your [Payload config](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/overview), call the plugin with [options](#options):
 
 ```js
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
-import { searchPlugin } from '@payloadcms/plugin-search'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import search from '@payloadcms/plugin-search'
 
 const config = buildConfig({
   collections: [
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ const config = buildConfig({
     },
   ],
   plugins: [
-    searchPlugin({
+    search({
       collections: ['pages', 'posts'],
       defaultPriorities: {
         pages: 10,
@@ -104,8 +104,6 @@ The `defaultPriorities` property is used to set a fallback `priority` on search
 
 This plugin automatically creates the `search` collection, but you can override anything on this collection via the `searchOverrides` property. It accepts anything from the [Payload Collection Config](https://payloadcms.com/docs/configuration/collections) and merges it in with the default `search` collection config provided by the plugin.
 
-Note that the `fields` property is a function that receives an object with a `defaultFields` key. This is an array of fields that are automatically added to the `search` collection. You can modify this array or add new fields to it.
-
 ```ts
 // payload.config.ts
 {
@@ -113,16 +111,6 @@ Note that the `fields` property is a function that receives an object with a `de
   searchPlugin({
     searchOverrides: {
       slug: 'search-results',
-      fields: ({ defaultFields }) => [
-        ...defaultFields,
-        {
-          name: 'excerpt',
-          type: 'textarea',
-          admin: {
-            position: 'sidebar',
-          },
-        },
-      ],
     },
   }),
 }